InvenSage

Create products with ease

Full.CX effortlessly transforms your ideas into product requirements.

Full.CX turns product visions into detailed product requirements. The product below was entirely generated using our AI and advanced algorithms, exclusively available to our paid subscribers.

Product Details

Name

InvenSage

Tagline

Empower Your Inventory Insight

Inventory Innovator

Name: Inventory Innovator
Description: The Inventory Innovator thrives on optimizing stock levels and streamlining operations. They possess a keen understanding of how effective inventory management can drive profitability. Engaging with InvenSage, they utilize its intuitive features to identify trends, forecast demand, and implement automated processes. Their daily routine involves analyzing data insights to make strategic decisions that directly impact their business’s success.
Demographics: Age: 30-45, Gender: Any, Education: Bachelor's degree in Business, Supply Chain, or related field, Occupation: Inventory Manager at a retail or e-commerce company, Income Level: $60,000-$90,000 annually.
Background: Growing up in a family of small business owners, the Inventory Innovator developed a passion for entrepreneurship early on. Completing their degree in Business Administration, they initially worked in various roles in retail management. Over the years, they honed their skills in inventory control and data analysis, leading them to focus on optimizing supply chain processes. Traveling often for trade shows, they stay updated on the latest industry trends and technology.
Psychographics: Values efficiency, believes in data-driven decisions, motivated by profitability and sustainability in business, enjoys exploring new technologies, values collaboration with suppliers and partners.
Needs: Accurate forecasting, automated reorder processes, user-friendly data visualization tools, insights into inventory turnover, and strategies to reduce waste.
Pain: Struggles with inaccurate inventory counts, often faces last-minute stock shortages, suffers from difficulties in forecasting demand, and is challenged by integrating new tools with legacy systems.
Channels: Primarily engages through SaaS platforms, uses professional networking sites like LinkedIn, participates in inventory management webinars, and frequently visits industry-related forums.
Usage: Regularly uses InvenSage daily, relies on it for real-time data access, primarily engages with the demand forecasting feature during monthly planning sessions, and utilizes reporting tools weekly to assess performance metrics.
Decision: Decision-making is influenced by cost-efficiency, must-have features related to customization, peer recommendations within industry groups, and the need for reliability in service and support.

E-commerce Efficiency Expert

Name: E-commerce Efficiency Expert
Description: The E-commerce Efficiency Expert is dedicated to optimizing online sales through effective inventory management. With a focus on automation and real-time tracking, they rely on InvenSage to manage stock levels seamlessly and ensure products are always available for customers. Their daily activities revolve around analyzing sales data and adjusting inventory strategies for peak performance.
Demographics: Age: 25-40, Gender: Any, Education: Bachelor’s in Marketing, Business, or IT, Occupation: E-commerce Business Owner or Manager, Income Level: $50,000-$80,000 annually.
Background: Having always shown a flair for online commerce, the E-commerce Efficiency Expert started an online retail store while in college. They learned the ropes of digital marketing and logistics in an ever-evolving landscape. With hands-on experience and ongoing enquiries about e-commerce, they continuously adapt their business strategies, focusing on enhancing user experience and efficient inventory management.
Psychographics: Values innovation, motivated by customer satisfaction and streamlined operations, enjoys learning about emerging technology trends, believes in the importance of brand loyalty and community engagement.
Needs: Dynamic inventory tracking, instant alerts on stock levels, integration with existing e-commerce platforms, customer demand forecasting tools, and easy-to-use reporting features.
Pain: Experiences common issues like overstocking or stockouts, faces complexities with integrating various tools, struggles with inefficient inventory turnover, and feels overwhelmed with the volume of data to digest and analyze.
Channels: Utilizes social media platforms (especially Instagram and Facebook) for marketing, frequents e-commerce forums, combines reading industry blogs with attending online workshops, and relies on email for customer communications.
Usage: Uses InvenSage multiple times a week, especially during high-traffic sales periods, relies on it for building forecasts and strategic purchasing, checks inventory status and generates reports weekly, and engages with the helpdesk for troubleshooting when necessary.
Decision: Decisions are made based on analysis of ROI from inventory investments, influencer recommendations, ease of use, and customer feedback regarding product availability.

Warehouse Wizard

Name: Warehouse Wizard
Description: The Warehouse Wizard specializes in optimizing warehouse operations and logistics. Using InvenSage, they ensure that inventory is accurately tracked, stored, and retrieved, increasing efficiency and reducing errors. Their day-to-day tasks involve coordinating logistics and implementing best practices in inventory management.
Demographics: Age: 28-50, Gender: Any, Education: High school diploma or associate degree in Logistics or Supply Chain Management, Occupation: Warehouse Manager, Income Level: $40,000-$70,000 annually.
Background: Beginning their career as a warehouse worker, the Warehouse Wizard climbed the ladder quickly due to their passion for efficiency and organization. They pursued further training and certification in logistics, which gave them the skills needed for managerial roles. Always keen on methodologies for improvement, they enjoy learning about new technologies and process optimization techniques.
Psychographics: Believes in the importance of operational excellence, values collaboration among team members, motivated by efficiency, accuracy, and employee training, appreciates a well-organized work environment.
Needs: Real-time tracking of inventory movements, strategic reporting tools, seamless integration with shipping carriers, user-friendly logistics management features, and ongoing training opportunities for staff.
Pain: Struggles with inaccurate inventory counts leading to fulfillment errors, often deals with inventory management system integration issues, faces challenges in training new staff, and is frustrated by outdated processes that slow down operations.
Channels: Primarily communicates through internal platforms for updates, utilizes logistics and warehousing forums, engages in industry-specific webinars, and regularly checks email for communication with suppliers.
Usage: Uses InvenSage daily for overseeing operations, relies on it for warehouse audits and inventory counts weekly, monitors stock levels in real-time, and participates in reporting and forecasting sessions monthly to improve operational workflows.
Decision: Informed by efficiency metrics, influenced by project management tools, relies on team input for system preference, prioritizes user-friendly features, and looks for cost-saving implementations.

Business Bridger

Name: Business Bridger
Description: The Business Bridger brings together different departments to streamline inventory management solutions. They use InvenSage to analyze data from various teams, providing comprehensive insights that enable informed decision-making across the organization. Their daily routine involves meetings, collaborative projects, and strategy sessions.
Demographics: Age: 30-55, Gender: Any, Education: Bachelor's or Master's degree in Business Management or related field, Occupation: Operations Manager, Income Level: $70,000-$120,000 annually.
Background: With a solid foundation in various business functions, the Business Bridger started their career in logistics before transitioning into operations management. Their experiences across different departments give them a unique perspective on how to optimize processes. They are passionate about fostering team collaboration and breaking down silos to promote overall success.
Psychographics: Values teamwork, motivated by holistic business success and efficiency improvements, believes in continuous learning and knowledge sharing, enjoys mentoring others and leading cross-departmental initiatives.
Needs: Comprehensive data visualization tools and reporting features, collaboration capabilities, strong analytical modules, integration capabilities with other enterprise systems, and easy access to historical data for trend analysis.
Pain: Feels the frustration of miscommunication between teams, struggles with inconsistent inventory reporting, deals with the pressure of meeting diverse stakeholder expectations, and often encounters resistance to change within the organization.
Channels: Uses collaboration platforms (like Slack or Teams) extensively, engages with analytics dashboards, attends management seminars, and conducts one-on-one meetings with team leaders to align goals.
Usage: Involves using InvenSage on a weekly basis to develop cross-departmental reports, uses it daily to track essential inventory metrics, participates in monthly strategy sessions to drive improvement initiatives, and collaborates regularly with teams through the platform’s shared functionalities.
Decision: Decisions are made through consensus-building, informed by data-driven insights, heavily influenced by team feedback, and guided by organizational objectives and performance metrics.

Product Ideas

Dynamic Reorder Alerts: Dynamic Reorder Alerts utilize AI to send instant notifications to retailers and e-commerce businesses when stock levels fall below predefined thresholds, allowing for timely reordering and preventing stockouts. This feature improves inventory management efficiency by ensuring optimal stock levels in real-time.
Collaborative Inventory Reports: Collaborative Inventory Reports enable users across different departments to access and analyze shared inventory data, fostering collaboration and informed decision-making. This feature integrates insights from various stakeholders, enhancing transparency and strategic alignment in inventory management.
Augmented Reality Stock Visualization: Augmented Reality Stock Visualization allows users to visualize inventory in their space using AR technology. Retailers and warehouse operators can assess stock levels and placement visually, streamlining operations and improving processing efficiency.
Supplier Performance Dashboard: The Supplier Performance Dashboard offers insights into supplier delivery times, quality, and reliability, allowing businesses to optimize their procurement strategies. This feature aids supply chain analysts and business owners in making informed sourcing decisions based on supplier data.
In-store Inventory AI Assistant: The In-store Inventory AI Assistant is an interactive tool that guides retail managers on the sales floor, providing valuable insights into inventory levels, replenishment needs, and sales trends. This feature enhances on-the-spot decision-making and customer service.
Automated Compliance Checklists: Automated Compliance Checklists ensure that businesses adhere to industry regulations concerning inventory storage and management. This feature streamlines the compliance process, minimizing risks and promoting best practices in inventory management.
Real-time Customer Feedback Loop: Real-time Customer Feedback Loop allows customer service representatives to gather instant feedback on inventory-related inquiries and issues directly from customers. This feature enhances customer satisfaction while providing businesses with valuable insights into inventory performance and customer preferences.

Product Features

Smart Threshold Adjustment

Automatically adjusts reorder thresholds based on historical sales data and seasonal trends. This feature helps users maintain optimal stock levels by analyzing patterns and predicting stock needs, reducing the risk of overstocking or stockouts.

Requirements

Automated Data Analysis

User Story: As a retailer, I want the system to automatically adjust my reorder thresholds based on sales trends so that I can prevent stockouts and overstock situations without manual intervention.
Description: This requirement involves integrating an automated data analysis system that utilizes historical sales data and seasonal trends to effectively adjust reorder thresholds. This system will leverage machine learning algorithms to analyze various data inputs, including sales velocity, seasonal fluctuations, and promotional impacts, to dynamically adjust reorder thresholds. This will enhance InvenSage's inventory management capabilities by ensuring stock levels are optimized, reducing excess inventory and minimizing stockouts. The system will need to integrate seamlessly with existing database structures and reporting tools within the InvenSage platform, promoting a user-friendly experience and enabling informed decision-making through insightful analytics.
Acceptance Criteria: Threshold Adjustment for Peak Season Sales

Given that historical sales data indicates a peak season approaching, when the system analyzes the last three years of sales data for that period, then it should automatically adjust the reorder thresholds by at least 20% in response to increased demand predictions.

Dynamic Adjustment During Promotional Events

Given that a user initiates a promotional event, when the system accesses real-time sales data during the event, then it should dynamically adjust reorder thresholds based on a 15% increase in sales velocity observed during previous similar promotions.

Integration with Existing Database Structures

Given that the automated data analysis system is being implemented, when it is integrated with the existing InvenSage database, then it should successfully retrieve data without errors and ensure data consistency across all related tables.

User Notifications on Threshold Changes

Given that reorder thresholds have been automatically adjusted, when the changes are made, then the system should send notification alerts to all users responsible for inventory management within 5 minutes of the adjustment.

Reporting and Analytics Dashboard Update

Given that the new thresholds have been set, when a user accesses the reporting dashboard, then it should reflect the updated reorder thresholds and their impact on inventory levels within 1 minute of the adjustment.

Continuous Learning Mechanism for Adjustment Refinement

Given that the system operates for a set period, when it analyzes post-adjustment sales data, then it should refine the adjustment algorithms based on the accuracy of previous predictions, improving the confidence in future adjustments over time.

Real-Time Alerts

User Story: As a warehouse manager, I want to receive real-time alerts when my inventory reaches critical thresholds so that I can act quickly to replenish stock and avoid losses.
Description: The Real-Time Alerts requirement focuses on implementing a notification system that alerts users about significant changes in inventory levels based on the smart threshold adjustments. This includes alerts for restocking needs, potential overstock scenarios, or inventory discrepancies. It will enable users to take necessary actions promptly, based on the data-driven adjustments done by the system. The alerts will be customizable, allowing users to set preferences based on their specific needs and business operations, fostering a proactive inventory management approach and keeping users informed about their stock situation at all times.
Acceptance Criteria: User receives a notification about low inventory levels when a product stock falls below the adjusted reorder threshold.

Given the product stock is monitored, When the stock falls below the smart threshold, Then the user receives a real-time alert via email and in-app notification.

User gets notified regarding potential overstock levels based on seasonal demand trends.

Given the user has enabled overstock alerts, When the inventory level exceeds the smart threshold, Then the user receives an alert indicating the risk of overstocking.

User wants to customize alert preferences based on specific product categories and stock levels.

Given the user accesses the alert settings, When the user sets specific criteria for different product categories, Then the system should save these preferences and apply them to future alerts.

User identifies a discrepancy between the actual inventory and the reported inventory levels by the system.

Given that an inventory discrepancy is detected, When the user checks the inventory report, Then a real-time alert should notify the user of the discrepancy with actionable insights on next steps.

User must receive alerts on updated or changed thresholds based on new sales data insights.

Given the thresholds have been adjusted due to new sales data, When the adjustments occur, Then the user is notified of these changes through a push notification and email.

User desires a summary of alerts received over the past month for inventory management review.

Given that the user requests an alert summary, When the user accesses the summary report, Then all alerts received in the past month are listed with timestamps and types of alerts.

User is aware of the need for immediate action in response to an alert regarding stockouts.

Given a product is about to stock out, When the alert is triggered, Then the user receives a high-priority notification and is directed to the product restock page.

User Dashboard Integration

User Story: As a small business owner, I want to see a clear visual representation of my inventory levels and reorder thresholds on my dashboard so that I can easily understand and manage my stock.
Description: The requirement for User Dashboard Integration involves creating a dedicated section within the InvenSage user dashboard that visually displays the smart threshold adjustments and their implications on inventory management. This dashboard will provide users with easy-to-understand graphs and metrics that summarize reorder thresholds, current stock levels, and forecasts. This will empower users to visualize the impact of past sales trends on their stock levels and make informed decisions. The integration must ensure that it enhances user experience while also providing actionable insights without overloading the user with data.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the dashboard to view the Smart Threshold Adjustment section after logging into InvenSage.

Given the user is logged into InvenSage, when they navigate to the user dashboard, then they should see a dedicated section for Smart Threshold Adjustments with graphs and metrics, summarizing reorder thresholds and stock levels.

User interacts with the Smart Threshold Adjustment graph to understand implications on inventory management.

Given the Smart Threshold Adjustments are displayed on the dashboard, when the user hovers over the graph, then detailed tooltips should appear showing specific threshold values, stock levels, and forecasts.

User analyzes historical sales data through the dashboard to make inventory decisions.

Given historical sales data is analyzed, when the user views the dashboard, then the dashboard must show a clear comparison of past sales trends against current stock levels, with actionable insights on ordering recommendations.

User receives a notification about significant changes to reorder thresholds based on sales trends.

Given significant changes have been made to reorder thresholds, when the thresholds are adjusted, then the user should receive a prompt notification outlining the change and its reasons on their dashboard.

User customizes their dashboard settings to prioritize certain inventory metrics over others.

Given the user customizes their dashboard preferences, when they select which metrics to prioritize, then the dashboard should reflect these changes immediately, reordering the display as per user selections.

User reviews the overall performance of the Smart Threshold Adjustment feature over a designated period.

Given a set period for performance review, when the user navigates to the analytics section, then they should see a summary report showing the accuracy of forecasts and the impact of adjustments on overall inventory management and profitability.

User accesses help documentation related to the Smart Threshold Adjustment feature from the dashboard.

Given the user needs assistance, when they click on the help icon within the Smart Threshold Adjustment section, then they should be redirected to comprehensive help documentation specific to that feature.

Historical Data Reporting

User Story: As an inventory planner, I want to generate reports on past sales data and reorder threshold changes so that I can analyze trends and improve future purchasing decisions.
Description: The Historical Data Reporting requirement entails developing a reporting feature that allows users to access historical sales data and its impact on reorder threshold adjustments. Users will be able to generate reports that chronicle sales history, seasonal trends, and their correlation to inventory adjustments over specific time periods. This feature aims to provide insights into inventory performance and assist businesses in making long-term decisions about purchasing and inventory management. The reporting module will need to be intuitive, making it simple for users to customize time frames and focus on specific products or categories.
Acceptance Criteria: User generates a report to view historical sales data for the past quarter to analyze the impact of seasonal trends on reorder threshold adjustments.

Given the user selects a date range of the last quarter, when they click 'Generate Report', then a report should display historical sales data, seasonal trends, and their correlation to reorder adjustments for selected products or categories.

User customizes a report to focus specifically on a particular product category and views how it performed over the holiday season.

Given the user selects the 'Holiday Season' for the timeframe and a specific product category, when they click 'Generate Report', then the report should display only sales data and trends relevant to that product category during the selected time period.

User wants to analyze the difference in stock adjustments before and after implementing the Smart Threshold Adjustment feature.

Given the user selects a timeframe before and after the implementation date of the Smart Threshold Adjustment feature, when they generate the report, then the report should clearly show the differences in reorder levels and stockouts over these periods.

User needs to download the historical sales report to share with the management team for strategic planning.

Given the user has generated a historical sales report, when they click 'Download', then the report should be downloadable in a CSV format with all selected data included.

User requires a quick overview of historical sales performance and its impact on inventory adjustments in a dashboard format.

Given the user accesses the dashboard, when they view the historical sales performance widget, then it should display a concise overview of key metrics such as total sales, stock adjustments, and seasonal trends at a glance.

User customizes the time frame for the historical data report for a more detailed analysis of sales spikes.

Given the user selects a custom date range in the report settings, when they generate the report, then the output should accurately reflect the sales data and trends within the specified range without errors.

Predictive Analytics Enhancement

User Story: As a sales analyst, I want the predictive analytics to incorporate external market trends so that I can make better-informed decisions regarding inventory purchases.
Description: This requirement focuses on enhancing the predictive analytics capabilities of InvenSage by integrating more sophisticated algorithms that improve the accuracy of forecasted inventory needs. This involves utilizing external data sources like market trends, economic indicators, and competitor pricing alongside internal sales data to refine predictions further. By enhancing predictive analytics, users will benefit from more reliable forecasts, allowing them to optimize stock levels and make data-driven purchasing decisions based on comprehensive insights. The implementation requires collaboration with data scientists and a review of existing analytics infrastructure.
Acceptance Criteria: Sales Data & Forecast Integration Validation

Given that the predictive analytics enhancement is implemented, when a user inputs sales data and trends, then the system integrates this data with external sources and generates an accurate forecast that reflects predicted inventory needs.

Threshold Adjustment Verification

Given that threshold adjustments are calculated, when the predictive model analyzes historical sales data and seasonal trends, then it should automatically adjust the reorder thresholds to optimal levels without manual intervention.

User Interface for Predictive Insights

Given that predictive analytics data is available, when a user accesses the dashboard, then they should be able to view clear visualizations of inventory predictions, including graphs and trend lines based on refined forecasts from integrated data sources.

Market Trends Correlation

Given that external market data is included, when the predictive model runs analyses, then it should show correlations between market trends and forecasted inventory needs, providing a report that can be accessed by users.

Competitor Pricing Implication Analysis

Given that competitor pricing data is integrated, when the predictive analytics model generates inventory forecasts, then it should account for competitor pricing impacts, notifying the user of potential stock level adjustments based on market shifts.

Performance Metrics for Predictive Accuracy

Given that the predictive analytics feature is operational, when the system operates for at least one business cycle, then it should provide performance metrics indicating the accuracy of forecasts compared to actual sales data, with a target accuracy rate of at least 90%.

Custom Alert Channels

Provides users with the option to receive notifications through various channels such as email, SMS, or app notifications. This flexibility ensures that retailers and e-commerce businesses can stay informed about replenish needs in their preferred mode of communication.

Requirements

Multi-Channel Notification System

User Story: As a retailer, I want to receive notifications through my preferred channels, such as SMS or email, so that I can stay updated on inventory replenishment needs without having to constantly check the app.
Description: This requirement enables users to choose their preferred notification channels for receiving alerts about inventory replenishment needs. It should support various options such as email, SMS, and push notifications through the mobile app. The implementation will involve integrating with third-party services for SMS and email notifications, as well as developing a user-friendly interface in the app to allow users to customize their alert preferences. This flexibility enhances user engagement and ensures timely updates on critical inventory changes, ultimately improving operational efficiency for retailers and e-commerce businesses.
Acceptance Criteria: User selects their preferred notification channel for receiving inventory alerts from the setup interface in the InvenSage application.

Given a user is logged into the InvenSage application, when they navigate to the notification settings, then they should be able to select at least one notification channel (email, SMS, or app notifications) and save their preferences successfully.

User receives an SMS notification when the inventory level of a product falls below the defined threshold.

Given a user has selected SMS as their notification channel for low inventory alerts, when the inventory level of the designated product drops below the threshold, then the user receives an SMS alert within 5 minutes of the threshold breach.

User receives an email notification when the inventory level of a product falls below the predefined limit.

Given a user has opted for email notifications for inventory alerts, when the inventory of a monitored product is low, then the user receives an email notification within 5 minutes of the inventory falling below the threshold.

User customizes their notification settings to receive both SMS and app notifications for inventory alerts.

Given a user is in the notification settings section, when they select multiple notification channels (SMS and app) and save their preferences, then both channels should be activated, and they should receive alerts through both channels when inventory levels are low.

User wants to change their preferred notification method from SMS to email after initially selecting SMS.

Given a user has previously selected SMS notifications, when they change their setting to email notifications and save the changes, then they should receive confirmation of the change, and future notifications should be sent to their email only.

The notification system is tested to ensure seamless integration with third-party SMS and email services.

Given the notification system is implemented, when the integration with SMS and email services is tested, then all alerts should be sent without delays or errors within 5 minutes of the triggering event.

Users can access a history of received notifications for tracking purposes.

Given a user accesses the notification history feature in the InvenSage app, when they view their notification history, then they should see a list of all sent alerts with timestamps and notification types (SMS, email, app) accurately displayed.

Alert Customization Options

User Story: As a warehouse manager, I want to customize the types of inventory alerts I receive, so that I only get the most relevant updates without being overwhelmed by unnecessary notifications.
Description: This requirement entails offering users the ability to customize the types of alerts they wish to receive, such as low stock levels, upcoming expiry dates, or reorder reminders. Users should be able to select which alerts they want and how frequently they receive them, creating a tailored notification experience. This improvement will help users avoid clutter and receive only relevant information, aiding in better inventory management and responsiveness to stock needs.
Acceptance Criteria: User Customization of Alert Preferences via Dashboard

Given a registered user is logged into their InvenSage account, when they navigate to the alert customization settings, then they should be able to select specific alert types such as low stock levels, upcoming expiry dates, and reorder reminders, and save these preferences successfully without errors.

Frequency Setting for Alerts

Given a user has selected their preferred alert types, when they access the frequency settings for notifications, then they should have the option to choose from predefined frequencies (e.g., immediate, daily, weekly) and be able to save the changes, ensuring that notifications are sent as per the selected schedule.

Multiple Notification Channels Selection

Given a user is on the alert customization page, when they are presented with options for notification channels, then they should be able to select multiple channels (email, SMS, app notifications) and successfully save these selections, receiving alerts through the chosen channels accordingly.

Confirmation of Saved Alert Preferences

Given a user has customized their alert preferences and chosen their notification channels, when they save their settings, then a confirmation message should be displayed indicating that their preferences have been saved successfully, along with a summary of the selected alerts and channels.

Testing Notifications for Selected Alerts

Given a user has set their alert preferences, when low stock levels or upcoming expiry dates occur, then the system should trigger notifications sent through the previously selected channels (email, SMS, app), and the user should receive them in real-time.

Editing Customized Alert Preferences

Given a user has already set their alert preferences, when they return to the alert customization settings, then they should be able to view, edit, and update their preferences as needed, with all changes being reflected correctly in the system.

Centralized Alert Dashboard

User Story: As a user, I want a centralized dashboard to manage my notification settings, so that I can easily see and adjust my preferences in one location without navigating multiple menus.
Description: Developing a centralized dashboard within the InvenSage platform that consolidates all notification preferences and alert history. This dashboard should allow users to easily view, modify, and manage their notification settings across different channels and types of alerts. The dashboard will provide insights into alert patterns and history, allowing users to optimize their inventory management strategies based on past notifications. This centralization will streamline the user experience and facilitate better decision-making.
Acceptance Criteria: As a retailer, I want to access the centralized alert dashboard to manage my notification preferences and review alert history.

Given the user is logged into InvenSage, when they navigate to the centralized alert dashboard, then they should see a list of all notification preferences and alert history organized by channel and alert type.

As an e-commerce business owner, I want to modify my notification settings for different channels directly from the centralized alert dashboard.

Given the user is on the alert dashboard, when they select a notification preference and choose to modify it, then the updated notification settings should be saved and reflected immediately in the dashboard.

As a wholesaler, I want to view insights on alert patterns over the past month to optimize my inventory management strategies.

Given the user is viewing the alert dashboard, when they check the insights section, then they should see visual representations of alert patterns, including frequency and types of alerts received over the past month.

As a retailer, I want to receive a confirmation that my notification settings have been updated successfully.

Given the user has modified their notification settings, when they submit the changes, then they should receive a confirmation message indicating that their notification preferences have been successfully updated.

As an e-commerce business owner, I want the centralized alert dashboard to display the last 30 alerts received for better context on inventory needs.

Given the user is on the alert dashboard, when they scroll to the recent alerts section, then they should see a list of the last 30 alerts received, including timestamps and alert types.

As a wholesaler, I want the dashboard to allow me to filter alerts based on specific criteria such as channel type and date range.

Given the user is on the alert dashboard, when they apply filters for channel type and date range, then the displayed alerts should reflect only those that meet the filter criteria.

Automated Alert Scheduling

User Story: As an e-commerce manager, I want to schedule when I receive inventory notifications, so that I can focus on my work without constant interruptions and only be alerted during my peak hours.
Description: This requirement involves implementing an automated scheduling feature that allows users to set specific times for receiving notifications regarding inventory status. For example, users can choose to receive daily summaries or alerts only during business hours. This flexibility will help users manage their time better and ensure they receive notifications at the most opportune moments to make timely decisions regarding inventory management.
Acceptance Criteria: User schedules daily inventory alerts for their store, choosing to receive notifications at 8 AM every morning to prepare for daily operations.

Given the user has selected 'Daily' for the alert frequency and set the time to '08:00', when the current time is 08:00 on a business day, then a daily inventory alert is sent to the user's chosen channel (email, SMS, or app notification).

A user wants to receive inventory alerts only during business hours, which are set from 9 AM to 5 PM on weekdays.

Given the user has configured alerts to be sent only during business hours, when the current time is outside of 9 AM to 5 PM, then no alerts should be triggered until the next business hour starts.

A user needs to reschedule their alert time due to a change in their operations schedule, moving alerts from morning to afternoon.

Given the user has successfully updated the alert time from 8 AM to 3 PM, when the time reaches 3 PM on a business day, then an alert should be sent to the user's preferred communication channel with the updated inventory status.

Users can verify the historical alert records to ensure they received all scheduled notifications correctly.

Given the user requests the history of their alerts, when the user accesses the alert history, then they should see a complete log of all alerts sent, including timestamps and delivery channels used.

A user sets a weekly summary alert for inventory updates every Friday at 5 PM to review stock levels before the weekend.

Given the user selects 'Weekly' and specifies Friday at 5 PM for alerts, when Friday at 5 PM occurs, then a summary inventory alert is sent to the user’s selected channel detailing the stock levels for the upcoming weekend.

A user wants to ensure that they do not receive alerts during holidays to avoid unnecessary notifications.

Given the user has configured their holiday schedule in the alert settings, when a holiday falls on a scheduled alert day, then no alerts should be sent, and the user receives a confirmation of the skipped alert day.

Users are able to choose multiple communication channels for receiving inventory notifications and can test the setup to ensure it works correctly.

Given the user selects multiple channels (email, SMS, app notifications) for receiving alerts, when the user tests the notification settings, then the user should receive a test alert through all selected channels successfully, confirming their setup is correct.

Performance Analytics for Notifications

User Story: As a business analyst, I want to see analytics on my notification engagement, so that I can assess which alerts are most useful and make informed decisions about my alert settings.
Description: Integrate a performance analytics module that tracks user engagement with notifications. This feature should provide insights on how often users interact with different types of alerts, helping them understand what notifications add value. By analyzing notification performance, users can adjust their preferences and improve their overall inventory management strategies.
Acceptance Criteria: User desires to set up custom notification channels for receiving alerts related to inventory replenishment.

Given a user has access to notification settings, when they select the preferred alert channels (email, SMS, or app notifications) and save the settings, then the system should confirm the preferences are saved successfully and displayed correctly in the user profile.

User wants to review engagement metrics for various notification channels to evaluate their effectiveness.

Given users have received notifications through various channels for at least 30 days, when they access the performance analytics dashboard, then the system should display engagement data for each channel, including open rates and interaction rates.

A retailer wants to disable a notification channel due to low engagement.

Given a user is on the notification settings page, when they deselect one of the notification channels and confirm the changes, then the system should disable that channel and provide an alert confirming the change.

A user intends to change their primary notification method based on performance insights.

Given a user has accessed the performance analytics for their notification channels, when they select a new primary notification method and save the changes, then the system should update their settings and notify the user of the successfully changed notification channel.

An e-commerce business owner wants to ensure timely notifications for low stock alerts are received.

Given the business owner has configured their notification settings to include low stock alerts through email, when the stock for any item drops below the defined threshold, then the owner should receive an email notification within 5 minutes of the stock level change.

A user is interested in gathering insights on the frequency of notification interactions.

Given that the performance analytics module is implemented, when a user requests a report on notification interactions, then the system should provide a comprehensive report including total notifications sent, total interactions, and the engagement rate for each notification sent.

Reorder Recommendations

Offers tailored recommendations for reorder quantities based on current stock levels, sales trends, and expected demand. By leveraging AI algorithms, this feature simplifies the decision-making process for users, allowing them to make smarter purchasing decisions.

Requirements

Dynamic Reorder Quantities

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to receive intelligent reorder quantity recommendations so that I can minimize stockouts and reduce excess inventory, ultimately ensuring my business runs smoothly and profitably.
Description: The Dynamic Reorder Quantities requirement involves developing an algorithm that calculates optimal reorder quantities in real-time based on current inventory levels, historical sales data, and anticipated demand patterns. This feature will leverage AI technology to process vast amounts of data quickly, allowing users to receive timely and precise reorder recommendations. It will significantly reduce instances of overstocking or understocking, enhancing the supply chain efficiency and ensuring that users have the right quantity of products available at the right time. Additionally, by integrating seamlessly with existing inventory modules, this functionality will empower users with actionable insights for more strategic inventory management, minimizing downtime and maximizing profitability.
Acceptance Criteria: User receives reorder recommendations based on real-time inventory data after daily sales analysis at the end of the business day.

Given inventory levels and historical sales data are processed, when a user views the reorder recommendations, then they should see precise suggestions that optimize reorder quantities to reduce overstocks and avoid stockouts.

User can adjust the default reorder quantities suggested by the algorithm during peak sales seasons, such as holidays.

Given a user is viewing recommended reorder quantities, when they modify the suggested quantities, then the system must accept the changes and adjust future recommendations accordingly.

The algorithm processes seasonal sales trends to predict future demand and adjusts reorder recommendations accordingly.

Given historical sales data and seasonal trends, when the algorithm runs its analysis, then it should provide recommendations that align with expected seasonal demand, validated by at least 90% accuracy in fulfilling stock needs during pilot testing.

User wants to ensure that reorder recommendations align with the company's desired inventory turnover rate.

Given the business's target inventory turnover rate, when the user configures threshold settings for reorder recommendations, then the system should calculate and display recommendations that facilitate meeting the turnover rate of at least 6 times a year.

Inventory levels change due to sales and new deliveries and require real-time adjustment of reorder recommendations.

Given that new sales occur or inventory is updated, when the inventory data is refreshed, then the reorder recommendations must be updated instantly to reflect the new inventory levels without delay.

User seeks to generate a report on the effectiveness of reorder recommendations over a specific period.

Given a user requests a report, when the system compiles reorder recommendations and their outcomes over the specified period, then the report should include metrics on reduced stockouts and overstocks, showing at least a 20% improvement in inventory efficiency.

Sales Trend Analysis

User Story: As a store owner, I want to analyze sales trends over time so that I can make informed decisions on which products to reorder and promote, helping me maximize sales and minimize waste.
Description: The Sales Trend Analysis requirement focuses on creating a comprehensive reporting tool that tracks and analyzes sales trends over different time periods. The tool will display graphical representations of sales patterns, highlighting peak sales periods and slow-moving items. By integrating this feature into the platform, users can identify which products are performing well and which are not, allowing for informed decision-making regarding reorder strategies and promotions. This analysis will also facilitate better inventory planning based on projected sales trends, ensuring that users can allocate their resources effectively to meet changing market demands.
Acceptance Criteria: Sales Trend Visualization for Seasonal Products

Given the user has selected the seasonal products reporting module, when they view the sales trend report, then the graphical representation should clearly highlight peak sales periods and slow-moving items over the last 12 months, allowing for immediate visual interpretation.

Comparative Analysis Across Multiple Time Periods

Given the user wants to analyze sales trends over different time periods, when they select two or more time frames for comparison, then the system should display a side-by-side sales trend graph that accurately reflects changes in performance for the selected periods.

Identification of Top-Selling Products

Given the user is viewing the sales trend analysis report, when they filter for top-selling products, then the report should list the top 10 products based on sales volume clearly differentiated from other items.

Integration with Reorder Recommendations

Given the user has completed the sales trend analysis, when they access the reorder recommendations feature, then it should dynamically suggest reorder quantities based on the identified sales trends and current stock levels.

Downloadable Sales Trend Reports

Given the user has analyzed the sales trends, when they choose to download the report, then the system should generate a PDF report containing all graphical representations and data, ready for offline access and sharing.

Historical Sales Data Access

Given the user requires historical sales data for a comprehensive analysis, when they request data for the past five years, then the reporting tool should provide complete access to sales data for the specified time frame in an organized format.

Alert System for Slow-Moving Items

Given the user regularly monitors sales performance, when sales trends indicate a product is categorized as slow-moving over the last month, then the system should automatically alert the user through the dashboard notifications feature.

Integration with E-commerce Platforms

User Story: As an e-commerce business owner, I want my inventory management system to integrate with my online store so that I can automate updates and maintain accurate stock levels across all sales channels, saving time and reducing errors.
Description: The Integration with E-commerce Platforms requirement entails developing robust APIs that allow InvenSage to connect seamlessly with popular e-commerce platforms such as Shopify, WooCommerce, and Magento. This integration will enable automatic updates of inventory levels, sales data, and reorder recommendations, thereby providing users with a holistic view of their inventory across multiple sales channels. By ensuring that the platform can smoothly interact with other systems, users can benefit from real-time insights and streamlined operations, enhancing overall efficiency and reducing manual data entry errors.
Acceptance Criteria: Integration with Shopify for Automatic Inventory Update

Given that a product is sold on Shopify, when the sale is completed, then the inventory level in InvenSage should automatically update to reflect the new stock level without any manual intervention.

Integration with WooCommerce for Real-time Sales Data Sync

Given that the WooCommerce store has received new orders, when the orders are processed, then the sales data should be synchronized with InvenSage within 5 minutes to maintain accurate records.

Integration with Magento for Reorder Recommendations

Given that the inventory level in InvenSage has reached the reorder point, when the sales trends are analyzed, then the system should generate reorder recommendations based on current stock and expected demand.

Cross-platform Inventory Oversight

Given that multiple e-commerce platforms are integrated, when a user views their dashboard in InvenSage, then they should see a comprehensive view of inventory levels, sales figures, and reorder alerts consolidated from all integrated platforms in real-time.

User Validation of Automatically Generated Reorder Recommendations

Given that reorder recommendations are generated based on sales trends, when a user reviews these recommendations, then they should have the ability to accept, modify, or reject each recommendation and the system should reflect those changes immediately.

Error Handling During API Integration

Given that there is a failure in the API integration with any e-commerce platform, when the system detects the error, then it should send an alert to the user and log the error for future reference without disrupting the normal operation of InvenSage.

Historical Data Sync After Initial Integration

Given that InvenSage is newly integrated with an e-commerce platform, when the integration is established, then it should pull historical sales and inventory data from the platform for the past 30 days accurately into InvenSage.

User Customization Features

User Story: As a small business owner, I want to customize my reorder recommendations according to my specific business needs so that I can manage my inventory more effectively and cater to my unique demands.
Description: The User Customization Features requirement aims to provide users with the ability to tailor reorder recommendations based on their unique business needs and preferences. Users will be able to set specific parameters such as minimum stock levels, preferred supplier options, and seasonal adjustments for recommendations. This feature ensures that users feel in control of their inventory management process and can adapt the technology to suit their operations, leading to improved user satisfaction and better alignment of inventory levels with business strategies.
Acceptance Criteria: User Sets Minimum Stock Level for Reorder Recommendations

Given a user has access to the User Customization Features, when they set a minimum stock level for a product, then the reorder recommendation must reflect the specified minimum stock level and trigger a recommendation when stock falls below this level.

User Chooses Preferred Suppliers for Products

Given a user is customizing their reorder recommendations, when they select preferred suppliers for specific products, then the reorder recommendations must prioritize these suppliers in the suggested orders.

User Adjusts Recommendations Seasonally Based on Demand Trends

Given a user wants to adjust reorder recommendations for seasonal products, when they input seasonal demand changes, then the reorder recommendations must accurately reflect those changes in quantities and timing.

User Receives Notifications for Reorder Suggestions Based on Custom Settings

Given a user has set specific thresholds and preferences for reorder notifications, when stock levels approach these thresholds, then the user must receive notifications in their preferred method (email/app alert).

User Reviews and Modifies Suggested Reorder Quantities

Given a user has received reorder recommendations based on their customization, when they review the suggestions, then they must have the option to modify the suggested quantities before finalizing the reorder.

User Saves Custom Settings for Future Use

Given a user has configured their reorder customization settings, when they save these settings, then the system must retain these settings for future transactions without needing to reconfigure them each time.

Alerts for Low Stock Levels

User Story: As a warehouse manager, I want to receive alerts when stock levels are low so that I can quickly reorder items and prevent stockouts that could disrupt sales.
Description: The Alerts for Low Stock Levels requirement involves implementing a notification system that alerts users when inventory levels drop below predefined thresholds. This feature will use automated alerts via email or in-app notifications to prompt users to take action on reorder recommendations promptly. By ensuring users are kept informed of critical stock levels, this feature seeks to minimize the risk of stockouts, enhance user responsiveness, and improve customer satisfaction by ensuring product availability.
Acceptance Criteria: User receives notification when stock level for a specific product falls below the predefined threshold during regular business hours.

Given the stock level of a product is below the defined threshold, when the user is logged into their account during business hours, then the user receives an in-app notification immediately.

User receives email alerts for low stock levels when stock reaches critical levels.

Given the stock level of any product falls below the critical threshold, when the inventory monitoring system detects this event, then an email alert is sent to the user within 5 minutes.

User can customize notification thresholds for different products based on sales performance.

Given a user wants to set different stock thresholds for various products, when the user updates the thresholds in their account settings, then those new thresholds are saved and effective immediately for all future alerts.

User browses the dashboard and is presented with a visual indicator of low stock items.

Given the user is on the dashboard, when the stock levels are below predefined thresholds, then the dashboard displays a red indicator for those products in the inventory summary section.

User receives a summary of low stock alerts at the end of the day via email.

Given it is the end of the day, when the system compiles low stock data, then a summary email of all products needing attention is sent to the user by 6 PM.

User can acknowledge receipt of low stock alerts within the app.

Given the user has received an in-app low stock alert, when the user clicks on the alert notification, then the system marks the alert as acknowledged, and it no longer appears as an active alert.

Inventory Health Score

Introduces an inventory health scoring system that assesses the status of stock levels and turnover rates. This feature gives users immediate insights into which items need attention and helps prioritize reordering efforts based on their performance.

Requirements

Dynamic Scoring System

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to receive a real-time inventory health score for my stock so that I can prioritize which items need reordering and avoid stockouts or overstock situations.
Description: The Dynamic Scoring System is designed to continuously assess inventory levels and turnover rates in real time, generating a comprehensive health score for each product. This system utilizes data analytics to evaluate sales velocity, stock levels, and historical performance metrics, allowing users to identify which items are underperforming or overstocked. By providing this insight, the system enables businesses to make informed decisions regarding reorder points and inventory management strategies. Moreover, integration with existing inventory systems ensures that the scoring is updated automatically, aligning with user operations and enhancing overall productivity and efficiency in inventory management.
Acceptance Criteria: Real-time assessment of stock levels for all products based on recent sales data to generate a dynamic inventory health score.

Given the Inventory Health Score feature is active, when the system analyzes current stock levels, then it should display an updated health score for each product within 2 minutes of data retrieval.

User access to the Inventory Health Score dashboard displaying scores for all products, categorized by performance.

Given a user has access to the inventory dashboard, when they navigate to the Inventory Health Score section, then they should see a visual representation of health scores grouped by performance categories (Underperforming, Optimal, Overstocked).

Automated updates to health scores based on predefined thresholds for stock levels and turnover rates.

Given the Dynamic Scoring System is integrated with the inventory management platform, when stock levels or turnover rates change beyond set thresholds, then the system should automatically recalculate and update the health score for the affected product.

Notifications for items categorized as underperforming or overstocked based on the health score.

Given the inventory scoring system has updated health scores, when an item is categorized as underperforming or overstocked, then the user should receive a notification alert within 5 minutes of the score update.

Historical performance metrics are reflected in the dynamic scoring for ongoing product evaluations.

Given the Dynamic Scoring System has access to historical sales data, when it calculates the health score, then it should factor in at least the last three months of sales history for accuracy.

User ability to filter products by health score on the dashboard for targeted action.

Given the user is on the Inventory Health Score dashboard, when they apply a filter to view products by specific score ranges, then the system should only display products that meet the selected criteria.

Alerts for Low Health Scores

User Story: As a store owner, I want to receive notifications when my inventory health score drops below a critical level so that I can take action before running into stock issues.
Description: The Alerts for Low Health Scores feature provides timely notifications to users when specific items fall below a designated health score threshold. By monitoring these scores, the system automatically triggers alerts via email or in-platform notifications, prompting users to take immediate action on at-risk inventory items. This early warning system helps ensure that businesses can respond swiftly to potential issues, leading to minimized stockouts and optimized inventory levels. Customization options will allow users to set their thresholds based on individual or business needs, creating a tailored experience.
Acceptance Criteria: User receives a notification when an inventory item falls below the predefined health score threshold set in their account settings.

Given the user has set a health score threshold for an item, When the item's health score drops below this threshold, Then the user receives a notification via email and in-platform alert.

User can customize the health score threshold for individual inventory items according to their business needs.

Given the user is on the inventory management page, When the user adjusts the health score threshold for a selected item and saves the changes, Then the new threshold is correctly reflected in the system and triggers alerts appropriately.

User can view a comprehensive list of all items that have triggered low health score alerts and their corresponding health scores.

Given the user accesses the alerts page, When the page loads, Then the user sees a list of items that have alerts due to low health scores, along with their current health scores and a timestamp of when the alert was triggered.

Users can filter or sort the low health score alerts based on date, health score, or product category.

Given the user is on the alerts page, When the user applies a filter or sorting option, Then the displayed list of low health score alerts is updated accordingly and reflects the selected criteria.

User can dismiss an alert once they have taken corrective action on the item.

Given the user has taken action on an item with a low health score alert, When the user chooses to dismiss the alert, Then that alert is removed from the alerts list and does not appear again unless a new alert is triggered for that item.

The system archives alerts after a specified period to avoid clutter in the alerts page.

Given the alerts page exists, When an alert has been present for more than 30 days without the user dismissing it, Then the alert is automatically archived and moved to the archived alerts section.

Users receive a daily summary email containing any low health score alerts generated in the previous day.

Given that the notification settings include daily summaries, When it's the end of the day, Then the user receives an email summarizing all low health score alerts that were triggered in the previous 24 hours.

Dashboard Integration

User Story: As an inventory manager, I want to see my inventory health scores on my dashboard so that I can quickly assess the status of my stock at any time.
Description: The Dashboard Integration feature enables users to view their inventory health scores directly on their main dashboard. This integration presents a clear visual representation of inventory well-being, using graphs, charts, and color-coded indicators to simplify understanding at a glance. This user-friendly interface not only enhances user engagement but also aids in quick decision-making by placing critical data at the forefront of the user experience. Furthermore, users can customize dashboard layouts, allowing them to prioritize the information that matters most to them.
Acceptance Criteria: View Inventory Health Scores on Dashboard

Given a user is logged in and on their main dashboard, when they access the inventory health score section, then they should see an overall health score displayed clearly with corresponding visual indicators (green for healthy, yellow for moderate, red for poor).

Customization of Dashboard Layout

Given a user is on their main dashboard, when they select the option to customize the layout, then they should be able to drag and drop the inventory health score widget to their preferred position, and upon saving the layout, the changes should persist upon reloading the dashboard.

Real-time Updates of Inventory Health Scores

Given a user is viewing their dashboard, when there are updates to inventory levels, then the inventory health scores should refresh automatically to reflect the latest data without requiring a page refresh.

Interactive Graphs and Charts for Inventory Health Scores

Given a user is viewing the inventory health scores section on their dashboard, when they hover over any graph or chart, then detailed information about the inventory item performance should be displayed in a tooltip format to provide further insights.

Alerts for Low Inventory Health Scores

Given a user is viewing their main dashboard, when the inventory health score for any item drops into the red zone (poor), then an alert notification should appear to inform the user that action is required for that item.

History of Inventory Health Scores

Given a user is on the dashboard, when they select the option to view historical data, then they should be able to see a timeline graph of inventory health scores for the past 30 days with options to filter by category.

Historical Performance Analysis

User Story: As a business analyst, I want to see historical trends in inventory health so that I can identify patterns and adjust our inventory strategies accordingly.
Description: The Historical Performance Analysis feature provides users with insights into the inventory health over time. This functionality allows businesses to track trends in stock levels, turnover rates, and health scores, helping them to understand the long-term performance of their products. By analyzing this historical data, users can identify patterns that inform future purchasing decisions and optimize inventory management strategies. Additionally, it offers comparative analysis against previous periods, highlighting improvements or declines in product performance.
Acceptance Criteria: Historical Performance Analysis for Seasonal Inventory Trends

Given a retailer has selected a date range for analysis, when reviewing the historical performance report, then the system displays accurate stock levels, turnover rates, and health scores for each product during the selected period, enabling trend analysis.

Comparative Analysis with Previous Periods

Given a user requests a comparative analysis of inventory health, when viewing the historical performance dashboard, then the system displays a comparison of turnover rates and stock levels between the selected period and the preceding period, highlighting improvements or declines.

User-Friendly Historical Data Visualization

Given a user accesses the historical performance analysis feature, when interacting with the graphical representation of data, then the user can easily interpret trends through intuitive visualizations such as charts and color-coded indicators for inventory health scores.

Exporting Historical Performance Data

Given a user wants to analyze historical inventory data outside the platform, when clicking on the export function, then the system generates a downloadable report containing stock levels, turnover rates, and health scores for the selected period in a CSV format.

Notification of Declining Inventory Health

Given a user has set thresholds for inventory health scores, when the health score of any product falls below the threshold during the analysis period, then the system sends an automated alert to the user notifying them to take corrective actions.

Historical Performance Analysis Training for Users

Given that the Historical Performance Analysis feature is implemented, when onboarding new users, then training materials and sessions must be provided to ensure users understand how to effectively utilize the analysis for inventory management.

Integration With AI-Driven Demand Forecasting

Given a user is analyzing historical performance data, when they require insights from the AI-driven demand forecasting module, then the system seamlessly integrates and displays predictive analytics based on past trends to inform future purchasing decisions.

User Customization Preferences

User Story: As a product manager, I want to customize the factors that influence my inventory health scores so that I can align them with my specific inventory strategy.
Description: The User Customization Preferences requirement allows users to personalize their inventory health score settings based on their operational needs and business models. This includes the ability to define specific criteria that contribute to the health score, such as sales thresholds, turnover targets, and risk levels. The customization ensures that users can manage their inventory in a way that aligns with their unique strategies, enhancing the overall utility of the scoring system. It empowers users to adapt the scoring mechanism to their business environments, creating a more relevant and actionable insight.
Acceptance Criteria: User customization of inventory health score settings through the application interface.

Given a user navigates to the customization settings, when they define criteria for the inventory health score including sales thresholds and turnover targets, then the system should save these preferences and reflect them in the health scoring calculations.

User evaluation of the impact of adjusted inventory health score settings on stock management decisions.

Given a user has set specific criteria for the inventory health score, when they review the health scores after applying their settings, then the scores should accurately represent the items needing attention based on the defined user criteria.

System's ability to handle varying user-defined parameters for different business models.

Given a user is from a retail background and has set unique criteria for their inventory health score, when another user from a wholesale background accesses the same functionality, then the system should allow each user to personalize their scoring parameters independently without conflicting settings.

User interaction with real-time feedback on inventory health score adjustments.

Given a user adjusts the sales threshold criteria for generating the inventory health score, when they save their changes, then the inventory health score should refresh to provide real-time feedback indicating how the adjustments change the health of their inventory.

System validation of user-entered customization criteria for inventory health scores.

Given a user inputs their desired sales thresholds and turnover targets in the customization settings, when they submit these inputs, then the system should validate the criteria against predefined business rules to ensure they are logical and applicable.

Reporting functionalities showcasing the effectiveness of user-defined inventory health scores.

Given a user has customized their inventory health score, when they generate an inventory report, then the report should include insights and trends that correlate to their specific scoring settings, enabling meaningful analysis of the adjusted inventory performance.

User training and support material accessibility for customization of inventory health scores.

Given a user is new to the platform, when they access the help section regarding the customization of inventory health scores, then the system should provide clear, comprehensive training materials and FAQs to assist with effective use of the feature.

Multi-Location Sync

Synchronizes dynamic reorder alerts across multiple store locations, ensuring that each site receives alerts specific to its inventory needs. This is particularly beneficial for retailers with more than one outlet, helping optimize inventory management across all locations.

Requirements

Dynamic Reorder Alerts

User Story: As a store manager, I want to receive dynamic reorder alerts tailored to my specific store's inventory so that I can efficiently manage stock levels and prevent stockouts.
Description: This requirement involves implementing a feature that dynamically generates reorder alerts based on real-time inventory levels for each store location. The system will analyze current stock levels and automatically trigger alerts when items fall below predetermined thresholds specific to each location. This capability ensures that each outlet operates with optimal inventory levels and reduces the risk of stockouts or overstock situations. By tailoring these alerts to individual stores, businesses can respond quickly to their unique inventory needs, leading to improved stock management and customer satisfaction.
Acceptance Criteria: Store manager views real-time inventory levels and receives alerts when stock for specific products falls below a threshold, allowing them to reorder in a timely manner.

Given the store has an inventory level below the predetermined threshold for a specific product, When the inventory check is performed, Then a dynamic reorder alert should be generated and displayed to the store manager.

The system integrates with the existing point-of-sale (POS) and inventory systems to ensure accurate inventory tracking across all store locations.

Given that the store is using the integrated POS system, When transactions are made, Then the inventory levels should update in real-time and trigger reorder alerts as necessary.

Users can customize the threshold levels for reorder alerts specific to each store location via the admin dashboard.

Given that the admin is logged into the dashboard, When they adjust the reorder thresholds for a particular store's products, Then the changes should be saved, and alerts should reflect the new thresholds immediately.

Store locations are notified via email or push notifications about low stock and reorder alerts to ensure timely action.

Given the system detects low inventory for a product at a specific location, When the alert is triggered, Then an email or push notification should be sent to the designated store staff within 5 minutes of detection.

A business analyst reviews the effectiveness of the dynamic reorder alerts and impacts on inventory management after 30 days of implementation.

Given that the dynamic reorder alerts have been active for 30 days, When the analyst generates a report, Then it should indicate reduced stockout incidents and improved inventory turnover rates compared to the previous month.

Centralized Inventory Dashboard

User Story: As a retail chain owner, I want to see a centralized inventory dashboard that shows real-time stock levels for all my locations so that I can make informed decisions about inventory distribution.
Description: The requirement focuses on developing a centralized dashboard that displays real-time inventory data across all store locations. This dashboard will present key performance indicators, stock levels, and reorder alerts in an intuitive interface that can be accessed from any device. It will allow users to monitor inventory performance at a glance, facilitating strategic decision-making across multiple outlets. By providing centralized visibility, this feature helps retailers optimize their inventory allocations and improve overall operational efficiency.
Acceptance Criteria: As a store manager with multiple store locations, I want to access a centralized inventory dashboard so that I can monitor stock levels and performance across all outlets at any time.

Given I am logged into the InvenSage platform, When I navigate to the centralized inventory dashboard, Then I should see real-time stock levels and key performance indicators for each store location displayed clearly.

As a retailer utilizing the centralized inventory dashboard, I need to receive dynamic reorder alerts based on current stock levels, allowing me to maintain optimal inventory and avoid stockouts.

Given the centralized inventory dashboard is displaying stock levels, When a stock level falls below the predefined threshold, Then the dashboard should trigger a reorder alert specific to that store location, visible in the interface.

As an inventory manager, I want to be able to access the centralized dashboard from various devices to ensure I can make informed decisions regardless of my location.

Given the InvenSage platform is accessed from a mobile device or tablet, When I log in, Then the centralized inventory dashboard should be fully functional and display the same real-time data and alerts as on a desktop version.

As a business owner, I want to view trends in inventory performance over time from the centralized dashboard to better understand sales trends and adjust stock levels accordingly.

Given I am on the centralized inventory dashboard, When I select the performance trends option, Then I should see a visual representation of inventory performance trends over selected time periods, like monthly or quarterly.

As a team member responsible for inventory audits, I want to ensure that the inventory data displayed on the centralized dashboard is accurate and matches physical count.

Given an inventory audit is being conducted, When I compare the stock levels from the centralized inventory dashboard with the physical count, Then the variances should be within an acceptable range defined by organizational standards.

As a store manager, I want the dashboard to allow filtering options by location, product category, and alert priority to closely monitor specific inventory needs for my stores.

Given I am on the centralized inventory dashboard, When I apply filters for location, product category, and alert priority, Then the displayed data should update to reflect only the relevant inventory information that meets the applied filters.

Location-specific Stock Optimization

User Story: As a supply chain manager, I want to receive recommendations for stock optimization based on sales data at each location so that I can decrease excess inventory and boost sales performance.
Description: This requirement pertains to the development of an algorithm that analyzes sales data and inventory turnover rates for each location. Based on this analysis, the system will provide recommendations for stock optimization tailored to each outlet's specific sales trends and customer preferences. This feature aims to enhance inventory management by ensuring that each location is stocked with the most suitable items, reducing waste and increasing sales. By leveraging AI-driven insights, businesses can better align their inventory with actual customer demand.
Acceptance Criteria: Store managers at multiple locations view optimized stock recommendations based on real-time sales and turnover data during their weekly inventory review meetings.

Given that the store manager accesses the inventory management dashboard for location-specific recommendations, When the manager views the stock optimization section, Then the dashboard displays recommendations tailored to the local sales trends and customer preferences for that location.

A store staff member receives dynamic reorder alerts on their mobile device when stock levels for high-demand items fall below a pre-defined threshold for their specific location.

Given that a high-demand item’s stock level falls below the threshold, When the system generates a reorder alert, Then the alert is sent to the designated store staff member’s mobile device with specific instructions for replenishment.

Retail owners analyze the effectiveness of the stock optimization algorithm by comparing sales performance before and after implementation for each outlet over a three-month period.

Given that the stock optimization algorithm has been implemented for three months, When the retail owner reviews sales performance metrics, Then there is a measurable increase in sales volume and a decrease in stock wastage for each location compared to the previous three months.

A supplier receives automated reorder requests generated by the inventory system based on location-specific demand forecasts to prevent stockouts on popular items.

Given that the inventory system calculates reorder quantities based on forecast demand for each location, When stock levels reach the reorder point, Then an automated request is sent to the supplier for the required items with the specified quantities. The order confirmation must be received within 24 hours.

Store personnel assess the adaptability of supported products and categories in response to changing customer preferences through the inventory management interface.

Given that store personnel access the inventory management system, When they review product performance data and customer preference metrics for their location, Then they can view a list of products that have low turnover and can make informed decisions on product discontinuation or reordering based on real-time insights.

Multiple location managers participate in a training session to ensure they understand how to use the new inventory optimization features and analyze recommendations effectively.

Given that a training session is held for location managers, When they complete the session and demonstrate the ability to navigate the optimization features, Then they should be able to analyze and apply recommendations to their inventory practices effectively, as evidenced by post-training assessment scores of 85% or higher.

Multi-Location Reporting

User Story: As a business analyst, I want to generate multi-location reports on inventory performance to identify trends and optimize our supply chain strategy.
Description: This requirement involves creating comprehensive reporting features that aggregate inventory data from all locations. Users will be able to generate reports that highlight performance metrics, trends, and discrepancies across different outlets. This function enables management to identify successful strategies and potential issues, ensuring effective inventory oversight. Enhanced reporting capabilities will support data-driven decision-making and strategic planning, contributing to overall business growth and improved profitability.
Acceptance Criteria: User generates a report for all store locations to analyze inventory performance monthly.

Given a user is logged into the InvenSage platform, when they navigate to the reports section and select 'Monthly Inventory Performance', then they should be able to view a comprehensive report that aggregates data from all store locations, showcasing key metrics such as stock levels, sales trends, and discrepancies.

User filters a report to show performance metrics for a specific location for the last quarter.

Given a user is in the report section, when they select a specific location and the time frame of 'Last Quarter', then the report should generate specific metrics including stock turnover rates and out-of-stock incidents for that location only.

User exports a report as a CSV file to share with the management team.

Given a user has viewed a report on inventory performance, when they click on the 'Export' button and select 'CSV', then a CSV file containing the aggregated report data should be downloaded successfully.

User compares inventory discrepancies between two locations in a report.

Given a user is in the reporting feature, when they select two locations to compare, then the report should highlight discrepancies in stock levels, including excess and shortage instances for those locations side by side.

Management uses the reporting feature to review year-over-year trends in inventory performance.

Given a management user is accessing the reporting feature, when they select 'Year-over-Year Trends' for inventory performance, then the system should display visual graphs and data that illustrates trends and changes in stock levels and sales for the past two years.

User views a dashboard that summarizes key performance indicators from all locations in real-time.

Given a user is on the dashboard page, when they log in to the system, then they should see real-time summaries of key performance indicators, including total inventory value, average turnover rates, and alerts for low stock across all locations.

Automated Inventory Reordering

User Story: As a store owner, I want the system to automatically reorder stock when it reaches a low level so that I can ensure that my shelves are always stocked without manual intervention.
Description: The goal of this requirement is to automate the inventory reordering process across multiple locations. The system will utilize defined reorder points and sales forecasts to initiate automated purchase orders when inventory levels reach critical thresholds. By automating the reordering process, businesses can streamline operations, minimize human errors, and ensure the timely replenishment of stock. This feature allows retailers to maintain optimal inventory levels, improve cash flow, and reduce the risk of lost sales due to stock availability issues.
Acceptance Criteria: Automated Reordering for Seasonal Stock Adjustment

Given that the inventory levels of seasonal items fall below the defined reorder point, When the sales forecast predicts an increase in demand for these items, Then an automated purchase order should be created and sent to suppliers without manual intervention.

Location-Specific Reorder Alerts

Given that the inventory management system is operational for multiple locations, When stock levels in a specific location reach the critical threshold, Then a dynamic reorder alert should be generated and sent to the relevant store manager for that location.

Weekly Inventory Review and Adjustment

Given that automated reordering is in effect, When a weekly review of inventory data occurs, Then the system should adjust reorder points based on the latest sales trends and inventory turnover rates for all locations.

Supplier Communication for Order Confirmation

Given that an automated purchase order has been generated, When the order is sent to the supplier, Then the system should receive and log an order confirmation from the supplier to ensure order placement accuracy.

Error Handling for Reorder Failures

Given that a purchase order fails to be generated due to system errors, When an error occurs, Then a notification must be sent to the inventory manager with the error details and suggested actions to rectify the issue.

Analysis of Stock Availability Impact on Sales

Given that automated reordering is implemented, When stock levels are monitored over a fiscal month, Then a report should be generated showing correlation between stock availability and sales performance across all store locations.

AI-Powered Sales Insights

Incorporates AI-driven insights that predict potential sales spikes or drops based on market trends, promotions, or seasonality. These insights empower users to take proactive measures and adjust ordering schedules accordingly, improving overall inventory responsiveness.

Requirements

Sales Trend Analysis

User Story: As a business owner, I want to receive alerts when a potential sales spike is predicted so that I can adjust my ordering schedule to prevent stock shortages and maximize sales opportunities.
Description: The Sales Trend Analysis requirement enables the AI-Powered Sales Insights feature to analyze historical sales data in combination with current market trends, promotional activities, and seasonality effects. This functionality will leverage machine learning algorithms to identify patterns and forecast future sales spikes or drops accurately. Implementing this requirement is crucial for offering users personalized insights into their inventory needs, allowing them to react proactively to potential changes in demand. By recognizing patterns in sales data, businesses can optimize their stock levels, minimize excess inventory, and reduce stockouts, ultimately improving profitability and customer satisfaction.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the Sales Trend Analysis feature to view sales data for the past six months and wants to understand the predicted sales trends for the next quarter based on current market trends and promotional activities.

Given a user navigates to the Sales Trend Analysis feature and selects a specific product category, when the analysis is processed, then the system must display accurate predictions for sales spikes or drops for the next quarter based on historical data and current market trends with at least 90% accuracy.

A user configures promotional discounts for a specific product and expects the Sales Trend Analysis feature to adjust predictions based on this promotional activity.

Given a user sets up a promotional discount for a product, when they trigger the analysis again, then the Sales Trend Analysis must recalculate sales predictions to reflect the potential increase in sales during the promotion period, providing updated insights.

After implementing the Sales Trend Analysis, a user reviews insights and takes action by adjusting their reorder quantities based on the provided sales forecasts.

Given that the user receives a notification of anticipated sales drops for specific products, when they adjust their reorder quantities accordingly, then the actual stock levels must not exceed the recommended maximum levels by more than 10%.

The Sales Trend Analysis feature is utilized to assess sales trends over multiple product categories within the same dashboard for a holistic view.

Given a user requests a comparative analysis of sales trends across multiple product categories, when the data is processed, then the system must display a side-by-side comparison of predicted sales trends for each category and provide actionable insights for each.

The system uses machine learning algorithms to continuously learn from new sales data and improve the accuracy of future sales predictions.

Given the Sales Trend Analysis feature runs after a new period of sales data is ingested, when the prediction algorithms recalibrate, then the predictions for the following quarter must improve by at least 15% in accuracy compared to the previous version predictions.

Users want to receive alerts regarding significant changes in predicted sales trends based on new historical data added to the system.

Given a system update includes new historical sales data, when significant changes in predicted sales trends occur, then users must receive real-time alerts notifying them of these changes for timely action.

Real-Time Notifications

User Story: As a retailer, I want to receive real-time notifications about potential sales trends so that I can make quick, informed decisions about my inventory and avoid missed sales.
Description: The Real-Time Notifications requirement focuses on delivering immediate alerts and insights to users regarding potential sales trends identified by the AI model. These notifications will be enabled via push notifications and in-app messages, allowing users to receive updates irrespective of their location and device. This requirement is essential for ensuring that users are always informed about critical inventory metrics and can make swift decisions. By mobilizing timely information, users can schedule inventory restocks promptly, enhancing the responsiveness of their operations and capitalizing on market dynamics effectively.
Acceptance Criteria: User receives push notifications for potential sales spikes identified by the AI model during peak shopping hours.

Given the AI model identifies a significant sales spike, when the user is subscribed to notifications, then the user should receive a push notification within 5 minutes of the alert being triggered.

User accesses real-time notifications through the in-app messaging system after logging in to the platform.

Given the user has logged into the InvenSage application, when they check the notifications panel, then they should see all unread notifications regarding sales trends and alerts.

User adjusts their inventory restocking schedule based on a real-time notification received about an expected sales drop.

Given the user receives a notification about a projected sales decline, when the user opens the inventory management interface, then they should be able to adjust the restock quantity and timing inline with the recommendation within the app.

User is notified about key inventory metrics while away from their desktop, using a mobile device.

Given the user's mobile app settings are configured for notifications, when the AI model generates a critical alert about low stock, then the user should receive a push notification on their mobile device without any significant delay.

Third-party integration delivers notifications to the user regarding sales trends based on external market data.

Given the user has integrated external sales data sources, when a significant external event affects product sales, then the user should receive an in-app message alerting them to the new trend within 10 minutes of detection.

User customizes notification settings for different product categories based on the AI recommendations.

Given the user is in the notification settings section of the app, when they select a category and adjust the notification preferences, then these changes should be saved and reflected in their notification feed.

User receives alerts for potential restocking needs as calculated by the AI forecasting model.

Given the AI forecasting model predicts a need for restock, when the threshold for low stock is met, then the user should receive a new notification alerting them to this need before it occurs, enabling proactive restocking.

User-Friendly Dashboard Integration

User Story: As a user of InvenSage, I want the AI-Powered Sales Insights to be directly integrated into my dashboard so that I can quickly access important information without navigating through multiple screens.
Description: This requirement emphasizes the seamless integration of AI-Powered Sales Insights into the existing dashboard of the InvenSage platform. Users require intuitive visualizations that present AI-driven sales predictions, trends, and actionable insights clearly and concisely. The goal is to enhance user experience by providing all necessary information in one easily accessible interface, allowing for better decision-making at a glance. Effective dashboard integration will also allow users to delve deeper into the data with functionalities like filtering and comparing historical trends, thus transforming the way they engage with their inventory data.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the InvenSage dashboard and navigates to the AI-Powered Sales Insights section during a promotional period to review expected sales trends based on configured parameters.

Given the user is on the dashboard, When the user selects the AI-Powered Sales Insights section, Then the system displays visualizations of predicted sales spikes and drops for the current promotional period, showing at least three key insights.

A user filters the sales insights data based on specific product categories to identify which products may experience sales fluctuations due to upcoming events.

Given the user is on the Sales Insights dashboard, When the user applies a filter for 'Product Category', Then the insights should refresh to display sales predictions relevant to that category with accurate percentages for each product.

User examines historical sales trends to identify patterns in inventory demand during similar previous promotional events.

Given the user accesses the historical trends option on the dashboard, When the user selects a specific past promotional period, Then the system should display visualizations for that period alongside the current data for comparison, allowing for a visual side-by-side analysis.

A user requires actionable insights from the AI predictions to decide on a reorder schedule for a product line during a seasonal sales peak.

Given the user is viewing the sales insights, When the AI predicts a spike for a specific product line, Then the dashboard should provide a clear action recommendation such as 'Reorder X units by Y date' based on the predicted sales volume.

User wants to export the sales insights data for reporting purposes to share with stakeholders.

Given the user is in the AI-Powered Sales Insights section, When the user clicks on the 'Export' button, Then the system should generate a downloadable report in CSV format containing all currently displayed sales insights.

A user interacts with the dashboard to receive real-time alerts on potential sales drops for key products.

Given the user has enabled alerts in their dashboard settings, When the AI detects a significant predicted sales drop for any product, Then the system should send a real-time alert to the user via the dashboard notification center showing the affected product and the magnitude of the drop.

User engages with a help feature to better understand how to interpret the AI-driven sales insights.

Given the user is viewing the AI-Powered Sales Insights, When the user clicks on the 'Help' icon, Then the system displays a contextual guide that explains the meaning of each visualization and insight, ensuring a user-friendly experience.

Customizable Reporting Tools

User Story: As a data analyst, I want to create customized reports that reflect our sales trends so that I can provide specific insights to management for strategic planning.
Description: The Customizable Reporting Tools requirement aims to allow users to generate tailored reports based on the AI insights regarding sales trends. Users should be able to select various parameters and metrics for reporting purposes, enabling them to analyze specific aspects of their inventory and sales data. This feature is pivotal for businesses looking to gain deeper insights into their sales trends over time and adapt their strategies accordingly. By providing flexibility in reporting, businesses will be better equipped to assess their performance and make data-driven decisions.
Acceptance Criteria: User generates a sales report showcasing performance during the previous quarter using various customizable parameters.

Given a user is logged into InvenSage, when they select the 'Customizable Reporting Tools' feature and choose a date range for the last quarter along with specific metrics such as total sales and average order values, then the system should generate a report that accurately reflects the selected criteria within seconds.

User uses the customizable reporting tools to analyze sales trends based on promotions applied during a specific period.

Given a user has access to the reporting tools, when they specify a date range during which promotions were active and select 'Sales by Promotion' as the report type, then the report should only include sales data reflecting the impact of those promotions, with clarity on metrics like total units sold and revenue generated.

User exports a customized report that displays sales trends and inventory levels for a specific product category.

Given a user has created a customized report for a specific product category and selects the 'Export' option, when they choose the format (CSV, PDF), then the system should successfully generate the report in the chosen format, retaining all selected parameters, and confirm the export with a success message.

User adjusts the parameters of a previously generated report and verifies if the changes are applied correctly.

Given a user has a previously generated sales report, when they change the reporting parameters such as the date range or metrics in the customizable reporting tool, then the updated report should reflect the new parameters accurately and reload within an acceptable time frame without errors.

User accesses the customizable reporting tools to track seasonal sales fluctuations over a specified timeframe.

Given a user has logged into their account, when they select the 'Sales Trend Analysis' report type and enter a specific seasonal timeframe, then the report should display sales data highlighting the fluctuations during that period, with visual aids to support the analysis (e.g., graphs, charts).

User receives an error when attempting to generate a report with invalid parameter selections.

Given a user tries to generate a report using incompatible or invalid parameters, when they click the 'Generate Report' button, then the system should display a clear error message explaining the issue and prompt the user to revise their selections.

Integration with Third-Party Analytics Tools

User Story: As a business analyst, I want to integrate InvenSage insights with third-party analytics tools so that I can utilize advanced features and capabilities that my team is accustomed to.
Description: The Integration with Third-Party Analytics Tools requirement seeks to enable connections with external business intelligence tools and platforms. This feature will allow users to export AI-driven sales insights and predictions into popular analytics software, enhancing their ability to analyze data using their preferred tools. This integration is crucial as businesses often employ varied analytical systems and need the flexibility to apply AI insights in different contexts. Ensuring compatibility with industry-standard tools can enhance user satisfaction and drive greater adoption of the InvenSage platform.
Acceptance Criteria: User can connect InvenSage with third-party analytics tools for data export.

Given a user is logged into InvenSage, when they navigate to the integration settings and select a third-party analytics tool to connect, then they should be able to input the required API credentials and save the connection successfully without errors.

User can export AI-driven sales insights to a selected third-party analytics tool.

Given a user has connected InvenSage to a third-party analytics tool, when they select 'Export Sales Insights' on the dashboard, then they should receive a confirmation notification that the data export was successful, and the data should be visible in the connected analytics tool within 5 minutes.

User can view compatibility information for various third-party analytics tools.

Given a user accesses the integration documentation, when they view the list of supported third-party analytics tools, then the displayed tools should include descriptions of compatibility, data types supported, and setup instructions for each tool.

User receives real-time troubleshooting support during integration.

Given a user attempts to connect a third-party analytics tool and encounters an error, when they click on the 'Help' button, then the user should be presented with a real-time chat or support form to get assistance, and the support response time should not exceed 5 minutes.

User can disconnect from a third-party analytics tool at any time.

Given a user is on the integration settings page, when they select a connected third-party analytics tool and click on 'Disconnect', then they should receive a confirmation prompt, and upon confirming, the connection should be severed, allowing no further data exports to that tool.

User can view a history log of all data exports to third-party analytics tools.

Given a user has exported data to third-party analytics tools, when they navigate to the 'Export History' section, then they should see a chronological list of all exports, including timestamps, data types, and the tools to which the data was exported.

Supplier Lead Time Integration

Integrates supplier lead time data into the reorder process, factoring in how long it takes for items to be received after ordering. This ensures that reorder alerts consider both stock levels and restock timelines, keeping inventory management fluid and efficient.

Requirements

Supplier Lead Time Data Capture

User Story: As a warehouse manager, I want to have detailed lead time information for each supplier so that I can accurately plan my reorder schedules and optimize stock levels without compromising on service levels.
Description: This requirement involves the ability to capture and store vendor-specific lead time data associated with each supplier and their products. By having accurate lead time information integrated into the InvenSage platform, users can ensure that reorder alerts are based on realistic timelines, accounting for the time taken for products to arrive after ordering. This comprehensive lead time data facilitates better planning, reduces stockouts, and improves the overall efficiency of inventory management processes.
Acceptance Criteria: Validation of Lead Time Data Entry Process for Each Supplier

Given a supplier is selected, when the user inputs lead time data and saves it, then the lead time data should be successfully stored and retrievable for that supplier and their products.

Scenario for Reorder Alerts Considering Lead Time

Given an item is below the reorder threshold and lead time data is available, when the reorder alert is generated, then it should accurately consider the lead time in recommending reorder quantities.

Integration of Lead Time Data with Inventory Reports

Given lead time data has been captured for suppliers, when generating inventory reports, then the reports should reflect accurate reorder timelines considering the lead time for each supplier.

User Training on Entering and Managing Lead Time Data

Given new users are trained on the system, when they attempt to enter lead time data for suppliers, then they should demonstrate the ability to successfully input and edit lead time data without errors.

System Behavior on Missing Lead Time Data

Given a product does not have an associated lead time from its supplier, when a reorder alert is generated, then the system should notify the user that lead time data is missing and recommend obtaining this information.

User Notification for Lead Time Update

Given lead time data is updated for a supplier, when the changes are saved, then all relevant users should receive a notification regarding the update of lead time data.

Verification of Historical Lead Time Data Accuracy

Given lead time data has been collected over time, when the user requests historical lead time reports, then the reports should reflect accurate data with no discrepancies identified.

Dynamic Reorder Alerts

User Story: As an inventory manager, I want to receive reorder alerts that consider lead times so that I can maintain optimal stock levels and prevent stockouts during peak demand periods.
Description: This requirement encompasses the implementation of dynamic reorder alerts that factor in supplier lead times when notifying users of low stock levels. The alerts will not only notify users of quantities falling below minimum thresholds, but also provide insights into when new stock will arrive based on the lead times entered. This ensures that businesses can avoid both overstock and stockouts, leading to improved inventory turnover and customer satisfaction.
Acceptance Criteria: Dynamic Reorder Alert for Critical Stock Level Check

Given that the inventory level of a product falls below the minimum threshold, when the supplier lead time is integrated into the alert, then the system should notify the user with a precise restock expected date along with the alert.

User Interface Display of Alerts

Given that a reorder alert is triggered, when the user checks the dashboard, then the alert should clearly display the product name, current stock level, minimum threshold, supplier lead time, and expected delivery date.

Integration with Supplier Data

Given that supplier lead times are configured in the system, when a product is reordered, then the system should correctly calculate the expected delivery date based on the current date and the supplier lead time provided.

Notification Preferences for Reorder Alerts

Given that a user has set their notification preferences, when a reorder alert is triggered, then the system should notify the user via their chosen communication channels (e.g., email, SMS, app notification).

Handling Multiple Supplier Lead Times

Given that an item has multiple suppliers with varying lead times, when the reorder alert is triggered, then the system should display alerts based on the supplier with the shortest lead time to ensure timely replenishment.

Supplier Performance Analytics

User Story: As a procurement specialist, I want to analyze supplier performance related to lead times so that I can negotiate better terms with suppliers and ensure timely stock availability for my business.
Description: This requirement focuses on developing a reporting module that analyzes supplier performance based on lead times and delivery accuracy. The analytics will help users to evaluate supplier reliability, track lead time variances, and make informed decisions about which suppliers to prioritize or reconsider. This feature is essential in enhancing supply chain efficiency and maintaining healthy vendor relationships.
Acceptance Criteria: Supplier performance analytics includes lead times and delivery accuracy tracking for better inventory management decisions.

Given that supplier lead time and delivery accuracy data are recorded, when analytics are generated, then the report must display average lead time for each supplier, delivery accuracy percentage, and any variances from expected lead times.

Users need to view performance metrics of suppliers in a clear and understandable format.

Given that the supplier performance analytics report is generated, when users access the report, then they should see visual data representations such as charts or graphs showcasing supplier reliability and performance trends.

The system allows users to filter or sort suppliers based on their performance metrics to make informed decisions.

Given that performance analytics is displayed, when users apply filters for lead time or accuracy, then the system should update to show only the suppliers that meet the selected criteria.

Users want to compare multiple suppliers' performance side by side.

Given multiple suppliers in the analytics module, when users select at least two suppliers for comparison, then the module should display a side-by-side comparison of their lead times and delivery accuracy.

The system should notify users when suppliers fail to meet agreed-upon lead times consistently.

Given that supplier lead time data is recorded, when lead times across multiple orders exceed the agreed threshold for a specific supplier, then the system should trigger an alert notification to the user regarding the performance issue.

Users need to identify trends over time to address supplier performance issues quickly.

Given that supplier performance data is stored, when users request a historical report, then the report must include a trend analysis of lead times and delivery accuracy over a specified period.

The reporting module must be able to export supplier performance data for external usage.

Given that an analytics report is generated, when users select the export option, then the system should allow users to download the report in multiple formats (e.g., CSV, PDF, Excel).

Lead Time Adjustment Interface

User Story: As a supply chain analyst, I want an easy way to adjust supplier lead times in the system so that I can respond promptly to any changes in delivery schedules and maintain an accurate inventory system.
Description: This requirement includes the creation of an intuitive interface for users to easily adjust lead time values based on changing supplier circumstances, seasonal variations, or other factors that could influence delivery timelines. An effective interface would allow for quick updates and ensure ongoing accuracy in inventory planning without needing technical intervention.
Acceptance Criteria: User adjusts lead time values for a supplier due to seasonal delays in the delivery of products.

Given the user is logged into InvenSage and navigates to the lead time adjustment interface, when they input a new lead time value and save the changes, then the system should reflect the updated lead time across all relevant reorder alerts within 5 minutes.

A user changes the lead time and wants to verify that the new lead time is used in subsequent reorder alerts.

Given the user has successfully updated lead time values, when the next reorder alert is generated, then it must display the adjusted lead time rather than the previous one, ensuring it accounts for the current supplier's timeline.

A user needs to quickly modify multiple lead times in succession due to changing supplier circumstances.

Given the user is on the lead time adjustment interface, when they adjust multiple lead times one after the other and click on 'Save All', then the system should update all specified lead times and notify the user of successful updates with a confirmation message after processing all changes.

User attempts to input a negative lead time value, which is prohibited in the system.

Given the user is in the lead time adjustment interface, when they attempt to enter a negative value for a lead time and hit 'Save', then the system should display an error message indicating that lead time must be a positive value and should not accept the input.

A user wants to revert the lead time adjustments made in the current session.

Given the user has made lead time adjustments in the current session, when they click on the 'Revert Changes' button, then the system should restore all lead times to their values prior to any changes made during this session.

User accesses the lead time adjustment interface for the first time.

Given the user is accessing the lead time adjustment interface for the first time, when they view the interface, then it should display default lead time values for all suppliers and include tooltips explaining how to adjust these values.

Integration with Supplier Systems

User Story: As an operations manager, I want the system to automatically update supplier lead times from our suppliers' systems so that I can reduce manual data entry and the risk of errors in inventory management.
Description: This requirement explores data integration between the InvenSage platform and external supplier systems to automate lead time updates. By leveraging APIs or EDI, this integration allows for regular updates of lead times directly from suppliers, ensuring the information used for reorder processes is always current, which aids in effective inventory management.
Acceptance Criteria: Supplier lead time data is successfully integrated from external supplier systems into the InvenSage platform for automated updates.

Given that the supplier system provides lead time data through an API, when InvenSage requests the data, then the system should receive and store the updated lead time accurately in the database.

Reorder alerts are generated based on accurate supplier lead times integrated into the inventory management system.

Given that stock levels are below the predefined threshold and the lead times are accurately retrieved, when the reorder process is initiated, then the system should generate alerts considering both the stock levels and the lead times.

Users can view the updated lead times for each supplier in the InvenSage dashboard after integration.

Given that lead time data is integrated, when a user accesses the supplier dashboard, then the updated lead times should be displayed correctly for each supplier without errors.

System performance maintains efficiency during peak data updates from supplier systems.

Given that multiple suppliers are updating their lead times simultaneously, when the updates are processed, then the system response time should remain within acceptable limits (less than 2 seconds for dashboard updates).

Historical lead time data for suppliers is stored for reporting in the InvenSage platform.

Given that lead time data is integrated and updated, when a user requests historical reports, then the system should retrieve and display lead time history accurately for reporting purposes.

Integration logs are generated to track the success or failure of lead time updates from suppliers.

Given that the integration process is performed, when a lead time update attempt occurs, then the system should create a log entry indicating success or failure, including timestamps and error messages if applicable.

Real-Time Data Sharing

Real-Time Data Sharing allows cross-departmental teams to instantly access and synchronize inventory data. This feature enhances collaboration by ensuring that every member works with the latest data, reducing discrepancies and improving overall decision-making across the organization.

Requirements

Centralized Dashboard Access

User Story: As an inventory manager, I want a centralized dashboard that displays real-time inventory data so that I can monitor stock levels and make informed decisions quickly and effectively.
Description: The Centralized Dashboard Access requirement involves creating a unified, user-friendly dashboard that allows users from different departments to view real-time inventory data. This centralized access is pivotal for enabling efficient cross-departmental collaboration by ensuring that team members have a single source of truth. The dashboard should display key metrics related to inventory levels, sales trends, and forecasts, facilitating timely decision-making and proactive inventory management. Integration with existing systems must be seamless, enabling users to drill down into specific datasets, set alerts for threshold levels, and visualize data in customizable formats. This feature enhances transparency and allows for a shared understanding amongst stakeholders, ultimately driving improved inventory practices and operational efficiency.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the centralized dashboard to view real-time inventory data for the first time.

Given the user is logged into the InvenSage platform, when they navigate to the Centralized Dashboard, then they should see a unified view of inventory levels, sales trends, and forecasts updated in real-time without delay.

A user from the sales department sets an alert for low stock levels on the dashboard.

Given the user is viewing the Centralized Dashboard, when they set an alert for a specific inventory threshold, then the system should successfully save the alert and notify the user when stock drops below the set level.

Cross-departmental teams hold a meeting to discuss inventory data insights from the Centralized Dashboard.

Given the dashboard displays real-time data, when multiple users access the dashboard simultaneously, then all users should see consistent and accurate data reflected in their views, ensuring no discrepancies.

A user drills down into specific datasets on the dashboard to analyze historical sales trends.

Given the user is in the Centralized Dashboard, when they select a specific metric to drill down, then they should be able to view detailed historical data for that metric, including visualizations, without loss of performance.

A user needs to customize the layout of the dashboard to focus on the most relevant metrics for their role.

Given the user is on the Centralized Dashboard, when they customize their view of the dashboard, then the changes should be saved and persist across sessions, allowing for personalized and efficient data access.

The system integrates with an existing ERP solution to pull inventory data into the dashboard.

Given the ERP system is connected, when inventory updates occur in the ERP, then these changes should be reflected in the Centralized Dashboard in real-time, ensuring seamless data synchronization.

An executive user reviews dashboard data for a monthly inventory performance report.

Given the user is viewing the Centralized Dashboard, when they prepare to export the data for reporting, then they should successfully export the dashboard content and metrics in the desired format (e.g., CSV, PDF) without data loss or errors.

Automated Data Synchronization

User Story: As a sales associate, I want automated synchronization of inventory data so that I have access to the most accurate and up-to-date information at all times during customer interactions.
Description: The Automated Data Synchronization requirement focuses on developing a process that continuously updates inventory data across all departments and systems without manual intervention. This automated synchronization ensures that all team members are operating with the latest inventory information, eliminating discrepancies and reducing the chances of overstocking or stockouts. The feature must integrate with various existing systems like ERP, POS, and e-commerce platforms, and it should support customizable synchronization intervals to meet different departmental needs. By streamlining data sharing, this requirement enhances operational cohesion and responsiveness to market fluctuations, thereby enabling the organization to maintain optimal stock levels.
Acceptance Criteria: Automated synchronization of inventory data between the ERP system and internal team dashboards for a furniture retailer during peak sales seasons.

Given the synchronization feature is activated, when inventory levels change in the ERP system, then the internal dashboards should update in real-time within 2 minutes.

Synchronizing inventory data between the POS system and e-commerce platform during a sales event for a clothing retailer.

Given the synchronization is configured to occur every 5 minutes, when a sale is made in the POS system, then the e-commerce platform must reflect the updated inventory level within 5 minutes.

Cross-departmental access to synchronized inventory data for timely decision-making during stocktaking.

Given the automated data synchronization is active, when a user from the sales department accesses inventory data, then the data displayed must be the latest updated information with no discrepancies.

Customizable synchronization intervals for different departments based on operational needs.

Given the administrator sets a synchronization interval of 10 minutes for the warehousing department, when inventory levels change, then the data must sync according to the specified interval without manual input.

Integration of the automated data synchronization feature with existing ERP, POS, and e-commerce platforms without service interruptions.

Given the integration is in place, when a data synchronization process is initiated, then all connected platforms should operate without errors or service downtime, ensuring continuous operation during peak hours.

User notification system for successful data synchronization across departments.

Given the synchronization process completes, when the data is updated, then all relevant users in the organization should receive a notification confirming the successful update of the inventory data.

Audit trail for all automated synchronization activities for compliance with organizational standards.

Given the auditing feature is enabled, when data synchronization occurs, then an entry must be logged with timestamp, data changed, and the source of change for future reference.

Cross-Departmental Notifications

User Story: As a marketing manager, I want to receive notifications when inventory levels drop below a certain threshold so that I can plan marketing campaigns without risking stockouts and lost sales.
Description: The Cross-Departmental Notifications requirement aims to implement a notification system that alerts relevant department members about critical inventory changes or updates, such as restocks, low stock alerts, or inventory discrepancies. This feature is essential for fostering communication amongst teams like sales, inventory management, and finance, ensuring that everyone is aware of the latest inventory status and can take action accordingly. Notifications should be customizable based on user preferences and the urgency of the update, allowing team members to stay informed without being overwhelmed by unnecessary alerts. Incorporating this feature will enhance responsiveness, coordination, and informed decision-making related to inventory management.
Acceptance Criteria: Notification upon Low Stock Levels

Given a product's stock level drops below the predefined threshold, When the inventory is updated, Then a notification should be sent immediately to all relevant department members whose preferences include low stock alerts.

Restock Confirmation Notification

Given that a restock order has been processed, When the order is confirmed, Then all relevant department members should receive a notification detailing the items restocked and their quantities.

Daily Inventory Summary Notifications

Given that it is the end of the business day, When daily inventory updates are compiled, Then a summary notification should be sent to all departments summarizing key inventory movements and alerts.

Custom User Notification Preferences

Given that a user needs to adjust their notification settings, When the user updates their preferences, Then the system should save these preferences and ensure notifications are delivered according to the new settings.

Escalation of Critical Inventory Discrepancies

Given that a significant inventory discrepancy is detected, When the discrepancy is confirmed, Then an urgent notification should be sent to the inventory management team and relevant stakeholders immediately.

Feedback Loop for Notifications

Given the user receives a notification, When the user interacts with the notification (i.e., clicks to acknowledge), Then the system should log the feedback for tracking effectiveness of the notification system.

Interactive Data Visualization

Interactive Data Visualization transforms raw inventory data into dynamic, easy-to-read visual formats. Users can customize charts and graphs, making it simpler to interpret trends and metrics. This feature empowers teams to identify opportunities and risks quickly, facilitating strategic discussions and actions.

Requirements

Dynamic Chart Customization

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to customize charts to visualize inventory data based on specific metrics so that I can easily identify trends and make informed strategic decisions.
Description: The requirement allows users to dynamically customize charts and graphs based on specific inventory metrics and trends. Users can select from various visualization types such as bar graphs, line charts, or pie charts, and apply filters or time ranges to hone in on relevant data. This flexibility will enhance user engagement and allow each user to tailor the visual representation of the data according to their analytical needs, improving the interpretability of trends and facilitating quicker decision-making regarding inventory management.
Acceptance Criteria: Dynamic Chart Customization for Sales Trends Analysis

Given a user is logged into InvenSage, when they navigate to the Interactive Data Visualization section and select 'Sales Trends,' then a customizable bar graph option should be available for displaying sales data over the last quarter.

Dynamic Chart Customization for Inventory Levels Monitoring

Given a user is currently viewing their inventory dashboard, when they choose to customize their chart by selecting 'Line Chart' and applying a filter for 'Stock Levels,' then the system should generate a line chart reflecting stock levels over the past month.

Dynamic Chart Customization for Seasonal Demand Forecasting

Given a user is on the forecast analysis page, when they select 'Pie Chart' and a specific time range for seasonal demand, then the system should display a pie chart illustrating predicted demand percentages for various products.

Dynamic Chart Customization for Multi-Metric Comparison

Given a user has access to the data visualization feature, when they create a chart comparing 'Sales' and 'Inventory Levels' side by side, then the system should allow them to customize the visual representation and overlay the two metrics accurately.

Dynamic Chart Customization for User Access Control Settings

Given an administrator is managing user permissions, when they assign visualization customization capabilities to a user role, then the selected users should be able to dynamically customize charts without restrictions based on their assigned role.

Dynamic Chart Customization for Exporting Visual Data

Given a user has created a dynamic chart, when they opt to export the chart in PDF format, then the exported document should accurately reflect the customized chart layout and data presented in the application.

Dynamic Chart Customization for Real-time Data Interaction

Given a user accesses the real-time inventory dashboard, when they make a selection to filter data by 'Category' and adjust the time range, then the dynamic chart displayed should update immediately to reflect the new parameters.

Real-Time Data Refresh

User Story: As a warehouse supervisor, I want the data visualizations to refresh in real-time so that I can respond promptly to changes in inventory levels and avoid stockouts or overstock situations.
Description: This requirement ensures that all visualizations are updated in real-time to reflect the most current inventory data. By implementing a mechanism that pulls in live data, users will always have access to the latest information, minimizing the risk of making decisions based on outdated metrics. This feature is crucial for maintaining accurate inventory tracking and forecasting, as it enhances visibility and immediate responsiveness to inventory changes.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the Interactive Data Visualization feature to review inventory metrics during a peak sales period, needing to make quick restocking decisions based on the latest data.

Given the user is on the dashboard, When they select the Interactive Data Visualization, Then the data refreshes in real-time without any manual input, reflecting the latest inventory changes within 5 seconds.

A warehouse manager is monitoring inventory levels for multiple products to identify stockouts and overstock situations in real-time before making adjustments to orders.

Given the manager has selected multiple products for visual tracking, When inventory levels change, Then all affected visualizations display the updated inventory levels accurately within 10 seconds.

The finance team conducts a monthly review of inventory trends and requires the most recent data to prepare accurate financial forecasts based on real-time insights.

Given it is the end of the month, When the finance team retrieves inventory data from the Interactive Data Visualization, Then all metrics must reflect real-time updates from the last 30 days without discrepancies.

A sales representative is preparing for a client meeting and needs to pull the latest inventory data to present current stock availability and forecast future demand.

Given the representative is in the sales dashboard, When they initiate the data pull, Then the Interactive Data Visualization should dynamically update to show the most current inventory levels and forecast trends within 7 seconds.

A user performs routine checks on inventory data throughout the day and expects visualizations to reflect changes as they occur in the inventory system following every update.

Given the user is logged into the system, When inventory data is updated, Then all visualizations should automatically refresh to incorporate the latest changes without the need for page refresh or manual updates, achieving 99% data accuracy at all times.

A manager identifies a sudden spike in demand for a product and requires immediate insights into inventory levels across locations to make quick decisions about resource allocation.

Given the manager accesses inventory reports during a spike, When they initiate the view, Then the system must pull and display inventory data real-time within 5 seconds, highlighting stock levels across all locations clearly.

Historical Data Comparison

User Story: As an e-commerce business owner, I want to compare current inventory levels with historical data so that I can identify trends and adjust my inventory strategy accordingly.
Description: This requirement enables users to compare current inventory data against historical performance metrics visually. By providing options to overlay past trends with current data, users will be able to assess performance changes over time easily. This feature aids in understanding seasonal fluctuations, evaluating changes in demand, and optimizing stock levels based on historical insights, thereby enhancing strategic decision-making.
Acceptance Criteria: User compares current inventory data against historical data to assess changes in sales performance over the past year during a quarterly business review meeting.

Given that the user has selected a specific product category and time frame, when they access the historical data comparison feature, then they should see an overlay of current inventory levels and historical performance for that category over the selected time frame.

User needs to evaluate seasonal trends for inventory management during product planning sessions before peak seasons.

Given that the user has input the desired seasonal date range, when they generate a visual representation, then they should receive a clear comparison of inventory levels and sales trends for that range versus the corresponding period from previous years.

Inventory manager conducts a monthly analysis of stock performance to prepare a report for stakeholders.

Given that the user has selected the current month and the previous 12 months' data, when the graph is displayed, then it must show a clear indication of stock levels versus sales data for each month, facilitating easy identification of trends.

A retailer reviews product performance to identify underperforming inventory items during a sales review meeting.

Given that the user has chosen multiple SKUs, when they initiate a comparison, then they should see a visual output highlighting which SKUs are underperforming based on historical data trends, enabling focused discussions on inventory reduction.

User wants to identify the impact of past promotional campaigns on inventory performance during a strategic planning session.

Given that the user has selected a specific promotional period, when they compare the inventory levels before, during, and after the campaign, then they should see a clear trend visualization showing sales spikes or declines correlating with the promotions.

An e-commerce manager examines how inventory levels have changed over time in relation to seasonality.

Given that the user has access to three or more years of data, when they create a comparison visualization, then they must be able to visualize seasonal inventory fluctuations over that span, making it easier to predict future stock requirements.

Export Visual Reports

User Story: As a financial analyst, I want to export visual reports of inventory data so that I can present the findings to my team in a clear and concise manner.
Description: This requirement facilitates the ability for users to export customized visual reports in various formats (PDF, Excel, etc.) directly from the data visualization feature. Users can create shareable reports for internal or external stakeholders, leading to improved communication and collaborative decision-making regarding inventory management. This functionality is essential for providing stakeholders with clear insights supported by data visuals.
Acceptance Criteria: User wants to export a visual report in PDF format after generating a customized chart within the Interactive Data Visualization feature of InvenSage.

Given a user has created a chart using the Interactive Data Visualization feature, when the user selects the option to export the report and chooses 'PDF' as the format, then the system should generate a PDF file containing the chart and relevant data, which can be downloaded successfully.

User needs to export visual reports in Excel format to share inventory data with external stakeholders.

Given a user has generated a visual report, when the user chooses 'Excel' as the export format and initiates the export process, then an Excel file should be created that accurately reflects the visual data presented in the report.

User wants to ensure the exported visual reports retain the format and style they set during the report visualization process.

Given a user exports a visual report in either PDF or Excel format, when the report is opened, then it should display the same formatting, color schemes, and styles as configured in the Interactive Data Visualization feature.

User attempts to export a visual report but encounters a network issue during the process.

Given a user initiates an export while having unstable network connectivity, when the export is interrupted, then the system should notify the user of the failure and provide an option to retry the export process without losing the previous settings.

User wishes to share an exported report with a colleague via email directly from the InvenSage platform.

Given a user has successfully exported a report, when the user selects the 'Share Via Email' option and enters the recipient's email address, then the system should send the report as an attachment to the specified email address and confirm the action with a success message.

User wants to verify the successful completion of an export process for accountability.

Given a user exports a visual report, when the export is completed, then the system should log the export action in the user's activity history, indicating the format, date, and time of the export, for future reference.

Interactive Trend Analysis

User Story: As a stock analyst, I want to interact with data visualizations to drill down into specific trends so that I can gather deeper insights for my analysis.
Description: This requirement introduces interactive features in visualization tools, allowing users to click on specific data points to drill down for more in-depth analysis. By implementing tooltips or pop-up details that display additional metrics or comparative data, users can engage more with the visualizations. This capability increases understanding and insight generation concerning inventory patterns and irregularities.
Acceptance Criteria: User engages with the interactive trend analysis feature to explore a specific sales data point for the previous quarter.

Given a user has accessed the interactive trend analysis dashboard, when they click on a data point representing sales for March, then a tooltip should appear displaying additional metrics such as units sold, returns, and inventory levels for March.

A user wants to compare inventory levels over a three-month period through the interactive trend analysis tool.

Given a user selects the inventory trend chart, when they hover over the trend line, then the tool should show comparative metrics for the previous three months in a pop-up format.

A team member is preparing for a strategic meeting and needs insights from the interactive trend analysis tool.

Given a team member accesses the interactive trend analysis feature, when they select a particular data point, then they should be able to export the detailed metrics into a report format such as PDF or Excel for sharing in the meeting.

User wants to identify unusual spikes in inventory data through the interactive visualization.

Given a user reviews the inventory trend chart, when they click on any anomalous spike in data, then a detailed view including the context of that spike along with possible reasons should be displayed in a dedicated section.

An analyst is monitoring real-time inventory patterns using the interactive trend analysis tool.

Given an analyst is using the interactive trend analysis dashboard, when they change filters (e.g., by category, date range), then the visualization should update dynamically and accurately reflect the new data inputs without lag.

A new user is learning to use the interactive trend analysis tools for the first time.

Given a new user is utilizing the interactive trend analysis dashboard, when they hover over different elements of the visualization, then tooltips should provide informative guidance on what each metric represents.

User-Defined Alerts for Trends

User Story: As an inventory manager, I want to set alerts for specific inventory trends so that I can act before potential issues arise, ensuring efficient stock management.
Description: This requirement allows users to set up custom alerts based on predefined criteria within the data visualizations. For instance, users may wish to receive notifications if inventory levels drop below a certain threshold or if unusual purchasing trends are detected. This feature will ensure proactive management of inventory, minimizing missed opportunities or potential losses through timely alerts.
Acceptance Criteria: User sets a custom alert for low inventory threshold on a specific product category.

Given the user is on the inventory dashboard, when they set a low inventory alert for a product category and click save, then the alert should be active and reflected in the alerts list.

User receives a notification for unusual purchasing patterns.

Given the user has configured alerts for unusual purchasing trends, when a spike in purchases occurs beyond the predefined threshold, then the user should receive a notification via the selected communication channel.

User modifies an existing alert's criteria.

Given the user is viewing their existing alerts, when they change the criteria of a specific alert and click update, then the alert should reflect the new criteria and show a confirmation message.

User can disable an active alert.

Given the user is in the alert management section, when they select an active alert and click disable, then that alert should be marked as inactive and removed from the active alerts list.

User views a history of triggered alerts over a specified time period.

Given the user accesses the alert history feature, when they select a date range, then all triggered alerts within that time frame should be displayed accurately.

User configures multiple alerts for different products.

Given the user is on the alerts configuration page, when they create multiple alerts for various products and save them, then all alerts should be listed and active in the alerts management section.

User receives a summary report of alert notifications on a weekly basis.

Given the user has opted in for weekly summaries, when the week ends, then a report summarizing all alert notifications should be sent to the user's registered email.

Customizable Report Templates

Customizable Report Templates enable users to create tailored inventory reports suited for specific needs or audiences. By providing various pre-designed templates, this feature saves time and improves the clarity of communication among stakeholders, ensuring everyone is on the same page.

Requirements

Dynamic Template Selection

User Story: As an inventory manager, I want to select different report templates for my stakeholders so that I can communicate specific inventory insights effectively and enhance collaboration.
Description: The Dynamic Template Selection requirement facilitates users in choosing from a variety of pre-designed report templates tailored to different inventory management needs. Users can easily select templates based on criteria such as audience, data specifics, or reporting frequency. This flexibility allows stakeholders to produce relevant reports quickly, ensuring accurate data communication, which enhances decision-making processes and saves time.
Acceptance Criteria: User selects a report template from the available options to generate a sales inventory report for the weekly meeting with stakeholders.

Given the user is on the report generation page, when they view the template selection dropdown, then they should see at least five pre-designed report templates specific to sales inventory.

A user needs to create a quarterly audit report and selects a template that includes financial metrics relevant to the audit.

Given the user has access to the customizable report templates, when they select the 'Quarterly Audit' template, then the template should include sections for inventory valuation, stock discrepancies, and sales trends for the chosen quarter.

The user wants to generate a monthly stock report for an e-commerce platform using a template that focuses on online sales performance and product returns.

Given the user selects the 'Monthly Stock Report' template, when they request the report, then the generated report should include key performance metrics such as total units sold, return rates, and stock levels at the end of the month.

A user is preparing a report for a meeting with different stakeholders who require specific data points and formats.

Given that the user has chosen a template, when they customize the template by adding new data fields relevant to the audience, then the template should successfully save these customizations for future use.

The user is creating a summary report for management that combines data from various departments in a standardized format.

Given the user accesses the report templates, when they select the 'Management Summary Report' template, then the template should automatically pull and aggregate data from multiple sources seamlessly.

The user needs a report template that can adapt based on the inventory category (e.g., electronics, apparel) being reported.

Given the user selects the 'Dynamic Inventory Report' template, when they specify the category, then the template should adjust its sections and metrics accordingly to fit the selected category's needs.

A user wishes to send a customized report template to stakeholders via email directly from the report generation interface.

Given the user has generated a report using a customizable template, when they choose to send the report via email, then the system should successfully send the report to the specified email addresses with the appropriate formatting and attachments.

Template Customization Options

User Story: As a retailer, I want to customize my report templates to match my branding and specific reporting needs so that my stakeholders receive tailored and relevant insights.
Description: The Template Customization Options requirement grants users the capability to modify existing report templates according to their specific preferences or business needs. Users can adjust elements such as layout, color schemes, data fields, and graph types which allows for a more personalized reporting experience. This feature enhances user satisfaction and ensures that reports can convey information in the most effective way possible for different contexts.
Acceptance Criteria: As a user, I need to customize the layout of a report template to fit my preferred presentation style for a quarterly inventory review meeting.

Given a pre-designed report template, When I select the layout customization option, Then I can rearrange sections, add or remove elements, and save the customized layout successfully.

As a user, I want to change the color scheme of my inventory report to match my brand’s colors before sending it to stakeholders.

Given a report template open for customization, When I access the color selection feature, Then I can apply and preview custom colors for various elements and save the changes without errors.

As a user, I need to add specific data fields to my inventory report to capture essential metrics relevant to my business operations.

Given a report template, When I navigate to the data fields customization options, Then I can select additional fields from a list, include them in the report, and confirm their addition successfully.

As a user, I want to change the type of graph used in my inventory report to enhance the visual representation of sales data.

Given a customizable report template with an existing graph, When I choose a different graph type from the customization options, Then the report updates to reflect the new graph type without losing any data.

As a user, I want to save my customized report template for future use to avoid repeating the customization process.

Given a customized report template, When I select the save option and name my template, Then the template is saved in my account and can be retrieved later without issues.

As a user, I want to reset the template customization options to revert to the original design in case I've made unwanted changes.

Given a customized report template, When I click the reset option, Then all changes are reverted, and the original template is restored without any discrepancies.

As a user, I need to export my customized report template to different file formats (e.g., PDF, Excel) for distribution to stakeholders.

Given a customized report, When I select the export option, Then I can successfully save or download the report in my desired file format with correct formatting retained.

Scheduled Reporting

User Story: As a business owner, I want to schedule my inventory reports so that I can ensure my team receives timely insights without needing to manually generate them each time.
Description: The Scheduled Reporting requirement allows users to automate the generation and distribution of customized inventory reports at predetermined intervals (daily, weekly, monthly). Users can set preferences for both the content of reports and the recipients, enhancing operational efficiency and ensuring that stakeholders have up-to-date information without manual intervention. This increases productivity and enables proactive inventory management.
Acceptance Criteria: User sets up a daily reporting schedule for the sales team to receive inventory updates every morning.

Given the user has access to the Scheduled Reporting feature, when they select a daily frequency and specify the report content and recipients, then the system should generate and send the report automatically at the specified time without errors.

User modifies an existing weekly reporting schedule to change the report recipients and frequency.

Given the user has an existing weekly report setup, when they update the recipient list and change the frequency to bi-weekly, then the system should reflect these changes and send the report to the new recipients on the designated schedule starting from the next reporting period.

User attempts to set up a monthly report to be sent to multiple stakeholders and include specific inventory metrics.

Given the user selects a monthly schedule, when they choose the metrics to include in the report and input multiple email addresses for recipients, then the system should successfully save the reporting preferences and confirm the setup with a summary of the selected options.

Chaos ensues when a user tries to set a report frequency that doesn't exist, like every two days.

Given the user is on the Scheduled Reporting setup, when they attempt to select 'every two days' as a frequency, then the system should prompt an error message indicating that the frequency is invalid and only allow daily, weekly, and monthly options.

User checks to ensure that all scheduled reports are being generated and distributed as expected.

Given the user navigates to the Scheduled Reports overview, when they review the list of scheduled reports, then all reports should be listed with the correct frequency and status (active or inactive), and the system should indicate the last time each report was successfully sent.

User needs to ensure reports contain accurate inventory data that reflects real-time updates.

Given a report is scheduled to generate, when it is sent out at the scheduled time, then all data within the report should reflect the inventory status at the moment of generation without discrepancies in stock levels or item details.

Export Options for Reports

User Story: As an analyst, I want to export inventory reports in multiple formats so that I can share them with my team and stakeholders in a way that best suits their needs.
Description: The Export Options for Reports requirement enables users to export customizable reports in various formats (such as PDF, Excel, and CSV). This feature ensures that users can share reports easily with stakeholders who may require different formats for analysis or presentations. It increases accessibility and supports diverse use cases related to inventory data reporting.
Acceptance Criteria: User exports a customizable inventory report in PDF format to share it with their team during a weekly review meeting.

Given the user has created a customizable report, when they select the PDF export option, then the system should generate a PDF file of the report and prompt the user to download it without errors.

A user needs to prepare a financial presentation and requires the inventory data in an Excel format to manipulate it further.

Given the user has created a customizable report, when they choose the Excel export option, then the system should successfully generate an Excel file of the report that retains all formatting and data integrity.

The user needs to quickly share a CSV report with a third-party analytics tool for real-time data analysis.

Given the customizable report is ready, when the user selects the CSV export option, then the system shall provide a correctly formatted CSV file that can be easily imported into the external analytics tool.

A manager wants to ensure that all exported reports are formatted correctly for review by senior stakeholders.

Given that a report is exported in any format, when the user views the exported file, then the content, layout, and data accuracy of the report must match the on-screen report prior to export.

User attempts to export an empty report and expects a notification regarding the action.

Given the user has selected an empty report for export, when they click on the export button, then the system should display a message stating 'No data available for export.'

A user intends to export multiple reports at once to save time during batch reporting.

Given multiple reports are selected for export, when the user clicks the export button, then the system should process each report individually and provide the respective downloadable links for each format chosen without freezing or crashing.

The user wants to ensure that exporting a report is quick and does not take excessive time or resources.

Given the user selects a report to export, when the report is being processed, then the system should complete the export within a predetermined limit of 5 seconds for standard reports without degrading performance.

Access Control for Report Templates

User Story: As an administrator, I want to set access permissions for report templates so that I can protect sensitive data and maintain control over the reporting process.
Description: The Access Control for Report Templates requirement allows administrators to set permissions regarding who can access, modify, or create report templates. This ensures that sensitive business data is protected and that only authorized users can make changes to the templates, fostering enhanced security and control within the reporting process.
Acceptance Criteria: As an administrator, I want to define access levels for different users regarding the creation and modification of report templates in order to secure sensitive business data.

Given that I am logged in as an administrator, when I set specific user roles for report template access, then only users with the appropriate roles can create or modify the templates.

As a user with restricted access, I want to ensure I cannot access report templates that require higher privileges than I possess, to maintain data security.

Given that I am logged in as a user with restricted access, when I attempt to view or edit a report template that requires higher privileges, then I should receive an access denied message.

As an administrator, I want to be able to audit who accessed or modified report templates, to ensure compliance and track changes.

Given that I am logged in as an administrator, when I view the audit log for report templates, then I should see a detailed list of who accessed or modified each template, along with timestamps.

As an administrator, I want to quickly reset user permissions for accessing report templates, in case of departmental changes or security breaches.

Given that I am logged in as an administrator, when I select a user and choose to reset their permissions, then their access rights for report templates should be set to the default configuration immediately.

As a user, I want to receive a notification when my access to a report template is modified, ensuring I am aware of any changes to my permissions.

Given that I am a user whose access rights have been modified, when the change occurs, then I should receive an email notification confirming the update to my permissions.

Role-Based Access Control

Role-Based Access Control restricts or grants access to inventory reports based on user roles within an organization. This enhances security and ensures that sensitive information is shared only with the appropriate personnel, promoting a safe and efficient collaborative environment.

Requirements

User Role Management

User Story: As an administrator, I want to manage user roles so that I can control access to sensitive inventory reports based on the user's responsibilities in the organization.
Description: The User Role Management requirement involves creating a user-friendly interface that allows administrators to define, edit, and delete user roles within InvenSage. Each role will have specific permissions for accessing various levels of inventory reports, ensuring that sensitive data is protected while allowing necessary access for team collaboration. This feature will include options for role hierarchies and the ability to assign multiple roles to users, allowing for flexibility in access control. The implementation of this requirement is essential to enhance security, streamline user management, and improve overall operational efficiency within the platform, leading to better data protection and user accountability.
Acceptance Criteria: Administrators need to create a new user role for the sales team to access certain inventory reports that are crucial for their performance without exposing sensitive financial data.

Given the administrator is logged into the InvenSage platform, when they navigate to the User Role Management interface and create a new role with specific permissions for the sales team, then the new role should be successfully added to the database and visible in the user roles list.

An administrator wants to modify an existing user role to restrict access to certain confidential inventory reports after reassessing the organization's data security needs.<br>

Given the administrator is logged into the platform, when they edit an existing user role and save the changes, then the modified permissions should take effect immediately without any delay or error messages.

The admin needs to delete a user role that is no longer applicable due to organizational changes and wants to ensure that the deletion process is simple and efficient.

Given the administrator is on the User Role Management page, when they select a user role to delete and confirm the action, then the user role should be removed from the system and should not appear in the user roles list anymore.

An administrator wants to assign multiple roles to a user to give them access to various inventory reports relevant to their responsibilities.

Given that an administrator is currently on a user profile page, when they assign multiple roles to the user and save, then the user should have access to all reports associated with each assigned role without conflict.

The organization needs to establish a role hierarchy to manage permissions more effectively, ensuring that higher-level roles automatically inherit permissions from lower-level ones.

Given that the administrator is setting up role hierarchies, when they save a new role with an existing role as its parent, then the new role should inherit all permissions from the parent role, and this should be reflected in the permissions overview.

An existing user role is required to access specific inventory management reports, and the administrator wants to review all permissions before finalizing the user role settings.

Given that an administrator is viewing a role's permissions in the User Role Management interface, when they review the permissions list, then all permissions associated with that user role should be displayed accurately without omissions or errors.

The organization wants to ensure that auditing capabilities are in place to track changes made to user roles over time for compliance and security purposes.

Given that the administrator has made changes to a user role, when they consult the audit log, then the log should accurately reflect all changes made, including the user who made the changes, the date, and the specifics of the permissions that were altered.

Audit Trail for Access Control

User Story: As a compliance officer, I want an audit trail of who accessed inventory reports so that I can monitor for unauthorized access and ensure compliance with data protection regulations.
Description: The Audit Trail for Access Control requirement mandates implementing a robust logging system that records all access attempts to sensitive inventory reports, including successful logins, failed attempts, and changes made to user roles. This logging should detail who accessed what data, when, and any modifications made to access permissions. The implementation of this requirement is crucial for maintaining transparency within the system, enhancing security measures, and providing the necessary data for compliance reporting. By integrating this capability, InvenSage will provide organizations with a layer of accountability and the ability to monitor unauthorized access attempts effectively, thereby bolstering trust in the platform's security features.
Acceptance Criteria: Successful User Access Attempt Logging.

Given a user with valid credentials, when they access a sensitive inventory report, then a log entry should be created indicating the user's ID, the report accessed, and the timestamp of the access.

Failed User Access Attempt Logging.

Given a user with invalid credentials, when they attempt to access a sensitive inventory report, then a log entry should be created indicating the user's ID, the report they attempted to access, the timestamp of the access attempt, and the reason for failure (e.g. invalid password).

User Role Modification Logging.

Given an authorized administrator, when they modify a user's role in the system, then a log entry should be created documenting the administrator's ID, the affected user's ID, the previous role, the new role, and the timestamp of the modification.

Access Log Report Generation.

Given an administrator, when they request a report of all access attempts to sensitive inventory reports within a specified date range, then the system should generate a report that includes all successful and failed access attempts with corresponding user IDs and timestamps.

Audit Trail Data Retention Policy.

Given the audit trail logs, when a user accesses the audit trail data, then the logs should only include records from the past 12 months, conforming to the organization's data retention policy.

Unauthorized Access Alerting.

Given multiple failed access attempts from the same user ID within a short period, when an administrator reviews the alerts, then they should see a notification indicating a potential unauthorized access attempt.

User Access Permission Change Logging.

Given a change in user permissions for a sensitive inventory report, when the change is made, then the system should log who made the change, what permissions changed, and when it occurred.

Customizable Permission Sets

User Story: As a department manager, I want customizable permission sets so that I can ensure my team has the right level of access to perform their duties without compromising sensitive information.
Description: The Customizable Permission Sets requirement involves creating a system that allows administrators to define granular permissions for various features of InvenSage. Administrators should be able to combine different permissions to create custom roles that cater to the unique needs of their organization. This feature enhances flexibility in user management, ensuring that employees receive only the access they need to perform their jobs efficiently. The implementation of this requirement will empower organizations to tailor user roles according to operational requirements, thereby reducing the risk of data exposure and improving overall workflow efficiency.
Acceptance Criteria: Admin is tasked with creating a new user role for the sales team, which includes access to inventory reports and reorder capabilities but excludes financial data access.

Given that the admin accesses the role management interface, when they select permissions for the new sales role, then they should be able to customize permissions to include 'view inventory reports' and 'manage reorder processes', while excluding 'view financial data'.

An administrator wants to modify an existing role to update permissions due to changes in team responsibilities.

Given that the admin selects an existing role, when they change permissions and save the modifications, then the system should reflect these changes immediately and notify relevant users of their new access rights.

An employee tries to access a restricted inventory report using a user role with limited access permissions.

Given that the employee logs in with restricted permissions, when they attempt to access the restricted inventory report, then the system should deny access and present a message indicating insufficient permissions.

The admin envisions a new role that combines permissions from different pre-existing roles to meet a unique operational need.

Given that the admin uses the role creation tool, when they combine permissions from multiple roles and save the new role, then the role should be successfully created with all selected permissions active.

An organization undergoes an internal review, and the administrator needs to generate a report on current user roles and their permissions.

Given that the admin selects the reporting feature, when they request a permissions report, then the system should generate a comprehensive report listing all user roles along with their assigned permissions.

A newly assigned user must receive their initial permissions as defined by their role upon account creation.

Given that a new user account is created, when the user logs into InvenSage for the first time, then they should automatically receive the permissions associated with their designated role without any manual intervention from the admin.

The admin wants to ensure that only users with specific roles can initiate reorder processes to prevent unauthorized stock adjustments.

Given that a user attempts to initiate a reorder process, when their role does not include the required permissions, then the system should prevent the action and display an error message stating the reason for the denial.

Role-Based Notification System

User Story: As a user, I want to receive notifications related to my role so that I can stay informed and act swiftly on important inventory matters.
Description: The Role-Based Notification System requirement introduces a feature that sends alerts and notifications based on user roles within the platform. For example, inventory updates, reorder alerts, and access logs should be sent to relevant users according to their responsibilities. This feature improves communication among team members, ensuring that critical information is relayed promptly to the right people. The implementation of this system enhances operational efficiency and allows for timely decision-making, which is crucial in inventory management scenarios where quick action may be required.
Acceptance Criteria: User role is defined as 'Warehouse Manager' in the InvenSage platform.

Given a Warehouse Manager is assigned, when the inventory level falls below the defined threshold, then the system should automatically send a reorder alert to the Warehouse Manager's email.

User role is defined as 'Sales Associate' in the InvenSage platform.

Given a Sales Associate role, when a new product is added to the inventory, then the system should notify the Sales Associate of inventory changes via the application dashboard and email.

User role is defined as 'Admin' in the InvenSage platform.

Given an Admin user, when there is an unauthorized access attempt detected, then the system should send an immediate access alert notification to the Admin's email and within the application.

User role is defined as 'Inventory Analyst' in the InvenSage platform.

Given an Inventory Analyst role, when a weekly inventory report is generated, then the system should automatically email the report to the Inventory Analyst and notify them through the app.

User role is defined as 'Operations Manager' in the InvenSage platform.

Given an Operations Manager role, when an inventory stockout occurs, then the system should notify the Operations Manager through both SMS and email.

User role is defined as 'Finance Officer' in the InvenSage platform.

Given a Finance Officer role, when inventory valuation changes by more than 10%, then the system should send a notification to the Finance Officer regarding the valuation change via email.

User role is defined as 'User' with multiple assigned roles in the InvenSage platform.

Given a User with multiple roles, when an inventory issue arises that pertains to all assigned roles, then the system should notify all relevant role holders via email and within the application.

Role-Specific User Training Materials

User Story: As a new user, I want role-specific training materials so that I can learn how to use InvenSage efficiently according to my job responsibilities.
Description: The Role-Specific User Training Materials requirement focuses on creating targeted training resources tailored to the various roles defined within InvenSage. This includes user manuals, video tutorials, and quick reference guides specific to the functionalities relevant to each role. This approach ensures that users receive training that aligns with their responsibilities, enabling them to utilize the platform effectively and efficiently. By providing tailored training, this requirement aims to reduce onboarding time and improve user proficiency, leading to a better user experience and greater adoption of the platform's features.
Acceptance Criteria: User Training for Inventory Managers

Given an inventory manager accesses the training material section, when they select the 'Inventory Management' role, then they should be able to view user manuals, video tutorials, and quick reference guides specific to inventory management.

User Training for Sales Associates

Given a sales associate accesses the training material section, when they choose the 'Sales Associate' role, then they should be provided with training resources related to inventory lookup and order processing functionalities.

User Training for Administrators

Given an administrator accesses the training material section, when they click on the 'Administrator' role, then they should see comprehensive materials covering user management, access control, and reporting features.

User Feedback on Training Materials

Given users complete their designated training, when they provide feedback on the training materials, then at least 80% of the feedback should indicate that the materials were relevant and helpful to their roles.

Training Material Accessibility

Given any user role within the organization, when they visit the training material section, then all training resources should be accessible on various devices including desktops, tablets, and smartphones without loss of functionality or quality.

Completion Tracking for Training Materials

Given a user completes their training materials, when they check their profile, then their completion status should reflect an accurate percentage of the training resources accessed and completed.

Comments and Annotations

Comments and Annotations allow users to leave notes and feedback directly on inventory reports, fostering discussion and collaboration. This feature promotes an ongoing dialogue among teams, ensuring that all insights and concerns are addressed in the decision-making process.

Requirements

Real-time Commenting

User Story: As an inventory manager, I want to leave comments on inventory reports so that my team can collaboratively discuss potential issues and insights related to stock levels.
Description: The Real-time Commenting feature enables users to leave and view comments on inventory reports instantly. This functionality allows for immediate collaboration and feedback among team members, ensuring that all stakeholders can contribute insights or raise concerns directly related to specific reports. The benefit of this feature is that it streamlines communication, helps prevent misalignments in decision-making, and fosters a more engaged team by promoting an ongoing dialogue on inventory management. This feature will be seamlessly integrated into existing inventory reports within InvenSage, ensuring ease of use and accessibility.
Acceptance Criteria: User adds a comment to an inventory report while reviewing stock levels during a team meeting.

Given the user has access to an inventory report, When the user clicks on the 'Add Comment' button and enters their text, Then the comment should be immediately visible to all team members with access to that report.

A team member views a report with existing comments from others to gather insights before making a stock purchase decision.

Given the inventory report contains comments, When the team member opens the report, Then all previous comments should be displayed in chronological order, allowing for easy review.

A user edits a comment they previously posted to clarify their feedback on an inventory report.

Given the user has previously posted a comment, When the user selects the option to edit their comment and submits the changes, Then the updated comment should replace the old comment with a timestamp indicating the time of the edit.

A user deletes an inappropriate comment on an inventory report to maintain professionalism and relevance in discussions.

Given the user has permission to delete comments, When the user selects a comment and chooses to delete it, Then the comment should be permanently removed from the report and not visible to other users.

A user receives a notification when another team member comments on a report they are following.

Given the user is following a specific inventory report, When another team member leaves a comment on that report, Then the user should receive a real-time notification of the new comment.

A user searches for comments related to a specific inventory item to find relevant feedback.

Given the user utilizes the search function within the inventory report, When the user inputs keyword criteria, Then only those comments that match the keyword criteria should be displayed alongside their respective inventory items.

A user closes the inventory report and later returns to find all comments saved and intact.

Given the user has added comments to an inventory report, When the user closes and reopens the same report, Then all previously added comments should still be visible and accurately displayed.

Tagging System for Comments

User Story: As a team member, I want to be able to tag my comments so that others can quickly identify the nature of my feedback and respond accordingly.
Description: The Tagging System for Comments will allow users to categorize their comments using predefined tags such as 'urgent', 'clarification needed', 'resource request', etc. This organization method will facilitate quicker searches and help team members prioritize comments according to themes or action items. By implementing this feature, users will benefit from increased efficiency in addressing comments, as they can sort and filter discussions based on urgency or relevance, contributing to better decision-making and follow-ups in the inventory management process.
Acceptance Criteria: User categorizes comments on an inventory report to highlight critical feedback during a team meeting.

Given the user is viewing an inventory report, when they add a comment and select a predefined tag from the tagging system, then the comment should appear with the selected tag, clearly indicating its category.

A team member searches for comments related to urgent inventory issues from the tagging system.

Given that the user wants to filter comments by a specific tag, when they apply the 'urgent' filter in the comments section, then only comments with the 'urgent' tag should be displayed on the screen.

A user adds a comment requesting additional resources for a particular product and assigns the appropriate tag.

Given the user has permission to add comments, when they enter their comment and select the 'resource request' tag, then the comment must be saved correctly and visible to other users with the 'resource request' tag displayed next to it.

Users collaborate by tagging their comments to group feedback on inventory performance.

Given multiple users add comments on the same inventory report, when tags are assigned to each comment, then users should be able to see all comments grouped by tag on the comments dashboard.

A user tries to add a comment without selecting a tag in the tagging system.

Given the user attempts to submit a comment without a tag, when they save the comment, then a prompt notification should inform them that selecting a tag is required, and the comment should not be saved until a tag is selected.

Users generate a report summarizing comments categorized by tags for analysis.

Given that comments have been added and tagged over a certain period, when the user generates a summary report, then the report should include totals for each tag and display all related comments grouped accordingly.

Comment History Log

User Story: As a project manager, I want to access the comment history for inventory reports so that I can review past feedback and ensure accountability in our discussions.
Description: The Comment History Log feature will track all comments made on inventory reports over time, providing a complete history of discussions. This logged history will include timestamps, author names, and edit history. The functionality serves as an essential resource for teams to refer back to past discussions and decisions made regarding inventory management. This feature will enhance accountability and transparency in team communications while serving as a reference point to avoid repetitive discussions or mistakes in future strategy adjustments.
Acceptance Criteria: Users can access the Comment History Log on an inventory report page to view all past comments and annotations made by team members.

Given a user is on the inventory report page, when they click on the 'Comment History Log' button, then they should see a chronological list of all comments made on the report, including timestamps and author names.

The Comment History Log must display the edit history of comments, showing a clear record of any changes made to previous comments.

Given a user views a specific comment in the Comment History Log, when they click on the 'View Edit History' link of that comment, then they should see a detailed edit history showing all modifications made to that comment along with timestamps.

Users should be notified when new comments are added to the Comment History Log for reports they have access to, to ensure they stay updated.

Given a user with access to an inventory report, when a new comment is added to the Comment History Log, then the user should receive a notification alerting them of the new comment addition via the preferred notification method.

Team members can filter the Comment History Log to view comments by specific authors or date ranges, facilitating better discussions.

Given a user is viewing the Comment History Log, when they apply filters for author name or date range, then the displayed comments should reflect the filtered criteria, showing only relevant comments.

The Comment History Log should allow users to search for specific keywords within comments to quickly find relevant feedback.

Given a user is on the Comment History Log page, when they input a keyword into the search bar and click 'Search', then the system should display only those comments that contain the entered keyword, ensuring quick retrieval of information.

Users should be able to delete their comments from the Comment History Log to maintain its relevance and accuracy.

Given a user is viewing the Comment History Log, when they click the 'Delete' option next to their comment and confirm the action, then the comment should be successfully removed from the log and no longer visible to other users.

The Comment History Log should maintain data security by ensuring that only authorized users can access or view the log's contents.

Given a user who is not authorized to view the Comment History Log, when they attempt to access the log, then they should receive an access denied message and not be able to view any comments.

Notifications for New Comments

User Story: As a team member, I want to receive notifications for new comments on reports I'm following so that I can stay updated and respond to feedback promptly.
Description: The Notifications for New Comments feature will alert users when a new comment is added to any inventory report they are following. This can be done through email notifications or in-app alerts, ensuring that users stay informed about ongoing discussions without needing to actively check reports constantly. By implementing this functionality, we promote proactive engagement and ensure that team members can respond in a timely manner to issues and feedback, enhancing the collaborative environment.
Acceptance Criteria: User receives notifications for new comments on inventory reports they are following when logged into the InvenSage application.

Given a user is logged into the InvenSage application, when a new comment is added to an inventory report they are following, then the user sees an in-app notification indicating a new comment and can click to view it.

User receives email notifications for new comments on inventory reports they are following whenever they are not logged in to the application.

Given a user has enabled email notifications for comments, when a new comment is added to an inventory report they are following while they are logged out, then the user receives an email containing the details of the new comment.

User can manage their notification preferences for new comments within the application settings.

Given a user accesses the notification settings in the InvenSage application, when they opt to toggle on/off email and in-app notifications for comments, then their preferences should be saved and reflected in future notifications.

Users can see all new comments and their associated notifications in a central dashboard for tracking discussions.

Given a user accesses the comments dashboard in InvenSage, when there are new comments, then the user should see an updated list of notifications for all comments with timestamps and report associations displayed clearly.

Users receive a summary of comments made during the week in a summary email every Friday.

Given a user has opted into weekly summaries, when it is Friday, then the user receives an email summarizing all new comments added during the week, including links to the respective reports.

Users can receive notifications for all comments made on inventory reports they own, regardless of who is following it.

Given a user owns an inventory report, when any new comment is added to that report, then the user should receive a notification alerting them to the new comment regardless of their personal following choices.

Comment Editing Capabilities

User Story: As a contributor, I want to edit my comments after posting them so that I can correct any mistakes or clarify my initial thoughts for the team.
Description: The Comment Editing Capabilities feature will permit users to edit or delete their comments within a defined time frame after posting. This flexibility empowers users to correct mistakes or update their feedback based on new information, ensuring that discussions remain accurate and relevant. Incorporating this feature not only aids in maintaining clarity but also prevents unnecessary confusion from outdated comments. It will allow for smooth communication flow since users can refine their thoughts after reflection.
Acceptance Criteria: User edits a comment within the designated time frame to correct a previously posted mistake on an inventory report.

Given a user has made a comment on an inventory report, when they attempt to edit the comment within the allowed time frame, then they should be able to successfully modify the content of the comment and save the changes.

User tries to delete their comment on an inventory report after the specified time limit has expired.

Given a user has posted a comment on an inventory report, when the user attempts to delete the comment after the time limit, then they should receive a notification indicating that the comment cannot be deleted due to time restrictions.

User edits a comment and saves changes successfully while receiving immediate feedback on the action taken.

Given the user successfully edits a comment, when they click the save button, then a confirmation message should be displayed indicating that the comment has been updated successfully.

User saves a comment edit and verifies that the changes are accurately reflected in the inventory report.

Given the user has edited and saved their comment on an inventory report, when the user navigates back to the report, then the edited comment should accurately reflect the new changes made.

User attempts to edit multiple comments on an inventory report within the allowed time frame.

Given a user has posted multiple comments on an inventory report, when they attempt to edit more than one comment within the allowed time frame, then all comments should be editable and save successfully after changes are made.

User receives notifications about their own comments being edited or deleted.

Given a user has previously posted comments, when any of their comments are edited or deleted by them, then they should receive a notification confirming the action taken on their comment.

Comment Filtering Options

User Story: As an inventory analyst, I want to filter comments by tags so that I can easily find discussions related to specific concerns or topics.
Description: The Comment Filtering Options feature will provide users with the ability to filter comments on inventory reports based on various criteria such as tags, authors, or date ranges. This capability will help users quickly locate specific discussions amidst potentially large volumes of comments, significantly enhancing the efficiency of communication. By making it easier to navigate through discussions, users can quickly find relevant information, focus on crucial topics, and manage their responses effectively, which contributes to making informed inventory decisions.
Acceptance Criteria: Filtering comments by tags to find specific discussions regarding inventory restocks.

Given that I am viewing the inventory report, when I select a specific tag from the filter options, then only the comments associated with that tag should be displayed on the report.

Filtering comments by author to review feedback from a specific team member.

Given that I am on the comments section of the inventory report, when I choose an author from the filter dropdown, then the report should display only the comments made by that author.

Filtering comments by date range to focus on recent feedback and discussions.

Given that I have accessed the inventory report, when I set a date range in the filter options, then only comments made within that date range should appear in the comments section.

Combining multiple filters (tags, authors, and date range) to locate a specific comment more efficiently.

Given that I am in the comments section of the inventory report, when I apply filters for tags, author, and date range simultaneously, then the comments displayed should match all the selected criteria.

Accessing the comments and annotations feature from a mobile device to filter comments on-the-go.

Given that I am using InvenSage on a mobile device, when I apply any filter to the comments section, then the filtered results should show accurately on my screen.

Receiving a notification when new comments are added that match my predefined filters.

Given that I have set filters for comments, when a new comment is added that meets those criteria, then I should receive a notification indicating that a new relevant comment is available.

Resetting all filters to view the complete list of comments on the inventory report.

Given that I have applied one or more filters, when I click the 'Reset Filters' button, then all filters should be cleared, displaying all comments without restrictions.

Trend Prediction Alerts

Trend Prediction Alerts notify users about significant changes or patterns in inventory data that require attention. By providing timely alerts, this feature allows teams to proactively address issues, collaborate on strategies, and make data-driven decisions swiftly, enhancing overall responsiveness.

Requirements

Real-time Data Processing

User Story: As an inventory manager, I want to receive real-time alerts when significant changes occur in inventory levels, so that I can address potential issues before they impact operations.
Description: The Real-time Data Processing requirement ensures that the Trend Prediction Alerts feature can continuously analyze incoming inventory data as it is added or updated in the system. This enables immediate detection of patterns and anomalies, leading to prompt alerts for users. The benefit of real-time processing is that teams can respond quickly to changes, reducing the risk of stockouts or overstock situations. Moreover, this functionality enhances user experience by ensuring that alerts are based on the most up-to-date information available, ultimately supporting better inventory management and decision-making.
Acceptance Criteria: User receives alerts for significant inventory increase based on real-time data processing.

Given that an item’s inventory level increases beyond a user-defined threshold, When the inventory update is processed in real-time, Then an alert is generated and sent to the user immediately.

User is alerted for low inventory levels based on real-time data changes.

Given that an item’s inventory level falls below a user-defined minimum threshold, When the inventory update is processed in real-time, Then an alert is generated and sent to the user immediately.

User views a dashboard displaying the latest trend prediction alerts triggered by real-time data processing.

Given that the Trend Prediction Alerts feature processes data, When users access the dashboard, Then they should see all current trend prediction alerts updated in real-time.

Multiple user roles receive alerts for inventory anomalies such as sudden stock fluctuations.

Given that there is a sudden increase or decrease in inventory levels, When the anomaly is detected during real-time processing, Then alerts are sent to all relevant user roles as configured in the system settings.

User receives alerts for restocking recommendations based on real-time demand forecasting.

Given that the demand for an item is projected to exceed current inventory levels, When the real-time data processing identifies this trend, Then an alert is generated recommending restocking, sent to the user immediately.

User can customize the threshold limits for receiving inventory alerts.

Given that the user accesses the alert settings, When they adjust the threshold limits for alerts, Then the system should save these settings and apply them during real-time processing of inventory data.

Customizable Alert Settings

User Story: As a business owner, I want to customize the alert settings for inventory changes, so that I receive only the most relevant notifications without being overwhelmed.
Description: The Customizable Alert Settings requirement allows users to tailor the types and frequency of alerts they receive based on their specific business needs. Users can set thresholds for inventory changes that trigger alerts, choose how they want to be notified (e.g., email, push notification), and determine the frequency of these notifications. This flexibility ensures that users only receive relevant information, preventing alert fatigue and enhancing user engagement. By customizing their alert settings, users can prioritize their focus on the most critical changes, thus improving their overall efficiency in inventory management.
Acceptance Criteria: Custom User Alert Configuration for Inventory Levels

Given that a user is logged into InvenSage, when they access the alert settings, then they should be able to set up a custom alert for inventory levels that triggers when stock falls below a user-defined threshold, and receive notifications via their preferred method.

Frequency Selection for Alerts

Given that a user has set up an inventory alert, when they choose the frequency of notifications, then they should be able to select from options such as Immediately, Daily, or Weekly, and these settings should be saved successfully.

Multiple Notification Channels Setup

Given that a user is in the alert settings, when they select their preferred notification channels, then they should have the option to choose multiple channels (email, SMS, push notifications) and receive alerts accordingly based on their configuration.

Testing Alert Functionality

Given that a user has configured the alert settings, when the inventory level meets the criteria set in the alert configuration, then an alert should be dispatched instantly through the chosen notification method and logged in the user's alert history.

Managing Alert Preferences

Given that a user has set up alerts, when they navigate to the alert management section, then they should be able to edit or delete any existing alerts and save the changes successfully.

Feedback on Alert Customization

Given that a user has customized their alert settings, when they complete the setup, then they should receive a confirmation message summarizing their selected preferences and options to adjust them if needed later.

Viewing Alert History

Given that a user has received alerts, when they access the alert history page, then they should be able to view all past alerts triggered, alongside timestamps and summary of the alert conditions.

Collaborative Notifications

User Story: As a team leader, I want relevant team members to be notified of inventory alerts, so that we can collaboratively strategize and respond to issues as a team.
Description: The Collaborative Notifications requirement enables the Trend Prediction Alerts feature to facilitate team collaboration by allowing multiple users to be tagged or notified concerning specific alerts. This functionality ensures that all relevant stakeholders can participate in discussions, strategize on action plans, and collectively address the identified inventory issues. By promoting collaboration, this feature enhances communication across departments, minimizes response times to urgent matters, and fosters a more proactive approach to inventory management as teams work together towards common goals.
Acceptance Criteria: User receives a notification for a trend prediction alert related to stock levels before the scheduled team meeting, allowing them to prepare data and insights to share with colleagues.

Given a stock level trend prediction is detected, when a notification is sent, then all relevant users tagged in the alert must receive the notification via their preferred communication channel (email, SMS, in-app).

Multiple users are tagged in a collaborative notification regarding a sudden drop in sales trends, facilitating immediate discussion and response during the next stand-up meeting.

Given a sudden drop in sales trend is identified, when the alert is issued, then all tagged users must be able to view and comment on the alert within the collaborative platform.

A user wants to ensure all team members are aware of the predictions outlined in a recent alert and checks whether everyone has acknowledged the notification.

Given a notification is issued for a trend prediction alert, when users receive the notification, then the system must track and confirm acknowledgment from all tagged users within 24 hours.

A team initiates a strategy meeting based on a trend prediction alert stating an impending stock shortage to address the issue collaboratively.

Given a collaborative notification is created for a stock shortage alert, when the meeting link is generated in the notification, then users must be able to click through to join the meeting directly from the alert.

After reaching a decision on how to handle a trend prediction alert, the team documents the action taken within the alert thread for future reference and transparency.

Given users collaborate on a trend prediction alert and decide on an action, when the decision is documented, then it must be saved in the alert thread and visible to all involved parties.

A manager wants to review trends and notifications over the past month to assess team response effectiveness and identify areas for improvement.

Given the past month's trend prediction alerts, when the manager accesses the report section, then they must find a comprehensive view of notifications, responses, and actions taken for each alert.

Historical Trend Analysis

User Story: As a data analyst, I want to analyze historical inventory trends from past alerts, so that I can better forecast and plan future inventory needs.
Description: The Historical Trend Analysis requirement involves creating a module within the Trend Prediction Alerts feature that allows users to access and analyze past alerts and trends in inventory data. This capability provides insights into recurring patterns and helps businesses make informed predictions about future inventory needs. Having access to historical data enables users to refine their strategies over time, improving overall inventory accuracy and enhancing the effectiveness of the predictive analytics module. This feature is critical for empowering users to learn from past trends and make data-driven decisions for future inventory management.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the Historical Trend Analysis module to review past inventory alerts identified over the previous quarter.

Given the user has accessed the Historical Trend Analysis module, When they select a specific date range, Then they should see a list of alerts generated within that range, displayed with clear identifiers for each alert.

User analyzes historical data to identify recurring patterns in inventory trends using the Historical Trend Analysis functionality.

Given the user is viewing the historical alerts, When they use the 'Analyze Trends' feature, Then they should receive graphical representations of trends and the ability to filter data by product category.

User reviews the effectiveness of past alerts in influencing inventory management decisions.

Given the user has accessed the Historical Trend Analysis, When they select an alert from the list, Then they should see a summary view detailing actions taken and outcomes resulting from that specific alert.

User collaborates with team members based on insights derived from Historical Trend Analysis data.

Given the Historical Trend Analysis data is being reviewed, When the user shares the insights via the 'Share' feature, Then the selected team members should receive a notification and an email containing the shared data and insights.

User uses the historical trends to make future inventory predictions.

Given the user has completed the analysis of historical data, When they attempt to create a future forecast based on these insights, Then the system should allow them to generate predictions with accuracy metrics displayed for verification.

User provides feedback on the usability of the Historical Trend Analysis feature after utilizing it for a month.

Given the user has been using the Historical Trend Analysis for a month, When they submit their feedback via the designated feedback form, Then the feedback should be recorded in the system for review by the development team.

User-friendly Dashboard Integration

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to see all inventory alerts integrated into the dashboard, so that I can easily monitor and manage inventory issues without leaving the main interface.
Description: The User-friendly Dashboard Integration requirement ensures that the alerts generated by the Trend Prediction Alerts feature are seamlessly integrated into the platform's central dashboard. This integration allows users to view their alerts in one centralized location, providing an intuitive interface for tracking inventory trends and immediate issues. By having alerts readily accessible within the dashboard, users can quickly review and prioritize their responses without navigating away from their primary workspace. This functionality enhances productivity and offers a cohesive user experience, aligning with the overall goal of efficient inventory management.
Acceptance Criteria: Dashboard Integration of Trend Prediction Alerts

Given the user is logged into the InvenSage dashboard, when alerts are generated by the Trend Prediction Alerts feature, then these alerts should be displayed prominently within the dashboard in real-time, allowing users to easily see and react to them.

Prioritization of Alerts by Severity

Given there are multiple alerts generated, when the alerts are displayed on the dashboard, then they should be sorted by severity level to enable users to prioritize their responses effectively.

Clear Visibility of Alert Details

Given the alerts are visible on the dashboard, when a user clicks on an alert, then a detailed view should be presented that includes the alert's specifics, history, and suggested actions.

User Collaboration on Alerts

Given the user views alerts on the dashboard, when they click an 'Action Required' button next to the alert, then users should be prompted to assign the alert to team members for collaborative resolution.

Performance and Load Testing of Alerts

Given a scenario with high alert volume, when the alerts are triggered, then the dashboard should remain responsive and load alerts within 3 seconds without any degradation in performance.

Notification and Alert Customization

Given the user has access to the alert settings, when they navigate to the settings, then they should be able to customize alert notifications, including which alerts to receive and their preferred delivery method.

User Training for Alert Functionality

Given the introduction of Trend Prediction Alerts, when users access the training resources, then they should find thorough documentation and video tutorials illustrating how to use the alert features effectively.

Unified Performance Metrics

Unified Performance Metrics compiles key performance indicators (KPIs) related to inventory management in one comprehensive dashboard view. This feature streamlines reporting and facilitates cross-departmental analysis, enabling teams to track performance consistently and work towards common business goals.

Requirements

Real-time KPI Integration

User Story: As an inventory manager, I want to see real-time KPIs related to our inventory levels and turnover rates so that I can quickly make data-driven decisions to optimize stock levels and reduce wastage.
Description: This requirement enables the real-time integration of key performance indicators (KPIs) related to inventory management into the Unified Performance Metrics dashboard. By aggregating data from various sources, this functionality ensures that users receive timely and accurate information, facilitating informed decision-making. The seamless integration with existing systems will allow for a comprehensive overview of inventory performance metrics such as stock turnover rates, order accuracy, and demand fluctuations, ultimately enhancing operational efficiency and effectiveness in inventory management.
Acceptance Criteria: Integration of Stock Turnover Rate KPI in Real-Time Dashboard.

Given that the user is accessing the Unified Performance Metrics dashboard, when the system aggregates data from the inventory database, then the real-time stock turnover rate KPI should be displayed accurately within 2 seconds of data refresh.

Accuracy of Order Accuracy KPI in Real-Time Dashboard.

Given that the inventory data is updated, when the user checks the Unified Performance Metrics dashboard, then the order accuracy KPI must reflect the most recent data and not exceed an error margin of 5%.

Display of Demand Fluctuations KPI in Real-Time Dashboard.

Given that demand data is collected from various sales channels, when the user opens the Unified Performance Metrics dashboard, then the demand fluctuations KPI should be updated in real-time, showing historical trends for the past month.

Performance Readiness for High Traffic.

Given that multiple users are accessing the Unified Performance Metrics dashboard concurrently, when the system is under high traffic, then it must maintain a response time of under 3 seconds for KPI loading and updates 95% of the time.

User Notification for KPI Updates.

Given that the user is monitoring KPIs in the Unified Performance Metrics dashboard, when there is any significant change in the KPIs, then the system should send a push notification within 1 minute to alert the user.

Cross-Departmental Accessibility of KPIs.

Given that the KPIs are being aggregated in the Unified Performance Metrics dashboard, when different departments access the dashboard, then all key users should have appropriate permission levels to view essential KPIs relevant to their roles without access errors.

Data Source Aggregation for KPI Integrity.

Given that the system is designed to integrate KPIs from multiple data sources, when a new data source is added, then the integration process must be completed without data loss and should be verifiable by reconciliation with original data within a 10-minute window.

Customizable Dashboard Views

User Story: As a department head, I want to customize my dashboard view to show the most relevant KPIs for my team, so that we can focus on our specific targets and improve our performance tracking.
Description: This requirement allows users to create customizable views within the Unified Performance Metrics dashboard. Users can select which KPIs to display, set the layout according to their preferences, and save multiple views for different needs or reporting purposes. This flexibility is crucial as it enables users to focus on the most relevant performance indicators for their specific roles or departments, improving user engagement and the effectiveness of data analysis.
Acceptance Criteria: User customizes their dashboard view to track sales and inventory metrics relevant to their department.

Given a user is logged into InvenSage, when they access the Unified Performance Metrics dashboard, then they can select which KPIs to display and save their customized dashboard layout for future use.

User saves multiple dashboard views for different reporting needs.

Given a user has created a customized dashboard view, when they save this view under a specific name, then it should be retrievable later under the saved views section.

User changes the layout of the dashboard by rearranging KPI tiles.

Given a user is viewing their customized dashboard, when they drag and drop KPI tiles to rearrange them, then the new layout should be automatically saved without requiring additional confirmation.

User filters KPIs displayed on their dashboard based on specific date ranges.

Given a user is viewing their customized dashboard, when they apply a date range filter to the displayed KPIs, then only the metrics relevant to that date range should be displayed.

User can reset their dashboard view to the default settings.

Given a user is viewing a customized dashboard, when they choose to reset to default settings, then the dashboard should revert to its original state with the default KPIs displayed.

User engages with a help tool to learn about customizing dashboard views.

Given a user is on the dashboard, when they click on the help icon, then they should be presented with a guide on how to customize their dashboard views effectively.

Cross-Departmental Collaboration Tools

User Story: As a team member, I want to collaborate on KPI reports with other departments so that we can align our inventory strategies and improve overall business performance.
Description: Implement tools within the Unified Performance Metrics feature that facilitate cross-departmental collaboration based on the analyzed KPIs. This includes functionalities such as shared reports, commenting on metrics, and the ability to tag team members for specific actions. By fostering an environment of collaboration, teams can align on performance goals and collectively work towards optimizing inventory management processes across departments, leading to enhanced communication and teamwork in achieving business objectives.
Acceptance Criteria: As a warehouse manager, I need to generate a shared report on inventory levels so that my team can review stock status before the monthly meeting.

Given that I have accessed the Unified Performance Metrics dashboard, when I select 'Generate Report', then a summary report of key inventory levels should be created and shared with all tagged team members.

As a sales representative, I want to comment on specific performance metrics to clarify issues related to stock shortages.

Given that I am viewing the Unified Performance Metrics dashboard, when I click on a performance metric and enter a comment, then the comment should be saved and visible to all team members with access to the report.

As a product manager, I want to tag team members in the dashboard to ensure the right people are notified about critical inventory issues.

Given that I am viewing the Unified Performance Metrics dashboard, when I tag a team member in a performance metric section, then that team member should receive a notification regarding the tag and a link to the relevant metric.

As an operations director, I want to track the response time of team members to comments made on shared performance metrics.

Given that I have access to the comments section of a performance metric, when a comment is made, then the timestamp of the comment should be logged and visible to track response times by tagged individuals.

As an executive, I want to review a consolidated view of all reported metrics and comments to assess overall team collaboration.

Given that I am on the Unified Performance Metrics dashboard, when I select the 'View All Comments' option, then I should see a complete list of comments along with the respective metrics they pertain to, organized by timestamp.

As a logistics coordinator, I want to be able to filter shared reports by department to focus on relevant metrics.

Given that I am on the Unified Performance Metrics dashboard, when I apply the filter for my department, then the dashboard should only display metrics and reports relevant to that department.

Automated Reporting Generation

User Story: As a business analyst, I want to receive automated reports on performance metrics so that I can save time and ensure that all stakeholders are informed without manual intervention.
Description: This requirement enables the automated generation of reports based on the Unified Performance Metrics dashboard. Users will be able to set schedules for report creation, automatically receiving reports via email or within the platform. The automated reporting capability reduces manual effort and ensures that stakeholders consistently receive important updates on performance metrics, which aids in timely decision-making and helps in maintaining accountability within the organization.
Acceptance Criteria: User schedules a weekly automated report for inventory metrics to be sent via email every Monday morning.

Given that the user has set up the report schedule, when the designated day and time arrive, then the system should automatically generate and send the report to the user's registered email address without errors.

User customizes a monthly report that includes specific KPIs such as stock levels, sales rates, and reorder alerts.

Given that the user has selected specific KPIs for the report, when the monthly scheduled report is generated, then the report must accurately reflect the selected KPIs with the correct data for the month.

Multiple users from different departments request reports at different intervals (daily, weekly, monthly) based on their needs.

Given that multiple users have different report schedules set up, when the scheduled time arrives for any report, then each report should be generated and delivered to each user according to their specified schedule without delay.

User accesses a report that is generated and stored within the InvenSage platform to review performance metrics.

Given that a report has been generated and stored, when the user navigates to the reporting section of the platform, then the user must see the latest report available for viewing with correct and up-to-date information.

The system notifies users about upcoming scheduled reports to ensure they remain informed.

Given that the user has scheduled reports, when the time for a report is approaching, then the system should send a notification to the user reminding them of the scheduled report.

Users need the ability to modify or cancel scheduled reports easily within the platform.

Given that a user wants to change or cancel a report schedule, when the user accesses the report settings and makes adjustments, then the system must update or cancel the schedule accordingly and reflect the changes immediately.

The automated reports include a summary section highlighting key insights and recommendations based on the performance data.

Given that a report has been generated, when the user opens the report, then the summary section should include a clear overview of key insights and actionable recommendations derived from the reported metrics.

Predictive Analytics Integration

User Story: As an inventory planner, I want to use predictive analytics to forecast future inventory needs so that I can better prepare for fluctuations and maintain optimal stock levels.
Description: This requirement integrates predictive analytics capabilities into the Unified Performance Metrics, allowing users to forecast inventory needs based on historical data and trends. By analyzing past performance, this feature will enable users to proactively manage inventory levels, preventing stockouts and overstock situations. This functionality will significantly enhance the platform’s ability to optimize inventory management through informed forecasting.
Acceptance Criteria: User Accessing Predictive Analytics Dashboard for Inventory Forecasting

Given the user has logged into InvenSage, when the user navigates to the Unified Performance Metrics dashboard, then they should see a dedicated section for Predictive Analytics with current inventory forecasts displayed for the next 30 days.

User Interpreting Forecast Data for Inventory Management

Given the user views the Predictive Analytics section, when they hover over any forecast data point, then a tooltip displaying historical trends and relevant KPIs should appear, allowing for informed decision-making.

User Adjusting Forecast Parameters for Custom Insights

Given the user is on the Predictive Analytics dashboard, when they click on the 'Adjust Parameters' button, then they should be able to input custom parameters such as time frame and input variables to tailor the forecast results to their needs.

System Generating Notifications for Stock Management

Given the Predictive Analytics integration is active, when a forecast indicates a potential stockout or overstock situation, then the system should automatically send notifications to the user through email and dashboard alerts.

User Viewing Forecast Accuracy Metrics

Given the user accesses the Predictive Analytics section, when they scroll to the bottom of the dashboard, then they should see a display of forecast accuracy metrics that evaluate the system’s performance in predicting inventory needs for the past quarter.

User Exporting Forecast Reports for External Analysis

Given the user has accessed the Predictive Analytics dashboard, when they click on the 'Export' button, then they should be able to download a comprehensive report in CSV format that includes inventory forecasts, historical data, and accuracy metrics.

User Collaborating on Forecast Insights with Team Members

Given the user is viewing the Predictive Analytics data, when they click on the 'Share' button, then they should be able to send an invitation to team members to view the dashboard or collaborate on insights in real time.

Virtual Shelf Management

Virtual Shelf Management allows users to position their inventory within a simulated store layout using AR technology. Users can visualize how products fit within shelves and aisles, optimizing space utilization and enhancing customer engagement through better product placement.

Requirements

AR Product Visualization

User Story: As a store manager, I want to visualize how products are placed on shelves in a virtual store so that I can make informed decisions about product placement and optimize customer experience.
Description: The AR Product Visualization requirement enables users to utilize augmented reality technology to superimpose digital representations of their inventory onto a simulated store layout. This feature should provide an interactive interface where users can navigate through their virtual store, allowing them to see how their products fit into different shelf spaces and aisles. This functionality will enhance decision-making by providing visual context on product placement, ensuring that retailers can optimize space utilization for maximum customer engagement and product visibility. Additionally, the integration of this requirement with existing inventory data will allow real-time updates, ensuring accuracy and relevancy in the simulations.
Acceptance Criteria: User navigates through the virtual store layout using AR technology to visualize the placement of products in a shelf.

Given the user has access to the AR Product Visualization feature, when the user selects a product, then the product's digital representation is accurately displayed on the selected shelf within the virtual store layout.

User utilizes real-time inventory data to reflect current stock levels in the AR visualization.

Given the user is connected to the inventory management system, when the AR Product Visualization feature is activated, then all product representations must reflect the latest stock levels without significant lag or error.

User tests different product placements within the virtual store environment to optimize shelf space.

Given the user is in the virtual store simulation, when the user drags and drops products into different locations, then the product placement updates immediately and allows for user-defined constraints on space utilization.

User reviews visual placement options for seasonal promotions using the AR Product Visualization.

Given the user is planning for a seasonal promotion, when the user applies filters for seasonal products, then only relevant products should be displayed in the AR visualization with proper highlighting of promotional items.

User seeks to share virtual store layouts with team members for collaborative decision-making.

Given the user has completed an AR store layout, when the user selects the option to share, then a shareable link or code is generated to allow other users to view the layout in their AR applications without data loss.

User adjusts product sizes to visualize potential changes in inventory display strategy.

Given the user is using the AR Product Visualization, when the user inputs new dimensions for a product, then the AR representation resizes accurately and visually demonstrates the impact on overall shelf space.

Dynamic Shelf Adjustment

User Story: As a retailer, I want to dynamically adjust the shelf layout in real-time so that I can respond to changing inventory and sales data effectively.
Description: Dynamic Shelf Adjustment allows users to modify the layout of their virtual shelves in real-time based on incoming inventory and sales data. This requirement should include features for drag-and-drop manipulation of products, automatic reallocation of products based on sales trends, and recommended placements based on customer behavior analytics. By ensuring dynamic adjustments, users can react swiftly to inventory changes, seasonal demand, and promotional strategies, leading to enhanced operational efficiency and better customer engagement.
Acceptance Criteria: User can adjust product placements on the virtual shelf in real-time as new inventory arrives during peak hours.

Given the user is on the Virtual Shelf Management interface, when they drag and drop products onto the virtual shelves, then the product placements should be updated in real-time without any lag.

User receives automatic suggestions for product placements based on past sales trends as they update their virtual shelves.

Given the user has accessed the Dynamic Shelf Adjustment feature, when they begin to modify the shelf layout, then the system should generate recommended placements based on historical sales data within 5 seconds.

User interacts with a notification system that alerts them to significant changes in inventory levels that require immediate shelf adjustments.

Given the user has set threshold levels for inventory alerts, when the inventory of a product falls below the defined threshold, then a notification should be triggered system-wide instantly, notifying the user to adjust their virtual shelf accordingly.

User wants to visualize the impact of product placement changes on projected sales.

Given the user has made adjustments to the virtual shelves, when they view the predicted sales analytics dashboard, then the projected sales should reflect these changes, updating within 10 seconds to show real-time adjustments.

User removes an out-of-stock item from the virtual shelf to make space for new arrivals.

Given the user selects an out-of-stock product and chooses the option to remove it from the virtual shelf, when they confirm the removal, then the item should disappear from the virtual display immediately, allowing for new product additions.

User is analyzing customer behavior analytics to improve product placements on the shelves.

Given the user accesses the customer behavior analytics report, when reviewing the data, then they should see clear insights and recommendations for product placements based on customer engagement metrics, updated in real-time.

Customer Engagement Analytics

User Story: As a business owner, I want to access analytics on how customers engage with my virtual shelves so that I can make data-driven decisions to enhance product visibility and boost sales.
Description: Customer Engagement Analytics will provide insights into how customers interact with the virtual shelves created through the AR tool. This requirement includes tracking customer interactions, such as dwell time on products, click-through rates on virtual displays, and heatmaps indicating the most engaged areas of the virtual store. The insights generated from this analytics tool will help retailers understand consumer preferences and optimize their shelf layouts accordingly, ensuring the products that attract the most attention are showcased effectively.
Acceptance Criteria: Customer engages with virtual shelves during a product scouting session using the AR tool.

Given the customer is using the AR tool,When they interact with a virtual product display,Then the system must record the dwell time, click-through rate, and generate a heatmap for that area of the virtual store.

Retail staff reviews customer engagement analytics after a promotional event.

Given the promotional event has concluded,When the retail staff accesses the engagement analytics tool,Then it should display metrics including total interactions, top products by dwell time, and areas with the highest engagement levels.

A retailer utilizes customer engagement data for optimizing product placement within the virtual shelf layout.

Given the retailer has accessed the customer engagement analytics,When they adjust the product placement based on insights from the analytics,Then the virtual shelf layout should reflect the new product positions, and the updated analytics should be accessible for further assessment.

Users experience customer engagement analytics dashboard to inform inventory decisions.

Given a user is logged into the InvenSage platform,When they navigate to the customer engagement analytics dashboard,Then it should show real-time insights and interactive graphs regarding customer interactions and product engagement.

Management evaluates the effectiveness of virtual shelf management tools in enhancing customer engagement.

Given a managerial evaluation session is scheduled,When the manager reviews the analytics data gathered from customer interactions,Then they must see a clear report highlighting improvements or declines in engagement metrics post-implementation.

Product Placement Suggestions

User Story: As a user of the InvenSage platform, I want to receive intelligent product placement suggestions so that I can maximize the visibility and sales potential of my inventory.
Description: The Product Placement Suggestions feature uses AI algorithms to analyze sales data, market trends, and customer behavior to recommend optimal product placements within the virtual store. This requirement aims to enhance the user experience by providing actionable insights and suggestions to users for placing their inventory strategically. Integration with the predictive analytics module of InvenSage will allow this feature to continually learn and adapt to changing market conditions, ensuring relevance and effectiveness in suggested placements.
Acceptance Criteria: User requests product placement suggestions for various items in their virtual store layout before a promotional launch.

Given the user has uploaded their current inventory and sales data, When they request product placement suggestions, Then the system should return a list of optimal product placements based on AI analysis of data.

User wants to assess the effectiveness of the recommended product placements after implementing them for a week.

Given the user has implemented the recommended placements, When they review sales data a week later, Then there should be a measurable increase in sales for the products that were repositioned as per the suggestions.

Retailer modifies product information and wants the system to update placement suggestions accordingly.

Given the retailer updates product details such as price or category, When they request new placement suggestions, Then the system should provide updated suggestions that reflect the new product data.

A user queries how the AI algorithm interprets historical sales data to generate placement suggestions.

Given the user poses a query regarding the algorithm, When they access the help section, Then the system should provide a detailed explanation of how historical sales and customer behavior inform the suggestions.

User wants to integrate the Product Placement Suggestions feature with their existing sales tracking software.

Given the user selects integration options, When they follow the integration setup, Then the system should successfully integrate and display a confirmation message indicating successful connection.

Warehouse staff needs to act on product placement suggestions to optimize the physical arrangement of inventory.

Given the warehouse staff has reviewed the product placement suggestions, When they follow the recommendations, Then there should be positive feedback from the staff about improved efficiency in locating products.

A user wants to see how product trends affect placement suggestions over time.

Given the user accesses the trends report, When they view the historical data for product placements suggested over the past year, Then the report should clearly show which placements led to increased sales based on changing trends.

Multi-User Collaboration

User Story: As a team lead, I want the ability for multiple team members to simultaneously work on the virtual shelf layout so that we can leverage diverse insights and speed up the design process.
Description: Multi-User Collaboration functionality will allow multiple users to access and modify the virtual shelving layouts simultaneously. This requirement should include role-based access controls to ensure that users can collaborate effectively while maintaining security and integrity. By enabling collaborative efforts, teams can work together to design the virtual store and iterate on layouts quickly, enhancing creativity and speed in decision-making processes.
Acceptance Criteria: Multi-user access for collaborative layout design in AR.

Given multiple users with access permissions, when they log into the application simultaneously, then they can view and modify the virtual shelf layouts concurrently without any data conflicts.

Role-based access control during collaboration.

Given different user roles (admin, editor, viewer), when a user attempts to edit the virtual shelf layout, then only users with the 'admin' and 'editor' roles can make changes, while 'viewers' can only observe the layout.

Real-time updates for layout changes during collaboration.

Given that one user modifies a product placement on the virtual shelf, when the change is made, then all other users viewing that layout see the update reflected in less than 2 seconds.

Session management for collaborative sessions.

Given a collaboration session, when a user remains inactive for 15 minutes, then they are automatically logged out, and their unsaved changes are temporarily saved for others to continue work.

Conflict resolution during simultaneous modifications.

Given two users are editing the same shelf position simultaneously, when both users make changes, then the system prompts them to resolve the conflict by choosing one of the edits or merging their changes.

Audit trail for changes made during collaboration.

Given a collaborative editing session, when any user makes a change, then the system logs the change with details of the user, time, and modification for future reference.

Visual indicators for users indicating collaborative activity.

Given multiple users in a collaborative session, when users make changes, then other users should see visual indicators in the AR display showing who is making changes in real-time.

Training Mode

User Story: As a new user, I want to have a training mode that guides me in using the virtual shelf management tools so that I can quickly learn how to optimize my inventory placement.
Description: The Training Mode requirement will provide users with a guided walkthrough of the Virtual Shelf Management feature. This mode should include step-by-step tutorials, interactive simulations, and best practice prompts that help users familiarize themselves with the AR tools and functionalities. The goal of this feature is to minimize the learning curve for users, ensuring they can effectively utilize the virtual shelf management tools from their initial interaction onwards, fostering greater adoption and user satisfaction.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the Training Mode upon first logging in to the Virtual Shelf Management feature.

Given the user has logged into the platform, when they select the Virtual Shelf Management feature, then the Training Mode should automatically launch, presenting an introductory screen with a 'Start Tutorial' button.

User completes the first tutorial segment in the Training Mode.

Given the user is in the Training Mode, when they complete the first tutorial segment about adding products to the virtual shelf, then they should receive a confirmation message indicating successful completion and an option to proceed to the next segment.

User engages with an interactive simulation during the Training Mode.

Given the user is on the simulation page, when they drag and drop products into the simulated shelf, then the changes should be reflected in real-time, and they should receive feedback on the optimal placement based on best practices.

User accesses best practice prompts while in Training Mode.

Given the user is navigating the virtual store layout, when they hover over a product or shelf space, then contextual best practice prompts should appear, guiding them on effective product placement.

User finishes all tutorial segments in Training Mode.

Given the user has completed all tutorial segments, when they exit Training Mode, then they should receive a summary of what they learned and an option to restart the Training Mode if desired.

User tests the knowledge gained from the Training Mode by utilizing the Virtual Shelf Management tools.

Given the user has completed the Training Mode, when they attempt to set up their inventory using the AR tools, then they should demonstrate correct usage of the tools as instructed in the tutorials, reflected by successful completion of a practical task.

Interactive Stock Layouts

Interactive Stock Layouts enable users to manipulate stock placements in real-time through augmented reality. This feature allows for dynamic testing of different layouts, helping retailers to maximize accessibility and improve customer flow within their physical or digital store environments.

Requirements

Augmented Reality Stock Placement

User Story: As a store manager, I want to use augmented reality to plan my stock layout so that I can experiment with different placements to enhance customer experience and sales efficiency.
Description: The Augmented Reality Stock Placement requirement focuses on enabling users to visualize and adjust stock placements through augmented reality technology. This feature allows users to leverage their devices' cameras to superimpose stock items in their physical store layouts, facilitating real-time adjustments. By utilizing AR, retailers can test various configurations to optimize product visibility and customer flow. This requirement enhances user engagement with the inventory management system and plays a crucial role in generating actionable insights for improved layout strategies.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the Augmented Reality Stock Placement feature via their mobile device while in the store to visualize stock placements.

Given the user is in the store, when they open the Augmented Reality Stock Placement feature, then they should see an accurate overlay of stock items on their device's screen in real-time based on the camera's view.

The user adjusts a stock item's placement in the Augmented Reality interface to test different layouts.

Given the user is manipulating stock items in the AR interface, when they drag a stock item to a new location, then the new position should update visually in the AR simulation without delay or errors.

The user saves a new stock layout after testing multiple configurations in augmented reality.

Given the user has tested various stock layouts, when they click the 'Save Layout' button, then the layout should be stored in the system and retrievable for future use without loss of data.

The user shares the AR layout with team members for feedback.

Given a layout has been created, when the user selects the option to share the layout, then an email notification should be sent to the specified team members along with a link to view the AR layout.

The user evaluates the impact of a new AR layout on customer flow within the simulation environment.

Given the user is in the evaluation phase of the layout, when they switch to the 'Customer Flow' analytics mode, then they should see simulated customer movement patterns based on the new layout displayed on the screen.

The user attempts to use the Augmented Reality feature in a low light environment to check the functionality.

Given the user is in a low light condition, when they activate the Augmented Reality Stock Placement feature, then the system should still allow for basic visibility of stock placements and provide an error message alerting the user of diminished functionality.

Dynamic Layout Testing

User Story: As a retail store owner, I want to test different store layouts dynamically so that I can find the most effective arrangement for boosting customer interactions and sales.
Description: The Dynamic Layout Testing requirement entails the ability for users to create, modify, and test various store layouts dynamically. This functionality allows users to save, load, and compare different layouts within the application. Users can simulate customer behaviors in response to different stock placements, identifying which configurations yield the highest foot traffic and sales conversion. This requirement is pivotal for retailers seeking to optimize their space usage and enhance customer interaction within their environments.
Acceptance Criteria: User wants to create a new stock layout using the Interactive Stock Layouts feature.

Given that the user is on the stock layout dashboard, when they create a new layout, then the layout is saved in the system and marked as active.

User modifies an existing stock layout to test new placements.

Given that the user has an existing layout, when they modify stock placements, then the system reflects these changes in real-time on the user interface without errors.

User saves multiple layouts and needs to load a previously saved layout for testing.

Given that the user has multiple saved layouts, when they select a layout to load, then the layout is displayed accurately as it was saved, with all stock placements intact.

User wants to compare two different layouts to analyze performance.

Given that the user has two distinct layouts, when they request to compare these layouts, then the system provides a visual representation of key performance indicators, including expected foot traffic and sales conversion rates for both layouts.

User is testing customer behavior simulations based on different stock layouts.

Given that the user has configured a simulation for customer behavior, when they run the simulation, then the system generates an analysis report indicating customer movement patterns and engagement levels for the specific layout.

User wants to revert to a previous layout after testing a new configuration.

Given that the user has tested a layout but wishes to revert, when they select the revert option, then the previous layout is restored with all alterations undone without data loss.

Real-time Analytics Feedback

User Story: As a business analyst, I want real-time feedback on customer engagement after layout changes so that I can quickly refine our stock placement strategies based on actual performance data.
Description: The Real-time Analytics Feedback requirement incorporates an analytics dashboard feature that offers immediate insights based on layout changes. This tool will track customer movement and engagement metrics as users manipulate stock placements and compare these outcomes against previous layouts. Retailers will receive actionable data, allowing them to make informed decisions about their stock organization strategies in real-time. This requirement supports data-driven decision making and enhances overall inventory efficiency as users iterate on their layouts.
Acceptance Criteria: User interacts with the Interactive Stock Layouts feature, modifying the placement of products using augmented reality within their store layout during a busy shopping hour.

Given a user has access to the Interactive Stock Layouts feature, when they make layout changes in real-time, then the analytics dashboard must display immediate feedback on customer engagement metrics and movement patterns related to the new layout.

Retailers want to compare customer engagement metrics between two different stock layouts during a promotional event.

Given two stock layouts have been created and tested, when the retailer switches between these layouts using the analytics dashboard, then the dashboard must accurately show comparative metrics for customer movement and engagement for each layout.

A user is reviewing analytics after a layout change to validate improvements in customer flow and product accessibility.

Given that a layout change has been implemented, when the user accesses the analytics dashboard, then they should see a report with clear metrics highlighting changes in customer flow and product interaction frequency, and it should provide recommendations based on these insights.

A retailer conducts a team meeting to discuss layout changes based on the analytics feedback from the previous week.

Given the analytics dashboard has collected engagement data for the past week, when the retailer accesses this data, then they should be able to export a comprehensive report that includes trends, metrics, and visual representations of customer behavior.

A user intends to validate that the real-time feedback is functioning correctly during peak shopping hours.

Given that the user performs layout modifications during peak hours, when these adjustments are made, then all changes must reflect within the analytics dashboard in under 5 seconds, ensuring that the data remains relevant and actionable during high traffic periods.

A user wants to engage with the training module to understand how to use the real-time analytics feedback effectively.

Given that the user has access to the training module, when they complete the training on navigating the analytics dashboard, then they should pass a comprehension quiz with at least an 80% score regarding the feature's capabilities and use cases.

User-guided AR Tutorials

User Story: As a new user, I want guided tutorials on using AR for stock layouts so that I can efficiently learn how to optimize my store's layout without feeling overwhelmed.
Description: The User-guided AR Tutorials requirement is intended to provide users with step-by-step guidance on how to effectively utilize the augmented reality features for stock layouts. These tutorials will educate users on maximizing the tool's capabilities, providing tips and best practices for visualizing and experimenting with different stock placements. This feature will ensure that users, regardless of their technical proficiency, can confidently manipulate their store layouts, ultimately leading to better utilization of the platform.
Acceptance Criteria: User attempts to access the User-guided AR Tutorials from the main dashboard of InvenSage.

Given the user is logged into InvenSage, when the user clicks on the 'AR Tutorials' section in the dashboard, then the user should be directed to a comprehensive list of available AR tutorials relevant to stock layouts.

User engages with a specific AR tutorial on stock layouts.

Given the user has selected an AR tutorial titled 'Maximizing Store Layouts,' when the user clicks on 'Start Tutorial,' then the tutorial should begin with an interactive guide that offers step-by-step instructions displayed on the user's device.

User completes the AR tutorial on stock layouts and seeks to apply the learned techniques.

Given the user has finished the tutorial, when the user navigates back to the Interactive Stock Layouts feature, then the user should see a prompt reminding them of the techniques learned and how to use them in the AR feature.

User encounters a problem during the AR tutorial and seeks help.

Given the user is in the middle of an AR tutorial, when the user clicks on the 'Help' button, then a contextual help menu should appear, providing immediate access to FAQs and support contacts relevant to AR tutorials.

User finishes the AR tutorial and provides feedback on its effectiveness.

Given the user completes the tutorial, when the user is prompted to rate the tutorial on a scale of 1-5 and leave comments, then the system should successfully record the feedback and display a thank you message upon submission.

User with limited technical proficiency attempts to follow the AR tutorial.

Given the user is not technically savvy, when the user engages with the AR tutorial, then the instructions should be clear, simple, and accompanied by visuals that guide them through each step without needing technical jargon.

User accesses the AR tutorials on a mobile device while in-store.

Given the user is in a physical store and accesses the AR tutorials from a mobile device, when the user follows the tutorial steps, then the AR functionality should be optimized for mobile use, enabling seamless interaction without lag or errors.

Multi-platform Compatibility

User Story: As a user, I want to access the Interactive Stock Layouts feature from any device so that I can work flexibly and efficiently, regardless of the platform I choose.
Description: The Multi-platform Compatibility requirement ensures that the Interactive Stock Layouts feature is accessible and fully functional across different devices and operating systems, including iOS, Android, and Windows. This requirement is critical for providing a seamless user experience, allowing users to engage with the platform from their preferred devices while maintaining functionality and visual integrity. By addressing compatibility, the feature will meet the diverse needs of retailers operating in various environments.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the Interactive Stock Layouts feature on an iPhone to rearrange stock placements in their physical store.

Given the user is on a compatible iOS device, when they access the Interactive Stock Layouts feature, then the layout should load within 5 seconds without visual glitches, and all interactive elements must be functional.

A user on a Windows device tests the layout functionality for their e-commerce platform through a web browser.

Given the user is on a compatible Windows device, when they navigate to the Interactive Stock Layouts feature through a web browser, then the layout should display correctly, with all features working as intended across all popular web browsers (Chrome, Firefox, Edge) without any errors.

An Android device user utilizes the Interactive Stock Layouts feature to make stock adjustments during a store layout meeting.

Given the user is using an Android device, when they open the Interactive Stock Layouts feature, then they should be able to manipulate stock placements fluidly, with no lag or delay, and the augmented reality view should render accurately in real-time.

A retailer switches from their tablet to a smartphone to continue working on stock layouts.

Given the retailer has saved their layout changes on a tablet, when they access the Interactive Stock Layouts feature on a smartphone, then the user should see their previously saved layout, and all functionalities should remain intact and accessible.

A user simulates different layout scenarios in an online training session using a laptop.

Given the user is on a compatible Windows laptop, when they access the Interactive Stock Layouts feature during the training session, then the software should perform smoothly, allowing users to access all features without any crashes or interruptions throughout the session.

A store manager conducts a customer survey on their experiences using the Interactive Stock Layouts on various devices.

Given the store manager collects feedback from users on multiple devices, when assessing the feedback, then at least 90% of users should report satisfaction with the feature's performance and compatibility on their respective devices.

Inventory Sync with AR Changes

User Story: As an inventory manager, I want changes made in AR to reflect in actual stock levels so that I can maintain accurate inventory counts and streamline restocking processes.
Description: The Inventory Sync with AR Changes requirement ensures that any adjustments made to stock placements via augmented reality are automatically updated in the inventory management system. This feature will minimize discrepancies between the digital representation of the inventory and the actual stock levels. Users can rely on real-time sync to maintain accurate inventory counts and reorder automation, enhancing operational efficiency and preventing stockouts or overstock situations due to layout changes.
Acceptance Criteria: Inventory sync upon AR layout changes for a retail store is initiated by a store manager who uses the InvenSage platform to modify product placements in an augmented reality view during a store redesign phase.

Given that a manager adjusts stock placements in AR, when the changes are confirmed and saved, then the backend inventory count must reflect the new placements within 5 seconds, updating stock levels accurately without discrepancies.

A user is in the process of setting up a pop-up shop and uses the Interactive Stock Layouts feature to arrange products in real-time via AR, ensuring the synced inventory also reflects these temporary stock placements.

Given that a user arranges stock using AR for a pop-up shop, when the user saves the layout changes, then the system must update the inventory to reflect these changes and notify the user of the successful sync via a confirmation message.

During an inventory audit, a store owner utilizes the AR feature to visually confirm stock placements and ensure that the digital stock levels align with physical counts, viewing discrepancies via InvenSage dashboard.

Given that discrepancies are identified between AR placements and the physical stock during an audit, when the stock is adjusted in AR, then the changes must be reflected in the inventory system and report an accuracy of 100% with no errors in stock levels post-adjustment.

A retailer reconfigures their store layout to improve customer flow using the Interactive Stock Layouts feature, attempting to sync the virtual adjustments with the actual inventory for a seamless transition.

Given that a retailer reconfigures the store layout using AR, when the layout adjustments are applied, then the inventory management system must prevent any overstocking or understocking by automatically calculating optimal stock levels based on the new layout.

An e-commerce business updates the digital layout of their online store using augmented reality to reposition inventory for campaigns, aiming for an immediate reflection of inventory changes in the management system.

Given that an e-commerce manager changes product placements online via AR, when the user confirms these changes, then the inventory management system must sync real-time stock updates and adjust visibility of stock items based on current availability.

The customer service team receives calls about stock levels after recent AR layout changes, ensuring accurate information is provided based on the real-time inventory updates from InvenSage.

Given that customer service queries about stock are based on recent AR changes, when they reference the inventory information, then the system must show the updated stock levels that match the AR layout within 1 minute of changes being made.

Stock Replenishment Visualization

Stock Replenishment Visualization provides users with a visual representation of stock levels and replenishment needs in an AR environment. This helps retailers quickly identify which items need restocking and assess optimal restock locations without needing to cross-reference physical inventories.

Requirements

Interactive AR Stock Levels

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to view stock levels in augmented reality so that I can easily identify which items need restocking without physically checking every product.
Description: The Interactive AR Stock Levels requirement enables users to visualize stock levels using augmented reality (AR) technology. It will provide an immersive experience where users can see a virtual representation of their stock quantities overlaid on their actual physical products. This feature will enhance the user experience by allowing efficient stock management and quick identification of low inventory items without the need for manual counts. Users will be able to walk through their storage or sales areas and see at a glance which products require replenishment, optimizing the stock management process.
Acceptance Criteria: User utilizes the Interactive AR Stock Levels feature in a retail environment to visually assess inventory without manually counting stock items.

Given a user is equipped with AR glasses, when they enter the storage area, then they should see virtual indicators overlaying the stock levels of all products. The virtual indicators must accurately reflect the real-time inventory quantities for each product.

User walks through the sales floor and uses the Interactive AR Stock Levels feature to identify which items are running low on stock.

Given a user is on the sales floor, when they activate the AR feature, then any product that has a stock level below the predefined threshold should be highlighted in red, allowing easy identification of low stock items.

Individual products are tagged with RFID or barcode labels that can be scanned to update inventory levels in real-time while using the AR feature.

Given that a product is scanned using an RFID reader or barcode scanner, when the inventory level is updated, then the corresponding AR visualization should reflect the updated stock levels within 5 seconds.

User utilizes the AR feature for a restocking plan for a specific shelf area in their store.

Given a user selects a specific shelf area, when they view it through the AR interface, then the system should provide suggested restock quantities based on current inventory data and historical sales trends.

Additional training materials are provided to users for effective utilization of the Interactive AR Stock Levels feature.

Given new users integrate the AR stock levels feature, when they access the training module, then they should have access to at least 3 instructional videos and an FAQ section focusing on common issues and tips for optimal use.

User receives notifications about items that are critically low in stock while using the AR interface in a busy store environment.

Given a user is actively viewing stock levels through AR, when any item falls below a critical stock threshold, then the user should receive an immediate visual alert, prioritized by urgency.

Automated Replenishment Alerts

User Story: As an inventory manager, I want to receive automatic alerts when stock is low so that I can quickly place orders and avoid running out of products.
Description: Automated Replenishment Alerts will notify users when stock levels fall below a predefined threshold. This requirement will integrate seamlessly with existing inventory management systems and provide timely reminders for low stock items through push notifications or emails. The alerts will include details such as item descriptions, current quantities, and suggested reorder amounts, helping users manage their stock levels proactively and avoid stockouts. This feature will streamline the replenishment process and enhance operational efficiency by ensuring users do not miss critical restocking needs.
Acceptance Criteria: When users set predefined stock level thresholds for their inventory items to trigger alerts.

Given the stock level for an item has fallen below the predefined threshold, when the system processes the inventory data, then an automated alert is sent to the user via push notification or email with details of the item, including its description, current quantity, and suggested reorder amount.

When a user receives a low stock alert for an item in their inventory.

Given a low stock alert is generated, when the user opens the alert notification, then the user should see all relevant details including the item description, current stock level, and recommended reorder quantity, ensuring they can make informed restocking decisions.

When users interact with the inventory management system after receiving automated alerts.

Given the user is notified of low stock through an automated alert, when they log into the inventory management system, then they should see a visual representation of their stock levels reflecting the alert status, allowing for immediate action to be taken.

When the thresholds for stock replenishment are adjusted by users.

Given the user updates the predefined stock level thresholds for products, when the system saves these changes, then any subsequent inventory data processing must reflect the new thresholds, ensuring alerts are generated based on the updated criteria.

When users rely on historical data for decision-making regarding stock replenishment.

Given that the automated replenishment alerts include predictive analytics, when the alerts are generated, then they should incorporate any AI-driven demand forecasting data to suggest reorder quantities accurately based on sales trends.

When the automated alerts potentially hit a bug or system error.

Given that the system processes inventory data, when an error occurs causing alerts not to be sent, then a log entry should be created to document the issue and an error notification should be generated for the development team to address the malfunction.

When users want to customize notification preferences for low-stock alerts.

Given that users can manage their alert settings, when they navigate to the settings page, then they should have options to customize how they receive notifications (e.g., email, push notification, or both) and save those preferences, ensuring communication aligns with their needs.

Customizable Replenishment Thresholds

User Story: As a small business owner, I want to set custom reorder levels for each product so that I can manage my inventory efficiently and adapt to changes in demand.
Description: The Customizable Replenishment Thresholds requirement allows users to set specific stock level limits for different products based on their sales patterns and storage capacities. This functionality will empower users to tailor their replenishment needs according to individual item demand, thereby preventing overstocking and stockouts. The flexibility to adjust thresholds directly through the user interface will ensure that stock levels align with evolving business scenarios and market trends, optimizing inventory turnover and enhancing profitability.
Acceptance Criteria: User wants to set specific stock level thresholds for a popular product like a winter coat based on its sales trends, utilizing the customizable replenishment thresholds feature in the InvenSage platform.

Given the user is logged in and viewing the inventory management dashboard, When they select a product and enter a new minimum and maximum stock level for that product, Then the new thresholds should be saved successfully and displayed on the product details page.

A retailer decides to modify the replenishment threshold for a particular fast-moving item as sales increase during a seasonal promotion.

Given the user has previously set a replenishment threshold for the item, When they adjust the threshold to a new level and save the changes, Then the updated threshold should reflect immediately on the dashboard and in reporting metrics without any errors.

A store manager reviews product stock levels at the end of the month and needs to confirm that previously set thresholds are being monitored accurately.

Given the user is on the inventory dashboard, When they select the 'Replenishment Analytics' report, Then all products should display their current stock levels, set thresholds, and any alerts for items below the minimum threshold based on the user's specified settings.

A wholesaler wants to apply bulk updates to a range of products’ replenishment thresholds based on changing supplier agreements.

Given the user is viewing a list of products, When they select multiple products and set a new threshold value, Then all selected products should update to the new threshold, and a confirmation message should indicate how many items were updated successfully.

A user attempts to set a replenishment threshold that is lower than the current stock level for an item to assess system handling of such scenarios.

Given the user is setting a new minimum threshold higher than the available stock, When they save the threshold, Then the system should display an error message indicating the threshold cannot be lower than or equal to the current stock level.

A manager is training new employees on using the threshold setting feature and needs to see an example of successful updates in the training session.

Given the trainer is demonstrating the interface, When they set a new replenishment threshold for a sample product, Then within the training environment, the updates should complete without errors, and the demonstration should show the correct updated data.

Augmented Inventory Training

Augmented Inventory Training offers an interactive learning experience for new employees using AR simulations. Users can familiarize themselves with inventory management processes and best practices, leading to faster onboarding and improved operational efficiency.

Requirements

Interactive AR Simulations

User Story: As a new employee, I want to use AR simulations for inventory training so that I can quickly learn the processes and perform my job efficiently without relying only on manuals or instructions.
Description: The Augmented Inventory Training feature must include interactive AR simulations that allow new employees to engage in a hands-on learning experience. These simulations will cover various inventory management tasks such as stock taking, order processing, and returning items. The AR technology should be capable of overlaying digital information onto the physical world, making it easier for users to process and visualize complex inventory procedures. This function will not only speed up the learning process but also ensure that operational best practices are understood and applied correctly, leading to enhanced productivity and lower error rates in inventory management tasks.
Acceptance Criteria: New employees use augmented reality simulations to learn inventory management tasks during their first week of onboarding.

Given a new employee is in the Augmented Inventory Training module, when they engage with an AR simulation for stock taking, then they can successfully complete the stock taking task with 90% accuracy on their first attempt.

During the training session, employees must identify and process inventory orders using AR technology.

Given a new employee is using the order processing AR simulation, when they complete an order, then the simulation should accurately reflect all items correctly processed and notify them of any discrepancies in real-time.

Returning items is a common inventory process that must be simulated for training.

Given a new employee participates in the item return simulation, when they initiate a return, then the simulation should guide them through the process and collect feedback on correct procedure adherence.

The training module should assess knowledge retention after completion of the AR simulations.

Given a new employee completes all AR simulations, when they take a knowledge retention quiz, then they should score at least 80% to demonstrate understanding of inventory management tasks.

The system should log the performance data of new employees during AR simulations for future reference.

Given a new employee finishes an AR simulation, when the session ends, then their performance metrics (completion time, errors made, etc.) are recorded and accessible to their trainer.

Simulations should provide real-time assistance during complex scenarios.

Given a new employee is engaged in a challenging AR simulation scenario, when they request assistance, then the system should provide contextual hints and tips to aid them within 5 seconds.

The Augmented Inventory Training should support various learning styles by providing multiple information formats.

Given a new employee is participating in the AR training, when they choose to view instructional content, then they should have the option to access visual, audio and text formats for the material provided.

Progress Tracking Dashboard

User Story: As a manager, I want to have a progress tracking dashboard for employees undergoing AR training so that I can evaluate their learning curves and provide additional support where needed.
Description: A built-in progress tracking dashboard is essential for the Augmented Inventory Training feature. This dashboard will allow managers and new employees to monitor training advancements in real-time, showing completion rates of modules, quiz results, and areas that need improvement. Having such visibility into the training process enables users to identify their strengths and weaknesses, fostering a more targeted approach to learning. Additionally, it provides managers with analytics to evaluate training effectiveness and employee readiness.
Acceptance Criteria: Progress Tracking for New Employee Training Modules Completion

Given a new employee in the Augmented Inventory Training, When they complete a training module, Then the progress tracking dashboard should update to reflect the new completion rate in real-time.

Displaying Quiz Results for Training Assessment

Given a new employee has completed a quiz at the end of a training module, When they access the progress tracking dashboard, Then the dashboard should display their quiz results and provide feedback based on their performance.

Identifying Areas for Improvement in Training

Given a manager reviewing a new employee's progress on the tracking dashboard, When they view the areas highlighted as needing improvement, Then the dashboard should provide actionable insights and recommendations for further training.

Real-time Analytics for Training Effectiveness

Given a manager monitoring overall training effectiveness, When they access the analytics section of the progress tracking dashboard, Then it should display aggregate data on module completion rates and employee performance across all trainees.

User-Friendly Interface for Dashboard Navigation

Given a new employee accessing the progress tracking dashboard for the first time, When they interact with the interface, Then it should be intuitive, allowing them to easily navigate between modules, quizzes, and analytics without external assistance.

Mobile Compatibility of Progress Tracking Dashboard

Given that the progress tracking dashboard is accessed from various devices, When a new employee or manager accesses it via mobile, Then the layout should be responsive, maintaining functionality and visibility of all key metrics.

Gamified Learning Modules

User Story: As a new employee, I want to experience gamification in my training so that I find the learning process more enjoyable and motivating, which will help me remember the inventory processes better.
Description: The incorporation of gamified learning modules into the augmented training will enhance engagement and retention of concepts. These modules can include quizzes, points systems, and challenges that new employees can participate in during their training sessions. By facilitating a more interactive and enjoyable learning experience, gamification aims to boost motivation and commitment among employees, leading to quicker onboarding and improved retention of inventory management practices.
Acceptance Criteria: New employees are engaging in Gamified Learning Modules through Augmented Inventory Training during their first week at the company, participating in quizzes and challenges to test their understanding of inventory management processes.

Given a new employee has accessed the Gamified Learning Module, when they complete a quiz, then they should receive immediate feedback on their performance and points should be awarded based on accuracy.

During a live training session, employees utilize the Gamified Learning Modules to review inventory management best practices, competing against each other to achieve the highest score.

Given multiple employees are engaged in the same Gamified Learning Module, when they complete the challenges, then the system must display a leaderboard showcasing the top performers in real time.

New employees are required to complete a set of quizzes designed within the Gamified Learning Modules to achieve a certain level of understanding before proceeding with their training.

Given a new employee has completed the quizzes in the Gamified Learning Module, when they achieve a score of 80% or higher, then they should be marked as ready to move on to the next training phase with a certificate of completion.

New hires access Gamified Learning Modules on various devices, including mobile and desktop, to ensure flexibility and convenience in their training.

Given a new employee attempts to access a Gamified Learning Module from a mobile device, when they log in, then the system should display a responsive design that maintains functionality and user experience consistent with the desktop version.

As part of the onboarding process, new employees provide feedback on their experience with the Gamified Learning Modules to help improve future versions of the training.

Given a new employee has completed the Gamified Learning Modules, when they submit their feedback via the built-in survey tool, then their responses should be collected and stored for analysis to enhance future module iterations.

Feedback Mechanism

User Story: As a new employee, I want to provide feedback on the AR training sessions so that the training can be improved for my peers in the future and allow for a better learning experience overall.
Description: A feedback mechanism should be integrated into the Augmented Inventory Training feature to gather insights on the training experience from users. This system could include post-training surveys, interactive feedback forms after each training session, and a ratings system for the AR simulations. Collecting feedback is vital for continuously improving the training content and delivery, ensuring that future iterations are even more effective in meeting user needs and addressing any gaps identified by participants.
Acceptance Criteria: Post-Training Survey Submission

Given a completed training session, when the user accesses the post-training survey, then they should be able to submit feedback, and their response should be recorded in the feedback database.

Interactive Feedback Form Completion

Given that a user has completed an AR simulation, when they are prompted to fill out an interactive feedback form, then the form should allow for multiple response types (text, ratings, etc.) and confirm successful submission.

Simulation Rating System Feedback

Given that a user has completed an AR simulation, when they rate the simulation on a scale of 1 to 5, then their rating should be saved and averaged with other user ratings for that simulation.

Feedback Review Process

Given the collected feedback data, when an administrator accesses the feedback review dashboard, then they should be able to view insights and generate reports on user feedback trends.

Real-Time Feedback Notifications

Given that feedback is submitted, when the feedback is positive, then a notification should be sent to the training content team; if it is negative, a follow-up action should be generated.

User Training Experience Improvement

Given that feedback indicates improvement areas, when changes are made to the training modules, then updated content should reflect those changes and be retrained to users within one month.

Customization Options for Training Content

User Story: As a training administrator, I want to customize the AR training content for new hires so that it aligns with our specific inventory processes and products, ensuring a relevant and effective training experience.
Description: The system should allow administrators to customize the training content and AR simulations according to the specific needs of their business. This feature will enable diverse scenarios that reflect company policies, product lines, and inventory processes unique to the business. By providing tailored training modules, the Augmented Inventory Training can better prepare employees for real-world inventory management challenges, thereby improving their confidence and competence once they are on the job.
Acceptance Criteria: Customization of Training Modules Based on Company Policies

Given an administrator is logged into the InvenSage system, when they navigate to the Augmented Inventory Training section, then they can create a new training module that includes specific company policies relevant to inventory management.

Integration of Product Lines in AR Simulations

Given the administrator has selected a training module, when they upload product line information into the system, then the AR simulations should reflect the unique characteristics and handling procedures of those products.

User Feedback Mechanism for Training Effectiveness

Given an employee completes an AR training module, when they provide feedback on the module, then the system should record and analyze the feedback for future content optimization.

Multi-Scenario Training Customization

Given an administrator is creating a training module, when they select multiple scenarios that need to be included, then the system should allow them to customize each scenario with specific instructions and outcomes.

Preview of Customized AR Simulation

Given an administrator has customized a training module, when they select the preview option, then the system should display a simulation that accurately reflects the customized training content before finalizing it.

Monitoring Trainee Progress Through Custom Modules

Given an administrator has set up custom training modules, when a trainee completes a module, then the system should track and report their progress and completion rate for each module.

Setup of Localization Options for Diverse Employees

Given an administrator is creating a training module for employees from different regions, when they customize the content, then they can select localization options to ensure the training is relevant to those regions' practices.

Real-Time Inventory Tracking

Real-Time Inventory Tracking integrates with existing inventory systems to offer live updates of stock levels directly within the AR interface. This ensures users always have accurate information about what is available and where it’s located, significantly reducing errors and enhancing decision-making.

Requirements

Seamless System Integration

User Story: As an inventory manager, I want InvenSage to integrate seamlessly with our existing systems so that I can streamline our processes and reduce manual data entry errors.
Description: The Seamless System Integration requirement involves creating capable APIs and middleware that allow InvenSage to integrate smoothly with various existing inventory management systems. This integration should enable automatic data transfers, ensuring consistency across platforms and comprehensive data access. The requirement ensures that users can leverage their current systems' data, eliminating redundancy and manual input efforts while enhancing accuracy and reliability in real-time inventory tracking.
Acceptance Criteria: Successful integration of InvenSage with an existing inventory management system.

Given that the API endpoints are available, when a data transfer is initiated, then the inventory levels should update in InvenSage within 5 seconds of the change occurring in the existing system.

Testing the accuracy of inventory data post-integration.

Given that the integration setup is complete, when I check the inventory levels in InvenSage, then the stock numbers must match the original system within a tolerance of 2% for any item.

User experience with the integrated inventory tracking, highlighting the data consistency across platforms.

Given that an item is sold from the existing inventory system, when I view the same item in InvenSage, then the item should show as out of stock immediately and trigger a reorder alert if applicable.

Validation of middleware performance for data retrieval and updates.

Given that multiple transactions are occurring, when a batch of 100 SKU updates is processed, then all updates should be successful with no loss of data integrity during transfer.

User access control for data visibility and updates post-integration.

Given that a user has been granted read-only access, when they attempt to modify the inventory levels in InvenSage, then they should receive an error message indicating insufficient permissions.

Behavior of the integration when there are network disruptions.

Given that a network interruption occurs during data transfer, when the connection is restored, then the system should attempt to automatically resync any missed transactions without user intervention.

User-Friendly Dashboard Customization

User Story: As a store manager, I want to customize my dashboard in InvenSage so that I can prioritize the information that matters most to me and my team's performance.
Description: The User-Friendly Dashboard Customization requirement focuses on allowing users to personalize their dashboard views according to their specific needs and preferences. Users should be able to choose which metrics, graphs, and data sets are displayed prominently, aiding in decision-making through relevant and accessible information. This capability enhances user experience, increases efficiency, and ensures that users focus on the most pertinent inventory data at a glance.
Acceptance Criteria: User Customizes Dashboard Metrics

Given a user is logged in, when they access the dashboard customization settings, then they can choose at least 5 different metrics to display on their dashboard.

User Saves Dashboard Preferences

Given a user has selected their preferred metrics and layout, when they click the save button, then their dashboard preferences are stored and reflected on their next login.

User Rearranges Dashboard Components

Given a user is on their dashboard, when they drag and drop components to rearrange their layout, then the new arrangement is immediately visible without refreshing the page.

User Targets Key Performance Indicators (KPIs)

Given a user is customizing their dashboard, when they select KPIs, then they can filter metrics to display only those that align with their business goals.

User Resets Dashboard to Default Settings

Given a user is on their dashboard, when they select the option to reset to default settings, then all metrics and components revert to the original layout without loss of saved preferences.

User Receives Feedback on Customization Changes

Given a user has made changes to their dashboard, when they save those changes, then a confirmation message is displayed indicating that the changes have been successfully applied.

User Accesses Custom Dashboard on Mobile Device

Given a user customizes their dashboard on a desktop, when they access the platform on a mobile device, then the customized dashboard should be responsive and display the selected metrics correctly.

Automated Alerts for Low Stock

User Story: As a purchasing agent, I want to receive alerts when stock levels are low so that I can efficiently manage reordering processes and avoid stockouts.
Description: The Automated Alerts for Low Stock requirement mandates the creation of a notification system that prompts users when stock levels reach predefined threshold limits. This feature should include customizable alert levels, enabling users to set specific stock thresholds based on product demand patterns. Such automation ensures timely actions regarding reordering, preventing stockouts, and allowing for better inventory planning and control.
Acceptance Criteria: User receives a notification when stock level falls below the set threshold for a product, ensuring they have the ability to restock in a timely manner.

Given a product with a predefined low stock threshold, when the stock level drops below that threshold, then the user receives an automated alert within the dashboard and via email.

User can customize the low stock threshold for different products according to their unique demand patterns, ensuring flexibility and control over inventory management.

Given a product, when the user accesses the inventory settings and changes the low stock threshold, then the system saves the new threshold and reflects it in the alert system without errors.

User can view a historical log of automated alerts to analyze stock trends and refine inventory management strategies over time.

Given the user navigates to the alerts log section, when alerts have been triggered, then the system displays a comprehensive list of past alerts indicating product name, alert level, and timestamp.

User can choose the notification method for low stock alerts, allowing personalization based on their preferences for receiving updates.

Given the user accesses the notification settings, when they select preferred methods of notification (email, SMS, app notification), then the system updates their preferences accordingly and sends a test alert based on these settings.

User receives a prompt to reorder when an alert is triggered, facilitating quick action on low-stock products.

Given an automated alert has been triggered for a low stock product, when the user clicks on the reorder button in the alert, then the system directs the user to the reorder page for that product.

Advanced Reporting and Analytics

User Story: As a business owner, I want advanced reporting capabilities in InvenSage so that I can analyze sales and inventory data to make informed strategies for growth.
Description: The Advanced Reporting and Analytics requirement encompasses the development of comprehensive reporting tools that provide detailed insights into inventory performance, sales trends, and demand forecasts. The reports should be customizable, allowing users to generate tailored insights based on specific parameters, and also feature visual representations of data for easier comprehension. This functionality aims to empower users with data-driven insights that support informed decision-making and strategic planning.
Acceptance Criteria: User generates a customized inventory performance report for the past quarter.

Given the user is on the reporting dashboard, when they select 'Inventory Performance' and specify the date range as the last quarter, then the system should generate a report reflecting stock levels, turnover rates, and discrepancies for that period.

Manager reviews sales trend reports over the last month to identify top-selling products.

Given the manager is logged into the system, when they navigate to the 'Sales Trends' report and select the previous month, then the report should display a list of products sorted by sales volume with visual graphs of sales trends over the month.

User utilizes the demand forecasting tool to adjust inventory levels for the upcoming season.

Given the user is in the forecasting section, when they input historical sales data and indicate the upcoming season parameters, then the system should output recommended stock levels for each product category based on the analysis.

User creates a visual representation of sales forecasts for stakeholder presentation.

Given the user accesses the reporting tool, when they select 'Sales Forecast' and choose to visualize the data, then the system should produce a graphical representation (such as a line graph or bar chart) of projected sales over the selected period.

Admin wants to export inventory reports in various formats for further distribution.

Given the admin is on the report viewing page, when they select the 'Export' option, then the system should provide the ability to download the report in at least three formats (CSV, PDF, Excel).

Mobile Access for Inventory Management

User Story: As a warehouse supervisor, I want to manage inventory through a mobile app so that I can respond promptly to inventory changes without being tied to my desk.
Description: The Mobile Access for Inventory Management requirement focuses on developing a mobile-friendly application or responsive web design that allows users to manage inventory on-the-go. This includes viewing stock levels, receiving alerts, and inputting transactions from mobile devices. Enhancing mobility in inventory management facilitates quicker response times and decision-making, especially for retailers and managers who are often on-site or traveling.
Acceptance Criteria: User is a retail manager who is frequently on-site and needs to check current stock levels during a sales event.

Given the user is logged into the mobile application, when they access the inventory section, then they should see live updates of current stock levels for each product.

A warehouse staff member receives an alert on their mobile device about low stock for a particular item.

Given that a stock level drops below the defined threshold, when the alert is triggered, then the warehouse staff member should receive a push notification on their mobile device.

A sales associate needs to input a new sales transaction while interacting with a customer in-store.

Given the user is on the transaction input screen, when they enter the product code and the quantity sold, then the stock level should update automatically in real-time due to the transaction being processed through the mobile application.

A business owner wants to view inventory trends and forecasts while traveling.

Given the user opens the mobile application, when they navigate to the analytics section, then they should be able to view a clear and interactive dashboard with inventory trends and AI-driven forecasts.

A manager desires to check inventory across multiple locations while visiting suppliers.

Given the user is logged into the application, when they search for a specific item, then they should be able to view stock levels across all linked locations in a consolidated format.

Enhanced User Security Features

User Story: As an IT administrator, I want to implement enhanced security features for user access in InvenSage so that I can protect company data and comply with regulatory requirements.
Description: The Enhanced User Security Features requirement revolves around implementing robust security measures that protect sensitive inventory data and user accounts. This includes multi-factor authentication, role-based access controls, and encryption of stored data. By ensuring that users' information and company data are secure, InvenSage will foster trust and compliance with industry regulations while preventing unauthorized access to critical inventory information.
Acceptance Criteria: User attempts to log into the InvenSage platform and is prompted to provide multi-factor authentication after entering their username and password.

Given a user enters their username and password, when prompted for multi-factor authentication, then the user must enter the correct code sent to their registered mobile device to gain access to the platform.

An admin user accesses the user management section of InvenSage and attempts to set role-based access controls for different user levels.

Given an admin user is logged in, when they assign specific permissions to a user role, then the assigned permissions must match the selected role and restrict access to unauthorized areas based on those permissions.

Sensitive user data is being stored in the InvenSage system, and the application needs to ensure that all data is encrypted at rest.

Given sensitive user data is being stored, then all data stored in the database must be encrypted using a secure encryption algorithm, and an audit trail must be maintained for compliance purposes.

A user attempts to access the InvenSage platform from an unrecognized device, triggering a security protocol.

Given a user attempts to log in from a new device, when the system detects the unrecognized device, then the user must complete an identity verification process before being granted access.

An employee wants to update their personal information within their user profile but must pass security verification first.

Given a user is logged into their account, when they attempt to change their personal information, then they must complete security verification to confirm their identity before any changes are saved.

A user needs to view the activity log related to their account to check for any unauthorized access attempts.

Given a user is logged into their account, when they request to view their activity log, then the system must display a complete and accurate log of all login attempts, including timestamps and IP addresses.

Customer Engagement Simulation

Customer Engagement Simulation allows retailers to visualize how customers interact with stock in an augmented environment. This feature provides insights into popular items, improving marketing strategies and customer service by understanding purchasing behaviors more intuitively.

Requirements

Augmented Reality Visualization

User Story: As a retail store manager, I want to visualize customer interactions with our stock in an augmented reality environment so that I can improve our marketing strategies and optimize product placement based on actual customer engagement.
Description: This requirement focuses on developing an augmented reality (AR) interface that allows retailers to visualize customer interactions with stock in a simulated environment. It aims to provide an immersive experience that showcases product placement, customer pathways, and interaction metrics. By integrating AR technology, retailers can gain insights into customer preferences and behaviors in a realistic setting, thus enhancing marketing strategies and improving inventory management. The implementation will involve creating AR functionalities that can be accessed via mobile devices and tablets, ensuring seamless integration with the existing InvenSage platform to empower users with actionable insights into their inventory and customer engagement dynamics.
Acceptance Criteria: AR Visualization for In-Store Layout Planning

Given an AR-enabled mobile device, When a user accesses the augmented reality interface, Then they should be able to visualize product placements and customer pathways within their physical store layout in real-time.

Customer Interaction Metrics Display

Given the AR visualization is active, When a user observes a product in the AR environment, Then relevant customer interaction metrics (e.g., engagement time, interaction frequency, conversion rates) should be displayed clearly next to the product.

Integration with Existing Inventory Data

Given an updated inventory data set, When the AR simulation is launched, Then it should accurately reflect the current stock levels and product information within the augmented reality environment.

Simulation of Customer Engagement Scenarios

Given the AR functionality, When a user selects different customer profiles (e.g., frequent buyers, first-time visitors), Then the AR simulation should illustrate how each profile interacts with stock over a defined scenario period.

Cross-Platform Access to AR Features

Given a compatible mobile device or tablet, When a user accesses the InvenSage platform, Then they should be able to utilize the AR visualization feature across different devices without loss of functionality.

Usability Testing with Retailers

Given a group of selected retailers, When they use the AR visualization tool, Then they should provide feedback indicating an intuitive user experience and valuable insights into customer behavior over at least 80% of the scenarios tested.

Training and Support Resources Availability

Given the deployment of the AR feature, When retailers access the InvenSage support page, Then they should find comprehensive training materials (videos, user guides) for utilizing the AR visualization feature.

Customer Interaction Analytics Dashboard

User Story: As a business analyst, I want to access a dashboard that displays customer interaction analytics so that I can quickly assess product performance and adjust inventory strategies based on customer interest.
Description: This requirement entails the development of a comprehensive analytics dashboard specifically tailored for customer interaction data derived from the Customer Engagement Simulation feature. It will allow retailers to monitor key performance indicators such as popular items, engagement duration, and purchasing trends. This dashboard will synthesize data from various sources and present it in an intuitive format, making it easier for users to analyze and derive insights. The goal is to enhance decision-making related to stock management and marketing efforts, so that retailers can align their inventory strategies more closely with actual customer preferences and behaviors.
Acceptance Criteria: Customer views the Customer Interaction Analytics Dashboard for the first time after logging into the InvenSage platform.

Given the user is logged into InvenSage, when they navigate to the Customer Interaction Analytics Dashboard, then all key performance indicators such as popular items, engagement duration, and purchasing trends must be displayed correctly and visually appealing without any errors.

Retailer analyzes the effectiveness of a recent marketing campaign using the Customer Interaction Analytics Dashboard.

Given the user selects a specific time range for analysis, when they apply the filters in the analytics dashboard, then the displayed data should accurately reflect customer interactions and engagement metrics for the selected campaign period.

User wants to receive real-time notifications about customer engagement trends based on data shown in the dashboard.

Given the user configures notification settings in the dashboard for customer engagement changes, when a significant trend is detected, then the user should receive an immediate notification via their preferred communication channel.

A retailer needs to compare customer interaction metrics for different products to inform restocking decisions.

Given the user selects multiple products on the dashboard, when they view the comparative analytics, then the system must display side-by-side metrics for engagement duration, purchase frequency, and demographic insights for those products.

User accesses the analytics dashboard on a mobile device and expects a responsive design with full functionality.

Given the user accesses the Customer Interaction Analytics Dashboard from a mobile device, when the dashboard loads, then it must display all components responsively without loss of functionality or data readability.

Retailer wants to export the customer interaction data for further analysis.

Given the user selects the export function on the dashboard, when they choose the desired format (CSV, PDF), then the system must generate and download the file containing the accurate and complete customer interaction data as per the current filters applied.

Engagement Behavior Segmentation

User Story: As a marketing manager, I want to segment customer engagement behaviors so that I can create targeted marketing campaigns that resonate with different customer groups based on their preferences and interactions.
Description: This requirement outlines the need to implement segmentation of customer engagement behaviors based on interaction patterns captured through the simulation. This will allow retailers to categorize customers into different segments according to their buying behaviors, preferences, and interaction frequencies. By leveraging AI-driven algorithms, the system will identify trends and correlations in customer data, improving targeted marketing initiatives and personalized customer experiences. It will require integration with the existing customer database, enabling tailored engagement strategies and improved customer service.
Acceptance Criteria: Customer engagement behaviors are segmented based on their interactions with the inventory simulation during a promotional event for a new product launch.

Given a segment of customers who interacted with the simulation, when the simulation captures their engagement data, then the system should categorize these customers into at least three distinct behavior segments based on interaction frequency and purchase trends.

A retailer uses the engagement behavior segmentation feature to develop a targeted marketing campaign for high-value customer segments identified through the simulation.

Given that the retailer has selected a customer segment, when the marketing campaign is created, then it should automatically include personalized product recommendations based on the identified behaviors and preferences of that segment.

Integration of the customer engagement behavior segmentation with the existing customer database to enhance customer profiles and experiences.

Given that the system receives engagement data, when the data is processed, then it should update customer profiles in the existing database with new segments and insights without data loss or corruption.

Retailers analyze the effectiveness of engagement behavior segmentation on sales performance after implementing the feature over a one-month period.

Given that the segmentation feature has been active for one month, when sales data is reviewed, then there should be at least a 10% increase in sales attributed to targeted marketing efforts based on engagement behaviors.

User experience testing of the segmentation feature’s interface by retail staff to ensure ease of use during customer interaction analysis.

Given that retail staff are testing the feature, when they navigate through the segmentation interface, then at least 90% of users should report that they find the feature intuitive and easy to use during their analysis.

Real-time Feedback Mechanism

User Story: As a customer service coordinator, I want to implement a real-time feedback mechanism so that we can capture customer reactions and adapt our inventory and marketing strategies to better meet their expectations in the moment.
Description: This requirement involves establishing a real-time feedback mechanism to collect and analyze customer responses while they interact with the simulated environment. The feature will gather insights on customer satisfaction, product appeal, and usability of the simulations, allowing retailers to adjust their marketing strategies accordingly. By facilitating immediate feedback collection, retailers can ensure their engagement practices align more closely with consumer expectations. This mechanism will be built as an extension of the existing customer engagement simulation feature and will require minimal additional training for users.
Acceptance Criteria: Scenario 1: Retailer receives customer feedback during a simulated shopping experience.

Given the customer engagement simulation is active, when a customer interacts with a product, then a feedback prompt appears after the interaction, allowing customers to rate their experience from 1 to 5 stars and provide textual feedback.

Scenario 2: Analytics dashboard displays real-time feedback data.

Given customer feedback is collected, when a retailer accesses the analytics dashboard, then they should see aggregated customer ratings and comments segmented by product and interaction time.

Scenario 3: Customer engagement simulation is seamlessly integrated with the feedback mechanism.

Given the customer engagement simulation is in use, when a user initiates the simulation, then the feedback mechanism should automatically activate without requiring additional training or setup from the user.

Scenario 4: System handles feedback submission during peak traffic.

Given the customer engagement simulation is experiencing high traffic, when customers submit their feedback, then all submissions should be collected without any loss of data or delays in processing.

Scenario 5: Feedback analysis provides actionable insights.

Given sufficient customer feedback data is collected, when the retailer analyzes the feedback, then they should receive suggestions on improving customer experience, highlighted based on feedback trends and severity.

Scenario 6: User-triggered feedback review process.

Given customer feedback has been received, when a retailer chooses to review the feedback, then they should be able to filter by date range, product, and star rating for qualitative analysis.

Scenario 7: Customer satisfaction score is calculated accurately.

Given customer ratings have been collected, when a retailer accesses the satisfaction score feature, then they should see an accurate percentage reflecting the average of all ratings received within a specific timeframe.

Training Module for Users

User Story: As a store employee, I want access to a training module for the Customer Engagement Simulation feature so that I can quickly learn how to use the tool effectively to enhance our inventory management processes.
Description: This requirement is focused on creating a training module that will help users understand how to effectively utilize the Customer Engagement Simulation feature. The module will include tutorials, best practices, and case studies demonstrating successful implementations. By equipping users with the necessary skills and knowledge, the training module will ensure maximal utilization of the feature, translating into actionable insights and better business outcomes for retailers. The training will be available in various formats, such as video, interactive sessions, and documentation, to cater to different learning preferences.
Acceptance Criteria: End-users will access the training module for the Customer Engagement Simulation feature via the dedicated training section of the InvenSage application.

Given that a user has logged into the InvenSage platform, when they navigate to the training section, then they should see a list of available tutorials, best practices, and case studies related to the Customer Engagement Simulation feature.

Users will complete a video tutorial on utilizing the Customer Engagement Simulation feature effectively.

Given that a user selects the video tutorial titled 'Customer Engagement Basics', when they watch the entire duration of the video, then they should be able to access a quiz to test their knowledge on the topic.

Retailers will participate in an interactive training session to engage with the Customer Engagement Simulation feature.

Given that a retailer has registered for the interactive session, when the session begins, then all participants should be able to view the session in real-time and ask questions to the instructor without technical issues.

Users will have access to downloadable documentation that outlines best practices for the Customer Engagement Simulation feature.

Given that a user is in the training module, when they click on the 'Download Best Practices' link, then a comprehensive PDF file should be downloaded containing all outlined best practices.

Users will provide feedback on the effectiveness of the training module after completion.

Given that a user completed the training module, when they reach the feedback section, then they should be able to submit a rating (1 to 5 stars) and optional comments regarding the training content.

Retailers will be able to view case studies demonstrating successful implementations of the Customer Engagement Simulation feature.

Given that a user is in the training section, when they navigate to the case studies section, then they should be able to access at least three detailed case studies showcasing various retail scenarios.

Users will track their progress through the training materials in the module.

Given a user is engaging with the training module, when they complete a tutorial or section, then their progress percentage should update accordingly in their user profile.

Integration with Marketing Automation Tools

User Story: As a marketing strategist, I want to integrate the Customer Engagement Simulation feature with our marketing automation tools so that I can leverage real-time insights to rapidly adjust our campaigns based on customer behavior.
Description: This requirement involves enabling integration of the Customer Engagement Simulation feature with existing marketing automation tools used by retailers. The integration will facilitate the automated sharing of insights gained from customer engagement simulations directly into marketing campaigns, allowing for more dynamic and responsive strategies. Retailers will be able to streamline their marketing processes and enhance campaign effectiveness by leveraging real-time data from customer interactions. This will require a robust API connection, ensuring seamless data flow and operational efficiency within their marketing frameworks.
Acceptance Criteria: Integration of Customer Engagement Simulation with Marketing Automation Tools

Given a retailer has set up the Customer Engagement Simulation, when customer engagement data is generated, then insights should be automatically shared with the connected marketing automation tool without manual intervention.

Real-time data flow between Customer Engagement Simulation and marketing campaigns

Given that the API connection is established, when customer engagement insights are updated, then the relevant marketing campaigns are updated in real-time to reflect these insights.

Validation of marketing campaign effectiveness post-integration

Given that the Customer Engagement Simulation has been integrated, when marketing campaigns using shared insights are executed, then there should be a measurable increase in customer engagement metrics by at least 15% within one month.

Error handling for API communication issues

Given that the API connection fails, when the connection is restored, then the data queued during the downtime should be successfully transferred to the marketing automation tool without data loss.

Usability of the integration setup process

Given a retailer attempts to set up the integration, when they follow the provided documentation, then they should be able to complete the integration setup without requiring external support or guidance, and it should take no longer than 30 minutes.

Security measures on API connections

Given that the API integrates with marketing automation tools, when data is transmitted between systems, then all data must be encrypted in transit and comply with GDPR regulations to ensure data protection and user privacy.

Monitoring and Reporting on Data Utilization

Given that the integration is live, when a retailer checks their dashboard, then they should be able to view reports on data utilization, including how many times insights have been used in campaigns within a reporting period.

Augmented Space Assessment

Augmented Space Assessment provides a comprehensive analysis of available storage and retail space through AR overlays. Users can identify areas for improvement, making informed decisions to optimize inventory storage or retail displays.

Requirements

AR Space Visualization

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to visualize how my inventory fits into my available space using AR so that I can optimize my layout and improve customer experience.
Description: The AR Space Visualization requirement enables users to utilize augmented reality to visualize available storage and retail spaces. By integrating real-time AR overlays, users can see how inventory items will fit into their existing layout, allowing them to optimize space effectively. This feature not only enhances user experience but also aids in precise planning and decision-making, ultimately maximizing operational efficiency. Given the increasing reliance on AR technology for retail and inventory management, this functionality stands to significantly enhance the platform's value proposition by providing practical, intuitive tools for space optimization.
Acceptance Criteria: User initiates AR Space Visualization to analyze a specific storage space in their warehouse.

Given the user has selected a storage area in the InvenSage platform, when the user activates the AR Space Visualization feature, then the AR overlays should accurately display the dimensions of the selected storage space, including height, width, and depth.

User accesses the AR Space Visualization to plan the placement of new inventory items.

Given the user is using the AR Space Visualization feature, when the user places inventory items virtually, then the system should provide real-time feedback on the available space and suggest alternative arrangements if space is exceeded.

User evaluates the efficiency of retail displays using AR overlays.

Given the user is in the retail space and has activated AR Space Visualization, when the user scans different display areas, then the system should overlay suggested optimal layouts and identify underutilized spaces based on current inventory.

User needs to save a space optimization plan created with AR visualization.

Given the user has completed the AR Space Visualization and optimization of their inventory layout, when the user saves the plan, then the system should confirm the successful save and make the plan retrievable in future sessions.

User requests assistance on using the AR Space Visualization feature.

Given the user is utilizing the AR Space Visualization, when the user accesses help documentation or video tutorials, then the system should provide relevant support materials related to using the AR feature effectively.

User compares current space utilization to optimized layouts generated by AR.

Given the user has activated AR Space Visualization in a specific area, when the user toggles between current and optimized layouts, then the AR interface should clearly differentiate between the two layouts with distinct visual cues.

Inventory Placement Recommendations

User Story: As a warehouse operator, I want to receive recommendations on where to place my inventory so that I can maximize product visibility and reduce stockouts.
Description: The Inventory Placement Recommendations requirement allows the system to analyze current inventory levels, sales trends, and storage capabilities to provide intelligent recommendations on where to place various items within the retail space. This feature will aggregate data from cross-channel sources and use AI to predict optimal placement for maximizing visibility and sales potential. By suggesting strategic locations based on data, businesses can reduce overstock scenarios and encourage quick turnover of products, thereby increasing profitability and enhancing overall inventory management.
Acceptance Criteria: User initiates the Inventory Placement Recommendations feature after adding new products to the inventory, aiming to optimize sales by placing these items most effectively within the store.

Given the user has added new products to the inventory, when they access the Inventory Placement Recommendations feature, then the system displays placement suggestions based on historical sales data and current inventory levels.

A store manager reviews the implementation of the Inventory Placement Recommendations feature during a quarterly review meeting to assess its impact on sales and stock levels.

Given the store manager is reviewing the sales data for the last quarter, when they evaluate the changes made based on the Inventory Placement Recommendations, then they should see a minimum increase of 15% in sales for the recommended products compared to previous periods.

Users want to understand how the system calculates the recommendations and the sources of data it utilizes, ensuring transparency and trust in the recommendations provided.

Given a user queries the basis of the recommendations provided, when the system presents an explanation, then it should clearly outline the data sources (e.g., sales trends, inventory levels) and the AI algorithms used to generate these recommendations.

A user adjusts the inventory levels manually for specific products and wants to see how the Inventory Placement Recommendations adapt in real-time to these changes.

Given the user manually updates the inventory levels for selected products, when they refresh the Inventory Placement Recommendations, then the new placement suggestions should reflect these manual updates almost instantly (within 5 seconds).

A user requests the Inventory Placement Recommendations feature to generate suggestions during a peak sales period, when quick decisions are crucial for maintaining stock levels.

Given that it is a peak sales period, when a user activates the Inventory Placement Recommendations, then the system must deliver suggestions within 2 minutes to assist in rapid decision-making and inventory management.

A store owner is testing the Inventory Placement Recommendations in various store layouts to gauge its effectiveness across different environments.

Given that the inventory and sales data from multiple store layouts are provided, when the system analyzes this data, then the recommendations generated must be relevant and applicable to each distinct layout, demonstrating adaptability.

User-Friendly Dashboard Display

User Story: As a business owner, I want a dashboard that clearly shows my inventory and space utilization so that I can make quick decisions regarding my inventory management.
Description: The User-Friendly Dashboard Display requirement involves designing an intuitive dashboard that presents users with an overview of their storage and retail space utilization, as well as AR visualizations and recommendations. This dashboard will dynamically update in real-time, showcasing metrics such as available space, occupancy levels, and suggested layout changes based on the augmented reality inputs. The focus is on providing actionable insights and a seamless user experience, helping businesses make informed decisions quickly and effectively while reducing the complexity often associated with inventory management tools.
Acceptance Criteria: User opens the dashboard on InvenSage after a recent inventory check.

Given the user is logged into their InvenSage account, when they navigate to the User-Friendly Dashboard, then the dashboard should display an overview of storage space utilization, including available space and occupancy levels, within 2 seconds.

User utilizes the AR overlay feature to assess storage space.

Given the user activates the AR overlay feature while viewing their storage area, when the AR visualization loads, then it should accurately indicate available storage and provide recommendations for optimal inventory layout based on the current stock levels.

User checks the dashboard after making adjustments to their inventory layout.

Given the user has modified their storage layout according to the AR recommendations, when they refresh the dashboard, then it should dynamically update to reflect the new occupancy levels and any changes in available space within 1 minute.

User accesses the dashboard from a mobile device.

Given the user is on the mobile version of InvenSage, when they access the User-Friendly Dashboard, then the dashboard must be fully functional with responsive design, displaying all relevant metrics without any loss of information or display issues.

User seeks recommendations for optimizing retail displays during the peak season.

Given the current date is within the peak retail season, when the user views the dashboard, then it should provide tailored recommendations for inventory displays based on historical sales data and predictive analytics outcomes

User encounters data discrepancies between the dashboard and actual inventory counts.

Given the user suspects a data inconsistency, when they run a manual inventory audit, then the data displayed on the dashboard should match the actual counts within a 95% accuracy threshold after refreshing the data.

User reviews the historical data trends on the dashboard.

Given the user wants to analyze inventory trends, when they access the historical data section of the dashboard, then it should display appropriate graphs and visualizations for at least the past 12 months regarding occupancy levels and stock movements.

Virtual Layout Simulation

User Story: As a store designer, I want to simulate different layout options in a virtual space so that I can find the best arrangement for customer flow and product accessibility.
Description: The Virtual Layout Simulation requirement allows users to create and test different layout configurations in a simulated environment before applying changes to their physical spaces. This capability would leverage AR technology and user input to provide a realistic sense of how new setups would work. Users can experiment with different layouts to find optimal configurations that enhance product accessibility and customer engagement. This feature empowers users to innovate their retail space planning without the risk of disruption, enabling them to visualize potential impacts ahead of time.
Acceptance Criteria: User can simulate different layout configurations for their retail space using the Virtual Layout Simulation feature.

Given a user has access to the Virtual Layout Simulation, when they select a layout configuration and initiate the simulation, then they should see a realistic AR overlay of the layout within their actual space.

A user wants to evaluate the impact of a new layout on product accessibility.

Given a user has created a new layout configuration, when they run the simulation, then the system should provide feedback on product placement accessibility scores.

A user intends to test multiple layout configurations back-to-back for comparison.

Given a user has multiple layout configurations saved, when they select and simulate each layout in succession, then the application should swap between configurations without lag and accurately display each layout in the AR view.

User needs to save their layout simulations for future reference.

Given a user has finished simulating a layout, when they choose to save the simulation, then it should be stored in their account for later access with a clear status indicating it’s saved successfully.

User wants to share their layout simulation with team members for feedback.

Given a user has completed a layout simulation, when they select the share option, then a shareable link should be generated that allows other users to view the simulation without altering it.

User wants to edit an existing simulation to test new ideas.

Given a user has an existing simulation saved, when they select the edit option, then they should be able to modify the layout and re-run the simulation to see updated results.

User intends to access tutorial support while using the Virtual Layout Simulation feature.

Given a user is in the simulation interface, when they click on help or tutorial, then they should be presented with guided instructions and videos on how to effectively use the feature.

Historical Space Utilization Analytics

User Story: As an inventory analyst, I want to review historical data on space utilization so that I can understand trends and improve future space management strategies.
Description: The Historical Space Utilization Analytics requirement provides users with insights into their past space utilization trends and patterns. By collecting and visualizing historical data, this feature empowers businesses to identify peak times, product performance in relation to space management, and other key metrics over time. Users would benefit from understanding how previous decisions impact their current layout and inventory management practices, assisting in future planning and optimization efforts. This retrospective analysis helps inform strategic choices based on empirical data, enhancing overall inventory efficiency.
Acceptance Criteria: User reviews the historical space utilization analytics dashboard to assess the space utilization trends for the previous quarter and identifies which product categories performed best in relation to their storage space.

Given the user has access to the Historical Space Utilization Analytics dashboard, when they select the previous quarter's data, then they should see a visual representation of space utilization trends for product categories along with performance metrics.

A user wants to analyze how changes in layout during the peak season affected their inventory management decisions.

Given the user is on the Historical Space Utilization Analytics page, when they filter the data to include peak season, then they should be presented with a breakdown of layout changes and their impact on inventory levels during that time.

The user is preparing for an upcoming product launch and needs insights into past space usage to optimize the display of the new products.

Given the user is reviewing historical data for product launches, when they analyze past space utilization patterns, then they should receive recommendations for display optimization based on successful past strategies.

A business owner wishes to evaluate the correlation between space utilization and sales performance over the last year to make informed inventory investments.

Given the user accesses the analytics report, when they visualize space utilization alongside sales data for the past year, then they should see a clear correlation metric indicating the effectiveness of space usage on sales performance.

A retail manager wants to understand the long-term trends of space utilization in order to adjust their inventory forecasting practices.

Given the manager has historical utilization data, when they view the trends over a multi-year period, then they should be able to differentiate between seasonal patterns and overall utilization trends to inform forecasting.

A user is comparing space utilization metrics before and after a redesign of their retail space to measure the effectiveness of the changes.

Given the user accesses the historical data for two distinct periods before and after the redesign, when they run a comparison analysis, then they should clearly see improvements or declines in space utilization efficiency as measured by key performance indicators.

A user wants to export historical space utilization data to share with their team during a strategy meeting.

Given the user is on the Historical Space Utilization Analytics dashboard, when they choose to export the data, then they should successfully download a formatted report that is clear and easy to interpret for presentation purposes.

Real-Time Space Monitoring Notifications

User Story: As a stock controller, I want to set alerts for my inventory space so that I can act quickly if we approach capacity limits or notice issues with product placement.
Description: The Real-Time Space Monitoring Notifications requirement enables users to set up alerts for space utilization thresholds. Users will receive notifications if their storage or retail space is approaching maximum occupancy or if certain products are underperforming in their assigned locations. This proactive feature allows businesses to react swiftly to inventory changes and consumer behavior, maintaining optimal storage conditions and minimizing the risk of overstocking or stockouts. By facilitating timely responses based on real-time data, this requirement plays a vital role in improving operational agility.
Acceptance Criteria: Real-time notifications for storage space nearing capacity.

Given a user has set a storage space threshold of 80%, When the utilization reaches 75%, Then the user receives an alert notification.

Notifications for underperforming products in retail space.

Given a user has defined an underperformance threshold of 10 sales per week, When a product's sales fall below this threshold for two consecutive weeks, Then the user receives an underperformance notification.

User customization of notification settings for space alerts.

Given a user accesses the notification settings, When the user modifies the threshold values for space usage alerts, Then the changes are saved and reflected in the next notification trigger.

Real-time dashboard updates reflecting space utilization.

Given a user views the dashboard, When space utilization changes, Then the dashboard updates in real-time to reflect current utilization levels.

Email notifications for critical inventory management alerts.

Given a user has selected email as their notification method, When an alert threshold is reached, Then an email notification is sent to the user with the details of the alert.

Integration of alerts with mobile application for on-the-go management.

Given the user has the mobile application installed, When a notification is triggered, Then the user receives a push notification on their mobile device with relevant details.

Delivery Time Analytics

This feature provides a detailed breakdown of delivery times across different suppliers, comparing average lead times, delays, and punctuality rates. By visualizing this data, users can quickly identify reliable suppliers, enabling them to choose vendors that meet their timelines and avoid disruptions in their inventory flow.

Requirements

Supplier Delivery Time Tracking

User Story: As a supply chain manager, I want to track the delivery times of my suppliers so that I can select the most reliable ones and avoid inventory delays.
Description: This requirement involves implementing a system within InvenSage to track the delivery times of various suppliers. It will collect real-time data on lead times, delays, and punctuality rates to provide users with an aggregated view of supplier performance. The implementation will enable businesses to monitor and compare suppliers effectively, allowing them to make informed decisions based on their historical performance. By enhancing visibility into supplier reliability, this function aims to minimize disruptions in the inventory workflow, ultimately improving operational efficiency and customer satisfaction.
Acceptance Criteria: Tracking Delivery Times of Selected Suppliers for Recent Orders

Given the user selects specific suppliers and recent order data, when the user requests delivery time analytics, then the system should display the average lead time, delays, and punctuality rates for those suppliers within 5 seconds.

Comparative Analysis of Supplier Delivery Performance

Given a set of suppliers, when the user accesses the delivery time analytics dashboard, then the system should provide a visual comparison of each supplier's average delivery times and performance over the last 30 days, with clear indicators for those meeting or not meeting agreed timelines.

Receiving Notifications for Supplier Delays

Given that the user has defined acceptable delivery windows for suppliers, when a supplier exceeds the defined lead time for an order, then the system should send an automated alert to the user via email and/or on-platform notification within 10 minutes of identifying the delay.

Daily Summary of Supplier Delivery Performance

Given the user logs into the InvenSage platform, when accessing the Delivery Time Analytics feature, then the user should see a daily summary of supplier performance metrics, including average lead times and delays, updated by 8 AM every day.

Historical Analysis of Supplier Performance Over Time

Given the user selects a specific supplier and date range, when the user requests historical delivery performance data, then the system should generate a report detailing lead times, delays, and punctuality rates over the selected period, providing insights into trends and consistency.

Integration with Existing Order Management Systems

Given that the user has connected their order management system with InvenSage, when a new order is placed, then the delivery time tracking system should automatically update and reflect the delivery metrics of the corresponding supplier without manual intervention.

Delivery Visualization Dashboard

User Story: As a business owner, I want to see a visual representation of my suppliers' delivery times so that I can quickly assess their reliability and make strategic decisions.
Description: This requirement focuses on creating an intuitive dashboard feature that visualizes delivery time data in an easily digestible format. The dashboard will include graphs, charts, and tables that illustrate supplier performance metrics, enabling users to quickly identify trends in delivery reliability. By having this visualization, users can perform rapid comparisons, recognize patterns, and derive insights for strategic supplier selection. Making use of graphical representations will simplify complex data, making it accessible for all users regardless of their data analytics skills.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the delivery visualization dashboard to analyze supplier performance metrics for their shipments over the past month.

Given the user is on the delivery visualization dashboard, when they select the past month as the time filter, then they should see a line graph showing average delivery times for each supplier, along with a table listing supplier names and their corresponding average lead times.

User wishes to compare delivery performance of multiple suppliers based on punctuality rates over a specific period.

Given the user is on the delivery visualization dashboard, when they select multiple suppliers and a specific time period, then they should see a bar graph comparing the punctuality rates of each selected supplier for that time period.

User wants to visualize trends in delivery reliability over a quarter to make informed decisions on supplier selection.

Given the user is viewing the delivery visualization dashboard, when they filter the data to show the last quarter, then they should see a dashboard element that provides a summary of trends in delivery times with indicators for any significant delays or improvements for each supplier.

User intends to generate a report detailing supplier performance metrics to share with their management team.

Given the user is on the delivery visualization dashboard, when they click on the report generation button, then they should receive a downloadable report summarizing delivery performance metrics including average lead times, delays, and punctuality rates in PDF format.

User has a set of preferred suppliers and wants to focus only on their performance metrics.

Given the user has selected their preferred suppliers from the suppliers list, when they navigate back to the delivery visualization dashboard, then only the performance metrics for the selected preferred suppliers should be displayed on the dashboard.

User needs to quickly identify the suppliers with the worst delivery performance in the last week's data.

Given the user is on the delivery visualization dashboard, when they apply a filter for the last week and sort by delivery delay, then the suppliers should be listed with the worst performers on top, clearly indicating their delivery times and delays.

User wants to understand the total impact of supplier delays on inventory management.

Given the user is in the delivery visualization dashboard, when they select a time frame and view the summary statistics, then the system should display a metric indicating the total estimated cost incurred due to delayed deliveries from all suppliers during that selected time frame.

Alert System for Delivery Delays

User Story: As a warehouse manager, I want to receive alerts for delivery delays so that I can take immediate action to prevent stock shortages.
Description: This requirement proposes the development of an alert system that notifies users of any significant delivery delays from suppliers. The alerts will be customizable, allowing users to set thresholds for what constitutes a delay based on their unique business requirements. This proactive approach will ensure that businesses are informed in real-time, enabling them to take corrective actions swiftly, whether that be informing customers, adjusting inventory strategies, or contacting suppliers for resolution. The goal is to enhance communication and minimize the impact of delays on customer satisfaction and operational efficiency.
Acceptance Criteria: User sets a custom alert threshold for delivery delays from their preferred supplier and receives notifications based on this setting.

Given the user is logged into the InvenSage platform, when they set a threshold for delivery delays to 3 days, then they should receive an alert notification if any delivery from the selected supplier exceeds 3 days.

The alert system sends notifications for delivery delays to users in real-time.

Given that a supplier's delivery is delayed beyond the user-defined threshold, when this delay occurs, then the system must push a notification to the user's dashboard and send an email alert within 5 minutes of the delay being detected.

Users can view a history of delivery delay alerts within the alert system for analysis.

Given that delays have occurred in the past, when the user navigates to the alerts history section, then they should see a comprehensive list of all delivery delay alerts, including date, supplier, and delay duration.

Users can customize notification preferences for the alert system.

Given the user is in the settings menu for alerts, when they select different communication channels (e.g., email, SMS, in-app notifications) for receiving alerts, then their preferences should be saved and applied to future alerts.

The system integrates with existing inventory management processes after a delivery delay alert is raised.

Given a delivery delay alert is triggered, when the user chooses to act on the alert, then they should be able to automatically adjust their inventory levels or initiate contact with the supplier seamlessly through the platform.

Supplier Performance Historical Analysis

User Story: As a procurement specialist, I want to analyze historical performance data of my suppliers to make better-informed decisions regarding whom to partner with for future purchases.
Description: This requirement entails developing a feature that records and analyzes historical supplier performance over time, focusing on their delivery times, delays, and punctuality. By analyzing historical data, users can identify trends and patterns in supplier performance that can inform future supplier selection and negotiation strategies. This functionality will allow businesses to establish long-term relationships with high-performing suppliers and mitigate risks associated with underperforming vendors. Additionally, users will be able to use this data to forecast potential delivery issues based on past behaviors, enhancing their inventory management capability.
Acceptance Criteria: Supplier Performance Historical Analysis for Timely Deliveries

Given a supplier is selected, when the user views the delivery performance report, then the report must display historical delivery times, delays, and punctuality rates for the past 12 months, with data accuracy of 95% or higher.

Identifying Supplier Trends

Given the historical performance data is available, when the user analyzes the data for trends, then the system must highlight patterns of performance that meet or exceed defined benchmarks in delivery times and punctuality over the specified period.

Forecasting Potential Delivery Issues

Given the historical data of supplier performance is analyzed, when the user queries for potential delivery issues, then the system must generate alerts based on trends indicating a likelihood of future delays with at least a 75% probability of accuracy.

Vendor Selection Based on Performance Insights

Given historical performance data, when the user compares multiple suppliers, then the system must allow the user to filter and sort suppliers based on punctuality rates and average lead times, making high performers easily identifiable.

Visual Representation of Supplier Performance

Given the historical delivery performance data, when the user accesses the analytics dashboard, then the data must be visually represented in charts and graphs that effectively communicate performance metrics over time, ensuring clarity and ease of understanding.

User-Friendly Notification System for Supplier Performance

Given the performance data analysis is complete, when performance thresholds are breached (e.g., delays beyond 10%), then the system must send notifications to the designated user(s) to inform them of underperforming suppliers in real-time.

Quality Rating System

The Quality Rating System evaluates the quality of delivered goods based on user-defined criteria such as defect rates, customer complaints, and returns. This feature empowers users to monitor supplier performance closely, ensuring that only high-quality products are sourced, thus reducing wastage and improving customer satisfaction.

Requirements

User-Defined Quality Metrics

User Story: As a quality manager, I want to define my own quality metrics so that I can effectively evaluate supplier performance based on our specific requirements and standards.
Description: This requirement involves enabling users to define and customize their own quality metrics for evaluating received goods. Users can input specific criteria such as acceptable defect rates, thresholds for customer complaints, and limits for return rates. By providing this customizable framework, users gain the ability to tailor their quality assessment processes according to their unique business needs, enhancing the precision of supplier evaluation and product quality monitoring.
Acceptance Criteria: User Customizes Defect Rate Threshold

Given a user is on the quality metrics configuration page, when they input a maximum acceptable defect rate of 5%, then the system saves this threshold successfully for future evaluations.

User Inputs Customer Complaint Limits

Given a user has access to the quality metrics feature, when they set a limit of 10 customer complaints per 100 products, then this criteria is applied to the supplier evaluation process when assessing product quality.

User Defines Return Rate Limits

Given a user is defining their quality metrics, when they enter a return rate threshold of 2% in the system, then the threshold should be reflected in the quality rating calculations for products received from suppliers.

User Validates Custom Quality Metrics

Given a user has defined multiple custom quality metrics, when they review the applied metrics for a batch of received goods, then the system displays metrics including defect rate, customer complaints, and return rates accurately.

System Allows Multiple Quality Criteria Configurations

Given a user wishes to customize multiple quality criteria, when they add a new metric beyond existing ones, then the system permits the addition without errors and reflects all criteria on the quality metrics dashboard.

User Receives Alert on Quality Metric Breach

Given a user has set specific quality metrics, when any of those metrics are breached during a supplier evaluation, then the user receives an alert notification indicating the specific metric exceeded the defined threshold.

User Exports Quality Evaluation Data

Given a user has configured quality metrics and conducted evaluations, when they request to export the quality evaluation data, then the system generates a report including all defined metrics and their corresponding values for review.

Automated Quality Score Calculation

User Story: As an inventory analyst, I want the system to automatically calculate quality scores for our suppliers so that I can quickly assess their performance without conducting extensive manual reviews.
Description: This requirement involves creating a system that automatically calculates a quality score for each supplier based on the user-defined quality metrics. The system will aggregate data from various sources such as defect rates, returns, and customer feedback into a unified score, providing users with a quick and effective visual representation of supplier performance. This feature reduces the manual effort required for data analysis and helps in identifying high and low performing suppliers swiftly.
Acceptance Criteria: Supplier Quality Score Calculation upon Data Entry.

Given that a user inputs new data regarding defect rates, returns, and customer feedback for a supplier, when the user submits the data, then the system shall automatically calculate and display the updated quality score for that supplier within 5 seconds.

Historical Data Aggregation for Supplier Quality Rating.

Given that historical data for defect rates, returns, and customer feedback exists, when a user requests the quality score for a supplier, then the system shall aggregate this historical data and provide a quality score based on the last 12 months of data.

Quality Score Visualization on Dashboard.

Given a successfully calculated quality score for a supplier, when the user accesses the supplier performance dashboard, then the visual representation of the quality score should be displayed prominently and updated in real-time on the dashboard.

Threshold Alerting for Low Quality Scores.

Given that a supplier’s quality score drops below a pre-defined threshold set by the user, when the quality score is calculated, then the system shall trigger an alert notification to the user within 1 minute of the calculation.

User Customization of Quality Metrics.

Given that a user wants to define their own quality metrics, when the user provides the criteria for what constitutes quality (e.g., defect rates, feedback types), then those metrics should be saved and used in subsequent quality score calculations.

Supplier Comparison Based on Quality Scores.

Given that multiple suppliers have been evaluated, when a user selects the supplier comparison feature, then the system shall display a comparison of quality scores side-by-side for selected suppliers, allowing users to easily identify high and low performers.

Supplier Performance Dashboard

User Story: As a purchasing manager, I want to access a dashboard that displays supplier performance metrics so that I can make data-driven decisions regarding suppliers and product sourcing.
Description: This requirement focuses on the creation of a comprehensive dashboard that visually represents supplier performance metrics. The dashboard will provide real-time insights into quality ratings, defect rates, complaint frequencies, and other critical metrics in a user-friendly format. This feature allows users to monitor supplier performance effectively at a glance and make informed decisions about procurement and inventory management.
Acceptance Criteria: User views the Supplier Performance Dashboard to assess overall supplier performance before placing a large order.

Given that a user accesses the Supplier Performance Dashboard, when they select a specific supplier, then the dashboard should display the supplier's quality rating, defect rate, complaint frequency, and return rates accurately and in real-time.

Admin wants to compare performance metrics between two suppliers to determine which one to prioritize for future orders.

Given that an admin is on the Supplier Performance Dashboard, when they choose two suppliers for comparison, then the system should generate a side-by-side visual comparison of quality ratings and defects for both suppliers within 2 seconds.

A user needs to set specific thresholds for automatic alerts based on supplier performance metrics.

Given that a user is configuring supplier alert settings, when they set thresholds for defect rates and complaint frequencies, then the system must allow settings to be saved and trigger alerts when those thresholds are surpassed.

A retail manager reviews the dashboard for a summary of supplier performance over the last quarter.

Given that the retail manager selects the last quarter as the review period, when they access the Supplier Performance Dashboard, then the dashboard should compile and display performance metrics for that period without any data discrepancies.

A user wants to export supplier performance data for reporting purposes.

Given that a user is viewing the Supplier Performance Dashboard, when they choose the export option, then the system should successfully generate a downloadable report in CSV format containing the displayed metrics with no missing data.

A user wishes to see historical performance trends for a specific supplier on the dashboard.

Given that a user selects a specific supplier and requests historical data, when the dashboard loads, then it should show a visual trend graph of the supplier's performance metrics over the past year, including quality ratings and defect rates.

Alert System for Quality Issues

User Story: As a supply chain coordinator, I want to receive alerts when quality issues arise with a supplier so that I can promptly take action to mitigate risks and maintain product quality.
Description: This requirement entails developing an alert system that notifies users when quality issues occur with specific suppliers. Users will receive automated alerts via email or in-app notifications when thresholds for defect rates, customer complaints, or return rates are exceeded. This proactive feature allows users to address quality concerns in a timely manner, preventing potential inventory issues and enhancing customer satisfaction.
Acceptance Criteria: User receives a notification for quality issues when defect rates exceed the predefined threshold for a specific supplier.

Given the user has set quality thresholds, When the defect rate for a supplier exceeds the threshold, Then an email and in-app notification should be sent to the user.

User receives a notification when customer complaints exceed the predefined threshold for a specific supplier.

Given the user has established complaint thresholds, When customer complaints for a supplier exceed the threshold, Then an email and in-app notification should be triggered for the user.

User receives a notification when return rates for a supplier exceed a specified limit.

Given that return rate thresholds are defined by the user, When the return rate for a supplier exceeds this threshold, Then both an email and in-app notification should be dispatched to the user.

Users can view a log of all alerted quality issues for tracking.

Given quality alert notifications have been triggered, When the user accesses the alert log, Then they should see a complete history of all notifications generated with timestamps and details.

User can adjust the thresholds for quality alerts based on supplier performance reviews.

Given the user is in the quality settings section, When they modify the threshold values for defect rates, complaints, or returns, Then these newly set values should be saved and validated successfully for future notifications.

Users are able to enable or disable email and in-app notifications as per their preference.

Given the user is in the notification settings, When they choose to enable or disable notifications, Then this preference should be saved and applied correctly for future alert scenarios.

User can receive aggregate quality reports summarizing alerts over a specified timeframe.

Given the user requests a report for quality alerts, When the timeframe is specified, Then the user should receive a detailed report summarizing the quality alerts including defect rates, complaints, and returns within that period.

Supplier Comparison Tool

User Story: As a sourcing specialist, I want to compare multiple suppliers based on their quality ratings so that I can select the best supplier for my inventory needs.
Description: This requirement introduces a feature that allows users to compare supplier performance based on quality ratings side by side. Users can select multiple suppliers and view their quality scores, defect rates, and other relevant metrics on a comparison table. This functionality facilitates informed decision-making when choosing suppliers for products, contributing to overall better inventory quality.
Acceptance Criteria: User selects multiple suppliers from the inventory management interface to compare their quality ratings side by side in a comparison table.

Given multiple suppliers are available for selection, when the user selects at least two suppliers and clicks 'Compare', the system displays a comparison table showing quality scores, defect rates, and other relevant metrics for the selected suppliers.

User is viewing the supplier comparison table and wants to filter the results to show only suppliers with a defect rate below a certain threshold.

Given the user is on the supplier comparison table, when the user applies a filter for defect rates under a specified threshold, the system updates the table to display only those suppliers meeting the filter criteria.

User needs to download the comparison data for offline review after analyzing supplier performance.

Given the user has completed selecting suppliers and viewing the comparison table, when the user clicks the 'Download' button, the system generates a CSV file containing all relevant metrics displayed in the comparison table for the selected suppliers.

User wants to access help documentation about the Supplier Comparison Tool directly from the interface.

Given the user is on the supplier comparison interface, when the user clicks on the 'Help' icon, the system opens a modal with detailed help documentation including usage examples and frequently asked questions.

User reviews the supplier comparison and wishes to take action based on the ratings displayed in the comparison table.

Given the user is on the supplier comparison table with visible quality scores, when the user identifies a supplier with top performance, the system allows the user to click 'Proceed' to initiate a reorder for products from that supplier directly from the comparison table.

Historical Performance Tracking

User Story: As a strategic planner, I want to analyze the historical performance of our suppliers so that I can make informed decisions on renewing contracts or exploring new sourcing options.
Description: This requirement provides functionality for users to track and analyze the historical performance of suppliers over time. Users can view trends related to quality scores, defect rates, and complaints for specific suppliers, allowing for a longitudinal analysis of supplier performance. This capability supports strategic sourcing decisions by enabling users to evaluate whether a supplier is improving or deteriorating in quality over time.
Acceptance Criteria: User wants to analyze the supplier's historical quality performance over the past year to make informed sourcing decisions.

Given that the user is on the Historical Performance Tracking page, when they select a specific supplier and set the date range to the last year, then the system should display quality scores, defect rates, and customer complaints for each month within that range.

User requires evaluation of trends for suppliers to determine if they are improving or deteriorating in their quality ratings over time.

Given that the user is viewing a supplier's historical performance, when they access the trend analysis section, then the system should display a graphical representation showing the trajectory of quality scores, defect rates, and complaints over the selected time frame.

User wants to receive notifications for any significant drops in the quality scores of their suppliers.

Given that the user has subscribed to supplier quality notifications, when a supplier's quality score drops below a predefined threshold, then the system should send an alert email/message to the user notifying them of the change.

User needs to compare the historical performance of multiple suppliers to choose the best one.

Given that the user has selected multiple suppliers for comparison, when they access the comparison feature, then the system should present a side-by-side analysis of quality scores, defect rates, and complaints for the selected suppliers over the specified time duration.

User wants to generate a report of supplier performance over the last quarter to provide insights for a management review.

Given that the user selects a date range for the last quarter, when they click the 'Generate Report' button, then the system should create a downloadable report that includes key metrics on quality scores, defect rates, and customer complaints for all suppliers during that period.

Supplier Reliability Index

The Supplier Reliability Index consolidates various metrics, such as delivery consistency, quality scores, and communication responsiveness, into a single dashboard metric. This index allows businesses to quickly assess a supplier's overall reliability, facilitating smoother decision-making and procurement strategies.

Requirements

Supplier Analysis Dashboard

User Story: As a procurement manager, I want to see all supplier performance metrics on a single dashboard so that I can make informed decisions about my suppliers more quickly.
Description: The Supplier Analysis Dashboard will provide users with visual insights into various metrics associated with their suppliers, including delivery times, consistency ratings, quality scores, and communication responsiveness. This dashboard aims to consolidate multiple data points into a user-friendly interface, allowing users to quickly gauge supplier reliability and performance. The benefits include enhanced decision-making capabilities regarding supplier selection and improved procurement strategies, thus optimizing the inventory management process. Integration with existing supplier databases and data streams will enable real-time updates and a dynamic view of supplier performance.
Acceptance Criteria: Supplier Analysis Dashboard displays real-time data on supplier performance metrics for users when they access the dashboard.

Given the user is logged into the InvenSage platform, When the user navigates to the Supplier Analysis Dashboard, Then the dashboard should display real-time metrics such as delivery times, quality scores, and communication responsiveness for each supplier.

Users can filter suppliers based on specific performance metrics in the Supplier Analysis Dashboard.

Given the user is viewing the Supplier Analysis Dashboard, When the user applies filters for delivery consistency and quality scores, Then the dashboard should only display suppliers meeting the specified criteria.

The Supplier Reliability Index is calculated and displayed correctly on the Supplier Analysis Dashboard for each supplier.

Given the supplier data is updated in real-time, When the User views the Supplier Analysis Dashboard, Then the Supplier Reliability Index should reflect the correct calculated value based on the latest metrics of delivery consistency, quality scores, and communication responsiveness.

The Supplier Analysis Dashboard provides users with visual representations of supplier performance metrics.

Given the user is on the Supplier Analysis Dashboard, When the data is loaded, Then the dashboard should visually represent metrics through graphs and charts that are easy to understand and interpret.

Users receive alerts or notifications on the Supplier Analysis Dashboard when a supplier's performance drops below a threshold.

Given the performance thresholds are set for suppliers, When a supplier's performance metrics drop below these thresholds, Then the user should receive a notification alert within the dashboard about the supplier's performance issue.

The Supplier Analysis Dashboard integrates with existing supplier databases to ensure data accuracy.

Given the integration with supplier databases is active, When data is pulled for the Supplier Analysis Dashboard, Then the data displayed should reflect accurate and updated information from the integrated databases.

Automated Supplier Scoring System

User Story: As a supply chain analyst, I want an automated scoring system that evaluates supplier performance so that I can spend less time on manual data analysis and more time on improving supplier relationships.
Description: The Automated Supplier Scoring System will utilize an algorithm to continuously collect and analyze supplier performance data, awarding scores based on predefined criteria such as timely deliveries and quality ratings. This system will streamline the assessment process, reducing the manual labor needed for evaluations and allowing procurement teams to focus on strategic planning rather than data collection. By providing constant updates on scores, this feature enhances transparency within supplier relationships and aids in maintaining optimal supplier performance.
Acceptance Criteria: Supplier performance data is continuously collected and analyzed by the Automated Supplier Scoring System.

Given that the supplier performance data is updated daily, when the scoring algorithm processes this data, then the Supplier Reliability Index should reflect updated scores within 24 hours of data collection.

Procurement team accesses the Supplier Reliability Index dashboard to evaluate supplier performance.

Given that the procurement team has access to the dashboard, when they view the Supplier Reliability Index, then they should see a clear, consolidated score that includes delivery consistency, quality scores, and communication responsiveness metrics.

An alert system informs procurement teams of significant drops in supplier scores.

Given that the supplier score drops by 10% or more due to negative performance metrics, when the scoring system processes this change, then an alert should be generated and sent to the procurement team's email within one hour.

The system allows for manual overrides of supplier scores based on qualitative assessments.

Given that a procurement officer identifies a need for a manual score adjustment, when they input the new score for a supplier, then the manual adjustment should be reflected in the Supplier Reliability Index immediately and documented in the change log.

The scoring system generates monthly performance reports for each supplier.

Given that the performance evaluation cycle is complete, when the scoring system generates the monthly report, then it should include detailed metrics on delivery, quality, and overall score, and be available for download in PDF format.

Users can filter the Supplier Reliability Index by specific performance metrics.

Given that the procurement team requires insights on specific metrics, when they apply filters to the Supplier Reliability Index dashboard, then they should be able to view suppliers sorted by specific criteria such as delivery consistency or quality scores.

The algorithm is capable of integrating feedback from the procurement team to adjust scoring weights.

Given that the procurement team provides feedback on the current scoring weights, when the feedback is reviewed and approved, then the scoring algorithm should reflect these changes in the subsequent scoring cycle.

Supplier Feedback Mechanism

User Story: As a vendor relations manager, I want to gather feedback from suppliers about their experiences with our processes so that we can improve our operations and strengthen our relationships.
Description: The Supplier Feedback Mechanism will allow businesses to directly collect feedback from their suppliers regarding inventory levels, order processes, and any issues they encounter in the procurement cycle. This feature will create a two-way communication channel between businesses and suppliers, helping to address concerns proactively and improving overall supplier relationships. By analyzing feedback, companies can identify recurring issues and develop strategies to enhance supplier reliability and foster collaborative partnerships.
Acceptance Criteria: Supplier Feedback Submission Process

Given a supplier has access to the InvenSage platform, When they navigate to the feedback section, Then they should be able to submit feedback regarding inventory levels, order processes, and any issues they encountered with a success message displayed after submission.

Viewing Supplier Feedback Responses

Given the feedback has been submitted by a supplier, When a business user navigates to the feedback dashboard, Then they should be able to view all feedback entries, along with timestamps and supplier names, in a clear and organized manner.

Analyzing Feedback for Recurring Issues

Given multiple feedback entries have been collected, When a business user accesses the analytics section, Then they should see a visual report highlighting any recurring issues based on the feedback submitted.

Feedback Acknowledgment Notifications

Given feedback has been submitted by a supplier, When the business user acknowledges the feedback, Then the supplier should receive a notification confirming their feedback has been received and acknowledged.

Supplier Communication History Tracking

Given multiple feedback exchanges have occurred, When a business user views the communication history with a supplier, Then they should see all feedback submissions and responses tracked in chronological order.

Supplier Rating Based on Feedback

Given feedback has been submitted over a period, When the analytics tool calculates supplier reliability, Then it should automatically update the Supplier Reliability Index based on the feedback scores received.

Supplier Performance Historical Tracking

User Story: As a sourcing manager, I want to track historical supplier performance so that I can analyze trends over time and make strategic sourcing decisions based on reliable data.
Description: The Supplier Performance Historical Tracking feature will maintain a record of suppliers' performance over time, allowing users to view trends, improvements, or declines in reliability. This capability is crucial for businesses engaged in long-term relationships with suppliers, enabling deeper insights into supplier behavior, historical reliability, and the impact of changes in supplier management on performance. These insights will assist in making strategic decisions regarding supplier contracts and engagement.
Acceptance Criteria: Viewing Supplier Performance Trends Over Time

Given a user is logged into InvenSage, when they navigate to the Supplier Performance Historical Tracking dashboard, then they should see a graphical representation of supplier performance metrics over the selected time period, including trends in delivery consistency, quality scores, and communication responsiveness.

Analyzing Supplier Reliability Changes

Given a user selects a specific supplier from the list, when they access the detailed historical performance report, then they should be able to view changes in the Supplier Reliability Index alongside historical metrics, with annotated notes on any management changes.

Exporting Supplier Performance Reports

Given a user is on the Supplier Performance Historical Tracking page, when they choose to export a report, then the system should generate a downloadable CSV file containing all performance metrics for selected suppliers along with the chosen date range.

Setting Alerts for Supplier Performance Declines

Given a user has established thresholds for supplier performance metrics, when a supplier's performance falls below the defined threshold, then the system should automatically send an alert notification to the user’s inbox or dashboard.

Comparing Multiple Suppliers' Performance

Given a user has selected multiple suppliers for comparison, when they access the comparison feature, then they should see a side-by-side display of performance metrics including historical Reliability Indices, quality scores, and delivery times.

Identifying Supplier Improvement Opportunities

Given a user has accessed a supplier's historical performance report, when they select the 'Analyze Improvement Opportunities' option, then the system should provide actionable insights and recommendations based on historical data trends.

Supplier Comparison Tool

User Story: As a business owner, I want to compare different suppliers based on their reliability metrics so that I can choose the best supplier for my needs based on data rather than gut feelings.
Description: The Supplier Comparison Tool will allow users to compare multiple suppliers side-by-side based on their reliability metrics such as delivery times, quality scores, and communication responsiveness. This functionality enables businesses to make data-driven selections when choosing suppliers, considering critical performance metrics in their decision-making processes. The tool will enhance clarity and transparency in supplier selection and support effective negotiations by providing concrete, comparative data.
Acceptance Criteria: Users need to access the Supplier Comparison Tool to evaluate potential suppliers before placing an order, ensuring they select the most reliable option based on specific reliability metrics.

Given that the user is on the Supplier Comparison Tool, when they select multiple suppliers from the supplier list, then the tool should display a side-by-side comparison of reliability metrics including delivery times, quality scores, and communication responsiveness.

A user wants to identify the supplier with the highest reliability rating for a specific product category during the evaluation process.

Given that users have accessed the Supplier Comparison Tool, when they filter suppliers by product category, then the tool should highlight the supplier with the highest overall reliability score for that category based on the selected metrics.

In a scenario where a user wants to export the comparison results for further analysis or sharing with stakeholders, they must have the ability to do so directly from the tool.

Given that the user has completed a supplier comparison, when they click the export button, then the system should generate a downloadable report in CSV format that includes all selected reliability metrics.

Users often look for historical data to understand how supplier reliability metrics have changed over time, which aids in long-term decision making.

Given that the user accesses the Supplier Comparison Tool, when they request historical data, then the tool should display an option to view reliability metrics over the past 12 months for each selected supplier.

Users may want to prioritize suppliers who meet a minimum reliability score threshold when making decisions regarding partnerships.

Given that the user is using the Supplier Comparison Tool, when they set a minimum reliability score threshold, then the tool should filter the displayed suppliers to only show those who meet or exceed this threshold.

Users may need assistance while using the Supplier Comparison Tool, requiring a clear guide on how to leverage the functionalities effectively.

Given that the user is on the Supplier Comparison Tool, when they click on the help icon, then the tool should display a comprehensive guide or tutorial on how to use the comparison features.

To maintain up-to-date comparisons, the system should regularly update the reliability metrics of suppliers based on the latest data available.

Given that the Supplier Comparison Tool is integrated with supplier data sources, when new data is available, then the tool should auto-update the reliability metrics displayed for each supplier every 24 hours.

Customizable Supplier Reports

Customizable Supplier Reports enable users to tailor the reporting format to meet specific business needs, including metrics relevant to their operations. This feature allows stakeholders to focus on the KPIs that matter most to them, improving clarity in supplier performance assessments and enhancing communication across teams.

Requirements

Dynamic Report Generation

User Story: As a supplier manager, I want to generate customized reports that focus on the metrics that matter to my business so that I can assess supplier performance more effectively and communicate insights to my team.
Description: The Dynamic Report Generation requirement will allow users to create custom reports by selecting the specific data points and metrics relevant to their business needs. Users will have the ability to choose different formats (e.g., charts, tables) and include or exclude sections based on their preferences. This feature will enhance decision-making by presenting information in a way that is tailored to each user's unique requirements, ultimately leading to more informed supplier performance reviews and deeper insights into supplier relationships.
Acceptance Criteria: User initiates the report generation process to create a supplier performance report using the Dynamic Report Generation feature by selecting data points relevant to their business needs.

Given the user is on the report generation page, when they select the desired data points and metrics, then a report preview should be generated displaying the selected information correctly and in real-time.

User modifies an existing report to adjust the visual format from a table to a chart in the Dynamic Report Generation feature.

Given the user has an existing report, when they change the report format to a chart, then the system should update the visual representation seamlessly, maintaining data integrity.

User saves a custom report after generating it, to access it later for supplier performance assessments.

Given the user has generated a report, when they click on the save button, then the report should be stored in the user’s profile with the correct name and accessible from the saved reports section.

User views a summary of the key performance indicators (KPIs) included in a generated custom report.

Given the user has generated a report, when they navigate to the summary section of the report, then the KPIs should accurately reflect the selected metrics and data points from the report.

User applies filters to customize the data displayed in their supplier report during the dynamic report generation process.

Given the user has selected filters for the report and applies them, when the report is generated, then only the data that matches the filters should be included in the report output.

User shares a generated report with a team member via email directly from the Dynamic Report Generation feature.

Given the user has generated a report, when they select the share option and enter the team member’s email, then the report should be successfully sent to the specified email address in the correct format.

Scheduled Report Delivery

User Story: As a procurement officer, I want to receive automated reports on supplier performance every week so that I can focus on strategic planning instead of manual report generation.
Description: The Scheduled Report Delivery requirement will enable users to automate the delivery of customized reports on a preset schedule (daily, weekly, monthly). This functionality will ensure that relevant stakeholders receive their performance assessments without the need for manual generation each time. By automating this process, teams can maintain regular communication and stay informed about supplier performance, freeing up time for more strategic analysis rather than administrative tasks.
Acceptance Criteria: Scheduled Report Delivery for Weekly Performance Assessments

Given a user specifies report parameters for suppliers, When the report schedule is set to weekly, Then the system should automatically generate and send the report to designated email recipients every week without requiring manual intervention.

Customization of Report Content Prior to Scheduling

Given a user customizes the content of a supplier report, When the user saves these settings, Then the system should retain the customized report settings correctly for future scheduled deliveries.

Choosing Report Delivery Time

Given a user schedules a report delivery, When the user selects a specific time for report delivery, Then the system will ensure the report is sent out at the user-defined time consistently according to the configured scheduling frequency.

Delivery of Reports in Various Formats

Given a user sets up a scheduled report, When the user selects the report format (PDF, Excel), Then the system will deliver the customized report in the chosen format as specified in the schedule.

Error Handling for Failed Report Deliveries

Given a scheduled report fails to deliver, When the report delivery fails, Then the system should send a notification to the user detailing the reason for failure and provide remediation steps.

User Notification of Scheduled Report Enabling

Given an administrator sets up scheduled report deliveries for users, When the setup is completed, Then the system should notify all relevant users that their reports have been scheduled successfully.

Report Delivery Log for Audit and Tracking

Given scheduled report deliveries, When reports are delivered, Then the system should maintain a log of all delivered reports indicating time, date, recipients, and any errors encountered.

Multi-Supplier Comparison Tool

User Story: As a business analyst, I want to compare multiple suppliers’ performance metrics in one report so that I can make data-driven decisions on which suppliers to prioritize for future engagements.
Description: The Multi-Supplier Comparison Tool requirement will provide users with the ability to compare performance metrics across multiple suppliers in a single report. Users will be able to select different suppliers and visualize comparative data on metrics such as delivery time, quality, and pricing. This feature will assist businesses in making more informed decisions about supplier selection and management by offering side-by-side insights into performance.
Acceptance Criteria: User needs to generate a comparison report for three suppliers to assess their delivery times, quality ratings, and prices in the upcoming quarterly review meeting.

Given the user has selected three different suppliers, When the user clicks on 'Generate Report', Then a comparison report should display delivery times, quality ratings, and pricing side-by-side for all selected suppliers.

A user wants to customize the metrics included in the supplier comparison report based on specific business requirements before presenting it to the stakeholders.

Given the user is on the Customizable Supplier Reports page, When the user selects or deselects metrics such as delivery time, quality, and pricing, Then the report should update in real-time to reflect the selected metrics.

An operations manager needs to compare supplier performance over the last quarter to identify the best supplier for a new product line.

Given a specified time frame of the last quarter is set, When the comparison report is generated, Then it must display accurate historical performance data for each supplier for the selected time period.

A user must share the supplier comparison report with team members via email after generating it.

Given the supplier comparison report is successfully generated, When the user clicks on the 'Share via Email' button and enters valid email addresses, Then the report should be sent to the specified email addresses with the correct report attachment.

A user wants to save a specific supplier comparison report configuration for future use.

Given the user has created a comparison report with selected suppliers and specific metrics, When the user clicks on 'Save Configuration', Then the settings should be saved and retrievable under the user's profile for future report generation.

Ad-hoc Reporting Capabilities

User Story: As a financial controller, I want to create ad-hoc reports whenever I have new questions so that I can quickly get the information I need to support key decisions.
Description: The Ad-hoc Reporting Capabilities requirement will allow users to create on-the-fly reports without predefined templates. This flexibility will enable stakeholders to analyze specific data sets as questions arise in real-time. This requirement aims to empower users to cater reports to immediate needs without being constrained by fixed reporting structures, enhancing agility and responsiveness to data insights.
Acceptance Criteria: User desires to generate a report for supplier performance metrics during their weekly sales meeting.

Given a user is logged into the InvenSage platform, when they select the 'Ad-hoc Reporting' option and choose relevant data points for suppliers, then the system should allow them to generate a customized report based on their selections in real-time.

A manager needs to analyze stock levels and order frequency to adjust procurement strategies based on recent sales data and supplier efficiency.

Given a manager is on the reporting dashboard, when they select specific parameters such as date range, supplier name, and item categories, then they should be able to generate a report that reflects the selected criteria without using any predefined templates.

Operations team wants to assess the performance of multiple suppliers after receiving customer feedback about product delivery times.

Given the operations team has access to the supplier metrics module, when they create an ad-hoc report by incorporating feedback data alongside supplier statistics, then the report should accurately display the combined information for informed decision-making.

A user needs to conduct a deep-dive analysis of supplier responsiveness during a stock-out incident to identify improvement areas.

Given a user has identified a stock-out issue, when they generate an ad-hoc report that includes response times and stock levels from suppliers, then the report should provide a detailed view allowing the user to evaluate supplier performance during the incident period.

The finance team is reviewing supplier costs against the sales revenue generated for each supplier to identify cost-saving opportunities.

Given the finance team requires real-time data analysis, when they utilize the ad-hoc reporting feature to pull cost and revenue data, then the system should produce a report that allows them to compare supplier costs with revenues effortlessly.

A user wants to create a visual report representing the highest performing suppliers based on specific KPIs for a quarterly review.

Given the user is in the report generation interface, when they select KPIs such as 'on-time delivery' and 'product quality' from dynamic filters, then the report should visually represent these KPIs through graphs or charts as part of the ad-hoc reporting functionality.

Interactive Dashboard Integration

User Story: As a marketing manager, I want an interactive dashboard that visualizes supplier performance data so that I can quickly identify trends and areas that require attention.
Description: The Interactive Dashboard Integration requirement will introduce an interactive dashboard that visualizes supplier report data with charts, graphs, and trend indicators. Users will be able to drill down into specific metrics and filter data dynamically. This integration will provide a high-level overview at a glance while allowing detailed investigations into data points, making performance assessments more intuitive and engaging.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the interactive dashboard to view supplier performance metrics after recent order deliveries.

Given the user is logged into the InvenSage platform, when they navigate to the interactive dashboard, then they should see visual representations (charts, graphs) of supplier performance metrics, including delivery timelines and order quantities.

User applies dynamic filters on the interactive dashboard to customize supplier reports based on specific time frames and supplier selections.

Given the user is viewing the supplier report data on the interactive dashboard, when they apply filters for specific suppliers and select a custom date range, then the data displayed should refresh to reflect only the selected metrics while retaining the visual format.

User drills down into specific metrics of a supplier report to understand performance trends over the last quarter.

Given the user clicks on a specific data point (e.g., delivery accuracy) in the interactive dashboard, when detailed metrics for that supplier are displayed, then the user should be able to view a trend line graph showing performance over the last quarters and relevant KPIs.

Dashboard loads and displays relevant supplier report data in less than two seconds after user input.

Given the user has entered valid inputs and requests for the interactive dashboard information, when the dashboard processes the request, then the loading time should not exceed two seconds.

User receives notifications for unusual supplier performance trends integrated within the dashboard.

Given the user has set up alert preferences for supplier performance, when an unusual trend occurs (e.g., a sudden drop in delivery quality), then the dashboard should visually indicate this change and send a notification to the user.

User generates a PDF report of the customizable supplier data displayed on the interactive dashboard.

Given the user is satisfied with the data displayed on the interactive dashboard, when they select to export this data as a PDF, then the system should create a PDF report that matches the current view and settings of the dashboard.

User evaluates data and engages in discussions based on supplier performance displayed in the interactive dashboard during a team meeting.

Given the user transitions from viewing the dashboard to a team meeting setup, when they present the data from the interactive dashboard, then stakeholders should be able to understand key performance metrics and contribute feedback immediately.

Export Options for Reporting Formats

User Story: As a project manager, I want to export supplier reports into different formats so that I can share them easily with team members and stakeholders who may prefer different file types.
Description: The Export Options for Reporting Formats requirement will enable users to export customizable supplier reports into various formats such as PDF, Excel, and CSV. This functionality will facilitate data sharing and further analysis outside the platform, ensuring that users can easily distribute information to stakeholders who may not have access to InvenSage, thus enhancing collaboration.
Acceptance Criteria: User needs to export a supplier report to PDF format for a presentation during a quarterly review meeting with stakeholders.

Given that the user has generated a customizable supplier report, when the user selects the 'Export as PDF' option, then the system should generate a PDF file of the report that can be downloaded and opened without errors.

User wants to share supplier report data with their accounting team utilizing an Excel format for further analysis.

Given that the user has completed a supplier report, when the user chooses to export the report as Excel, then the system should create an Excel file that accurately reflects all data and is formatted correctly for easy analysis.

A user intends to send a supplier report via email in CSV format for integration with another software system used by their team.

Given that the user has finalized the supplier report, when the user selects the 'Export as CSV' option, then the system should successfully generate a CSV file that aligns with standard CSV formatting for seamless integration with other systems.

The user customizes the supplier report by adding specific KPIs relevant to their business needs prior to exporting.

Given that the user has added KPIs to the report, when the user exports the report, then the exported document must include all customized KPIs and reflect the latest data accurately.

The user needs to confirm the format compatibility of exported reports with third-party applications before finalizing their supplier evaluation process.

Given that the user exports a supplier report, when the report is opened in a third-party application, then the data should display correctly without any loss or modification of the original data structure.

Multiple users within an organization require access to the same supplier report exported in different formats for various purposes.

Given that the report is available for export, when multiple users request different formats simultaneously, then the system should handle the export requests concurrently without performance degradation or errors.

Supplier Performance Comparison

This feature enables users to compare multiple suppliers side-by-side across various key performance indicators (KPIs). By visualizing differences in delivery times, quality, and reliability, businesses can make data-driven choices about vendor management, ultimately leading to more strategic procurement decisions.

Requirements

Supplier KPI Dashboard

User Story: As a procurement manager, I want to access a dashboard that visualizes supplier KPIs so that I can quickly assess supplier performance and make informed decisions about vendor selection.
Description: The Supplier KPI Dashboard provides a visual, user-friendly interface that enables users to view and analyze key performance indicators (KPIs) for multiple suppliers. Users can dynamically select KPIs such as delivery times, order accuracy, and quality ratings, allowing for quick comparisons. This dashboard will help businesses identify top-performing suppliers and those that require improvement. Integration with existing supplier data ensures real-time updates, enhancing the accuracy of comparisons and facilitating strategic vendor management decisions.
Acceptance Criteria: User views the Supplier KPI Dashboard to compare delivery times of three selected suppliers for a particular product category.

Given the Supplier KPI Dashboard is open, when the user selects three suppliers and the delivery time KPI, then the dashboard should display the delivery times for all three suppliers side-by-side.

User filters and sorts supplier KPIs to identify those with the highest quality ratings for a specific product line.

Given the Supplier KPI Dashboard is open, when the user applies a filter for quality ratings and sorts suppliers in descending order, then the top three suppliers should be displayed based on their quality ratings.

User accesses real-time updates on supplier KPIs for informed decision-making in vendor management.

Given the Supplier KPI Dashboard is open, when new supplier data is received, then the dashboard should automatically update the displayed KPIs without needing a page refresh.

User compares multiple suppliers based on order accuracy, identifying suppliers needing improvement.

Given the Supplier KPI Dashboard is open, when the user selects four suppliers and the order accuracy KPI, then the dashboard should indicate which suppliers fall below a defined accuracy threshold.

User prints the Supplier KPI Dashboard for a scheduled procurement meeting.

Given the Supplier KPI Dashboard is displayed, when the user selects the print function, then the dashboard should print with accurate KPI values and labels as seen on the screen.

User seeks help using the Supplier KPI Dashboard to interpret KPIs effectively.

Given the Supplier KPI Dashboard is open, when the user clicks on the help icon, then a tooltip or help modal should display definitions and explanations of each KPI used in the dashboard.

Automated Supplier Alerts

User Story: As a warehouse manager, I want to receive alerts when supplier performance drops below acceptable levels so that I can quickly address potential issues before they impact my operations.
Description: Automated Supplier Alerts notify users of significant changes in supplier performance metrics in real-time. Users can set thresholds for KPIs, such as delivery delays or quality issues, and receive notifications via email or in-app alerts when these thresholds are crossed. This functionality ensures that procurement teams can proactively address supplier performance issues and maintain operational efficiency. Integration with the existing alert system enhances user experience and ensures timely responses to supplier-related challenges.
Acceptance Criteria: User sets a delivery delay threshold for a supplier within the InvenSage platform.

Given a supplier is selected, When the user sets a delivery delay threshold of 5 days, Then the system should send an email and an in-app alert to the user if the delivery exceeds 5 days.

User configures alert settings for quality issues with a specific supplier.

Given a supplier's quality KPI is set to a threshold of 80% quality rating, When the supplier's quality rating falls below 80%, Then the user receives both an email notification and an in-app alert informing them of the quality issue.

User wishes to modify the existing thresholds for automated alerts.

Given the user is on the alert settings page, When the user adjusts the delivery delay threshold from 5 days to 4 days and saves the changes, Then the system should confirm the updates and ensure the new threshold is applied to future notifications.

User needs to receive alerts on multiple suppliers simultaneously.

Given multiple suppliers have been selected with set performance thresholds, When any of the suppliers crosses their respective thresholds, Then the user receives a consolidated alert displaying all relevant supplier performance issues in a single notification.

User tests the functionality of the automated alerts after configuration.

Given the user's alert configuration is set, When the supplier meets the condition for triggering an alert, Then the user should receive both an email and in-app alert within 5 minutes of the condition being met.

User wants to ensure alerts are integrated with existing alert systems.

Given the user's alert settings are configured, When the alerts are triggered, Then these alerts should be correctly logged in the existing alert management system without any data loss.

User looks for historical alert records for supplier performance issues.

Given the user navigates to the alert history section, When the user filters by date and supplier, Then the system should display all relevant historical alerts accurately corresponding to the filters applied.

Supplier Comparison Report Generation

User Story: As a business analyst, I want to generate customizable reports that compare supplier performance so that I can provide insights to management to aid in better purchasing decisions.
Description: The Supplier Comparison Report Generation feature allows users to create comprehensive reports comparing supplier performance across selected KPIs. Users can customize the report parameters and choose specific timeframes for analysis. The reports can be exported in various formats, such as PDF and Excel, making it easy to share insights with stakeholders. This feature enhances transparency in vendor performance evaluation and aids in making data-driven procurement decisions.
Acceptance Criteria: Supplier Comparison Report for Quarterly Review Meeting

Given the user selects multiple suppliers and KPIs for the last quarter, when the user initiates the report generation, then the system generates a report containing a side-by-side comparison of selected suppliers with accurate data and visualizations.

Exporting Supplier Comparison Reports

Given the user has generated a supplier comparison report, when the user selects the export option, then the system allows exporting the report in PDF and Excel formats without data loss or formatting issues.

Customizing Report Parameters

Given the user is on the report generation page, when the user selects different KPIs and timeframes, then the system updates the report preview in real time to reflect the newly selected parameters.

Accessing Historical Supplier Data

Given the user opts to create a report using historical data, when the user specifies a date range, then the system retrieves and displays accurate performance data from within the specified range.

User Permissions for Report Access

Given that the system has multiple user roles, when a user without report generation permissions attempts to access this feature, then the system denies access and displays a relevant error message.

Visualizations in Reports

Given the user has successfully generated a supplier comparison report, when viewing the report, then all visual comparisons (graphs, charts) must correctly display the data as intended, allowing for easy comprehension of supplier performance.

Historical Performance Tracking

User Story: As a strategic sourcing manager, I want to track the historical performance of suppliers so that I can identify trends and make long-term strategic decisions about whom to partner with.
Description: The Historical Performance Tracking feature enables users to view and analyze the historical KPI data of suppliers over time. Users can identify trends, evaluate improvements or declines in supplier performance, and make comparisons against market standards. This ability to track changes over time allows businesses to make more informed decisions regarding supplier relationships and procurement strategies. Integration with the existing analytics platform ensures seamless access to historical data.
Acceptance Criteria: Supplier historical performance data analysis for Q1 2025.

Given that the user has selected a specific supplier and set the date range to Q1 2025, when they click on the 'View Historical Data' button, then the system should display the supplier's KPIs for delivery times, quality, and reliability in a clear, visual format.

Comparison of multiple suppliers' historical performance.

Given that the user has selected multiple suppliers to compare, when they access the 'Supplier Performance Comparison' page, then the system should present a side-by-side comparison chart showing key performance indicators for each selected supplier over the chosen date range.

Trend analysis of supplier performance over the last year.

Given that the user has set the date range to the last year, when they navigate to the 'Trend Analysis' section, then the system should generate visual graphs depicting the trends for each KPI of the selected supplier, allowing users to easily identify performance improvements or declines.

Exporting supplier performance reports.

Given that the user has selected a supplier and specified the date range, when they click on the 'Export Report' option, then the system should generate a downloadable report in PDF format that includes all relevant KPI data and graphs for the selected supplier and date range.

Integration of historical data with analytics platform.

Given that the user is logged into the InvenSage platform, when they access the historical performance tracking feature, then the system should seamlessly pull historical KPI data from the analytics platform without any data discrepancies or delays.

User notifications for significant supplier performance changes.

Given that the system tracks supplier performance, when there is a significant change (e.g., a 20% decline in delivery quality), then the user should receive an automated notification alerting them to the change so they can take action.

Evaluating supplier performance against market standards.

Given that the user selects the 'Market Comparison' feature, when they input the relevant market standards, then the system should provide a comparative analysis of the selected supplier's performance against these standards with clear visualizations.

Mobile Compatibility for Supplier Insights

User Story: As a mobile user in the field, I want to access supplier performance data on my smartphone so that I can make quick procurement decisions while away from my desk.
Description: The Mobile Compatibility for Supplier Insights feature ensures that the supplier performance comparison tools are fully accessible via mobile devices. Users can view KPIs and dashboards on-the-go, enabling them to stay up-to-date with supplier performance from anywhere. This functionality increases user engagement and ensures timely decision-making, particularly in dynamic retail environments where inventory decisions are crucial. The integration of responsive design will improve user experience across devices.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the Supplier Performance Comparison feature on a mobile device while at a trade show to evaluate different suppliers.

Given the user is on a mobile device, when they access the Supplier Performance Comparison feature, then the KPI dashboards should be fully accessible and visually coherent without requiring horizontal scrolling.

A user with limited connectivity attempts to compare suppliers using the mobile application.

Given the user is in an area with low mobile data connectivity, when they open the Supplier Performance Comparison page, then the data should load efficiently, displaying cached information as needed to ensure usability.

Retail store managers need to make procurement decisions during a meeting while accessing supplier performance metrics on mobile.

Given the user is in a meeting accessing the mobile application, when they navigate to the Supplier Performance Comparison feature, then they should be able to filter suppliers by various KPIs easily and see real-time performance metrics.

A user receives an alert notification on their mobile when suppliers' performance metrics change significantly.

Given the user has enabled notifications on their mobile device, when there are any significant changes in supplier performance metrics, then the user should receive a push notification within one hour of the change.

A user shares their performance comparison findings with team members using the mobile application.

Given the user is in the Supplier Performance Comparison section, when they select the 'Share Report' feature, then the report should be sharable via email or messaging app, maintaining the integrity of the KPIs displayed.

A user wants to customize their view of supplier performance metrics on their mobile device.

Given the user is on the mobile Supplier Performance Comparison page, when they select the 'Customize View' option, then they should be able to add or remove KPIs and save the customized layout for future use.

Real-time Alert System

The Real-time Alert System notifies users immediately when a supplier's performance metrics fall below predefined thresholds, such as delivery delays or quality issues. This proactive approach ensures that supply chain analysts can address potential disruptions before they impact inventory levels, maintaining operational efficiency.

Requirements

Threshold Definition Management

User Story: As a supply chain analyst, I want to set specific performance thresholds for our suppliers so that I can receive alerts tailored to our operational needs and respond effectively to potential issues.
Description: This requirement encompasses the ability for users to define and customize thresholds for performance metrics such as delivery times and product quality. By allowing users to set their specific criteria, the system enables a tailored approach that aligns with the unique operational standards of each business. The importance of this feature lies in its role in establishing clear performance expectations, which will directly influence the effectiveness of the Real-time Alert System. Customizable thresholds ensure that alerts are relevant and actionable, improving the response rate to supply chain disruptions and maintaining high inventory standards.
Acceptance Criteria: User sets delivery time threshold for a specific supplier based on historical performance data.

Given an active user session, when the user navigates to the Threshold Definition Management page, then they should be able to create a new threshold for delivery time and save it successfully.

User modifies an existing threshold for product quality metrics after receiving feedback from team members.

Given an existing threshold is displayed, when the user edits the threshold for product quality and saves the changes, then the updated threshold should be reflected in the system.

User attempts to set a threshold outside of acceptable range limits defined by the system.

Given the threshold limits are set by the system, when the user tries to input a threshold value that exceeds these limits, then an error message should be displayed indicating that the value is invalid.

User views the active thresholds set for all suppliers in a dashboard.

Given the user navigates to the Dashboard page, when they select the option to view active thresholds, then all relevant thresholds should be displayed clearly along with supplier names and performance metrics.

System alerts the user when performance metrics fall below the defined thresholds.

Given a defined threshold for delivery time, when a supplier's performance fails to meet this threshold, then an alert notification should be sent to the user in real-time.

User generates a report on threshold performance metrics over the past month.

Given the reporting functionality is available, when the user selects a specific timeframe and generates a report, then the system should produce a detailed report on threshold adherence and performance metrics.

Supplier Performance Dashboard

User Story: As a supply chain manager, I want a visual dashboard that displays real-time metrics of our suppliers' performance so that I can quickly assess their reliability and take necessary actions to mitigate risks.
Description: This requirement involves creating a comprehensive dashboard that visually represents supplier performance metrics in real-time. The dashboard will aggregate data related to delivery times, quality ratings, and historical performance trends, allowing users to monitor supplier reliability at a glance. This visualization supports quicker decision-making, enables users to identify problematic suppliers early, and enhances overall supply chain transparency. By integrating with the existing inventory management system, the dashboard serves as a critical tool for supply chain analysts to proactively address supplier-related issues.
Acceptance Criteria: Supplier Performance Dashboard displays real-time supplier data for supply chain analysts.

Given that the user is logged into the InvenSage platform, when they navigate to the Supplier Performance Dashboard, then the dashboard should display current metrics for all suppliers, including delivery times and quality ratings, updated at least every 5 minutes.

Notification of suppliers underperforming on key metrics.

Given that the Supplier Performance Dashboard is active, when a supplier's delivery time exceeds the predefined threshold, then an alert should be generated and sent to the supply chain analyst's inbox immediately.

Historical performance trends should be accurately visualized on the dashboard.

Given that the user selects a specific supplier from the dashboard, when they view the historical performance metrics, then the dashboard should display a line graph of delivery times and quality ratings over the last 12 months without errors.

Dashboard must integrate with existing inventory management systems.

Given that the dashboard is implemented, when the inventory management system is queried for supplier data, then the dashboard should pull in accurate and relevant data without lag or discrepancies.

The dashboard should allow filtering and sorting of suppliers based on performance metrics.

Given that the user is on the Supplier Performance Dashboard, when they apply filters for delivery times and quality ratings, then the dashboard should accurately update to display only the suppliers meeting the selected criteria in less than 3 seconds.

User access and security for the dashboard need to be confirmed.

Given that the dashboard contains sensitive supplier performance data, when a non-authorized user attempts to access the dashboard, then they should be denied access and redirected to an error page with a message indicating insufficient privileges.

Automated Alert Notifications

User Story: As a supply chain analyst, I want to receive real-time alerts through my preferred channels when a supplier's performance drops below acceptable levels so that I can respond promptly to potential supply chain disruptions.
Description: This requirement focuses on implementing an automated alert system that notifies users via multiple channels such as email, SMS, or in-app notifications when performance metrics fall below set thresholds. By ensuring timely communication, users can swiftly address any identified issues without delay. This capability enhances operational efficiency by minimizing manual monitoring and allowing supply chain analysts to focus on strategic decisions rather than reactive measures. The automated notifications will be customizable, enabling users to choose their preferred communication methods, thereby improving user experience and satisfaction.
Acceptance Criteria: User receives a notification when the delivery time of a supplier exceeds the acceptable threshold during a high-demand season.

Given that the delivery time threshold is set to 3 days, When a supplier takes longer than 3 days to deliver, Then the user should receive an automated alert via email and SMS.

User customizes alert preferences for different performance metrics, such as quality issues and delivery delays.

Given that the user is in the alert settings section, When the user selects preferred communication channels for quality issues as 'In-App' and delivery delays as 'Email', Then these settings should be saved and reflected in the user's profile.

A supply chain analyst checks the alert system for triggered notifications concerning supplier performance.

Given that there are pending alerts due to suppliers failing thresholds, When the analyst accesses the notification dashboard, Then the alerts should be displayed with clear descriptions of the issues and affected suppliers.

System logs are generated for every automated alert sent out to the users.

Given that an automated alert is sent, When the alert is triggered, Then a log entry should be created that includes the timestamp, alert type, and user details.

User receives multiple alerts in different channels for the same performance issue.

Given that a single performance metric falls below the threshold, When an alert is triggered, Then the user should receive notifications through all selected channels simultaneously.

User tests the alert system by simulating a supplier performance issue.

Given that a test condition for supplier delay is set up, When the condition is triggered, Then the user should receive a notification as per their configured alert settings without delay.

User can manage and deactivate unnecessary alerts from their notification settings.

Given that the user is in the alert management section, When the user opts to deactivate the alert for 'Quality Issues', Then the system should not send any further alerts for this specific issue.

Performance Trend Analytics

User Story: As a supply chain analyst, I want to analyze trends in supplier performance over time so that I can make informed decisions about our supplier relationships and anticipate potential problems.
Description: This requirement entails developing a feature that analyzes historical supplier performance data to identify trends over time. It will offer insights into recurring issues, such as consistent delivery delays or quality problems, allowing users to make data-driven decisions regarding supplier selection and management. Implementing trend analytics will promote proactive supplier management, helping businesses identify and address performance issues before they escalate into significant disruptions, thereby enhancing overall operational efficiency.
Acceptance Criteria: Supplier Performance Analysis for Historical Data

Given a user accesses the Performance Trend Analytics feature, when they input a date range for supplier performance, then the system displays a comparison of key performance metrics (delivery times, quality scores) for each supplier during the selected time frame.

Identifying Recurring Issues in Supplier Performance

Given the user reviews the performance metrics, when the system analyzes historical data, then it highlights suppliers with consistent delivery delays or quality problems over the specified period for easy identification.

Generating Actionable Insights from Performance Trends

Given the user accesses the insights generated from the Performance Trend Analytics feature, when they view the recurring issues report, then the system provides actionable recommendations for improving supplier management based on identified trends.

User Interface for Performance Trend Visualization

Given a user navigates to the Performance Trend Analytics section, when they view the graphical representation of supplier performance, then all relevant performance metrics are clearly displayed and easy to interpret.

Data Export Capability for Performance Analytics

Given the user requires an in-depth analysis report, when they opt to export the performance trend data, then the system generates a downloadable report in CSV and PDF formats without any loss of data accuracy.

Alerts for Significant Performance Changes

Given the system continuously monitors supplier performance, when a supplier's performance metrics drop below predefined thresholds, then the user receives an automatic alert notification with details of the decline.

Trend Analysis Insights

Trend Analysis Insights analyzes historical supplier performance data to identify patterns and forecast future reliability. This feature enhances long-term planning by allowing businesses to make informed decisions about supplier partnerships based on evolving performance trends.

Requirements

Performance Data Integration

User Story: As a supply chain manager, I want automated data integration for supplier performance so that I can analyze trends without spending time on manual data entry, ensuring more accurate insights into supplier reliability.
Description: The Performance Data Integration requirement focuses on the seamless collection and integration of historical supplier performance data from various sources, including ERP systems, sales databases, and external market analysis tools. This integration is vital for enabling the Trend Analysis Insights feature to function effectively, allowing businesses to analyze supplier trends without manual data entry or inconsistencies. By automating data importation, users can ensure accuracy and reliability in the forecasts produced, leading to better supplier management and decision-making processes.
Acceptance Criteria: Integrating historical supplier performance data from ERP systems to provide insights into vendor reliability and trends.

Given the user has access to the ERP system, when they initiate the data integration process for supplier performance, then the system should retrieve and incorporate all relevant historical performance data without errors.

Automatically syncing sales database data to assess supplier performance against actual sales figures.

Given the user connects their sales database to InvenSage, when the synchronization process is executed, then the system should successfully align supplier performance metrics with corresponding sales data, reflecting any discrepancies accurately.

Utilizing external market analysis tools to enrich supplier performance data for comprehensive trend analysis.

Given that the external market analysis tools are integrated, when the user initiates the import process, then the system should successfully fetch and integrate relevant market data without user intervention, ensuring consistency in the analysis.

Ensuring that all integrated data sources can be accessed seamlessly within the Trend Analysis Insights feature.

Given the user accesses the Trend Analysis Insights feature, when they view supplier performance dashboards, then all integrated data from the ERP, sales database, and market analysis tools should be displayed in a unified format without any discrepancies.

Providing error handling and notifications when there are failures in data integration processes from any source.

Given a failure occurs during data integration, when the error is detected, then the system should generate a clear notification outlining the issue and suggested remediation steps for the user.

Enabling users to manually review and edit imported performance data to correct any inconsistencies before final analysis.

Given the data has been imported, when users opt to review the performance data, then they should be able to edit any specific entries and save the changes, which should reflect in the Trend Analysis Insights calculations.

Trend Visualization Tools

User Story: As a business analyst, I want visual representations of supplier performance trends so that I can quickly identify patterns and communicate findings to stakeholders efficiently.
Description: The Trend Visualization Tools requirement encompasses the development of interactive graphs and dashboards that visually represent historical supplier performance data trends. This includes features like filtering by time period, supplier categories, and geographical regions. Such tools will enhance user experience by providing intuitive visual cues and insights, making it easier for users to grasp complex data patterns and make informed decisions regarding supplier partnerships. The incorporation of these tools is crucial for elevating the overall functionality and usability of the Trend Analysis Insights feature.
Acceptance Criteria: As a user of InvenSage, I want to view a line graph that shows the historical performance of a specific supplier over the last 12 months so that I can evaluate their reliability effectively.

Given that I have selected a supplier and set the time filter to the last 12 months, when I access the Trend Visualization Tools, then I should see a line graph displaying the supplier's performance indicators over the selected time frame.

As a user of InvenSage, I want to filter supplier performance data by geographical region, so I can identify which suppliers are performing well in specific areas.

Given that I have accessed the Trend Visualization Tools, when I apply a geographical filter to the data, then the displayed performance metrics should update to reflect only the selected region's supplier performance.

As a business analyst, I need to compare the performance trends of multiple suppliers side-by-side, so I can make informed decisions about which suppliers to partner with.

Given that I have selected multiple suppliers within the Trend Visualization Tools, when I activate the comparison feature, then I should see a comparative dashboard that displays each selected supplier's performance metrics side-by-side for the defined time period.

As a manager, I want to identify trends in supplier performance across different product categories, so that I can assess which categories are stable and which need attention.

Given that I have access to the Trend Visualization Tools, when I filter the data by product categories, then the dashboard should visually represent the performance metrics of suppliers categorized under the selected products for the specified time period.

As a user, I need to export the visualized trend data into a CSV format, so I can share my analysis with team members.

Given that I have accessed the Trend Visualization Tools with the desired data visualizations displayed, when I click the export button, then a CSV file containing the selected data visuals should be downloaded successfully.

As a user, I want to get a tooltip with detailed information when hovering over data points in the trend graphs, allowing for deeper insight into historical performance.

Given I am viewing the trend graphs in the Trend Visualization Tools, when I hover over any data point, then a tooltip should appear displaying detailed information about that specific data point, including metrics and the exact date.

AI-Driven Forecast Algorithms

User Story: As a procurement officer, I want AI-driven forecasts of supplier performance so that I can proactively manage relationships and negotiate better terms with reliable suppliers.
Description: The AI-Driven Forecast Algorithms requirement outlines the implementation of advanced machine learning algorithms that analyze historical supplier performance data to predict future reliability. By training on past data, the algorithms will recognize patterns and deliver forecasts that help businesses proactively adjust strategies and supplier contracts. The predictive analytics capabilities offered through this requirement will provide significant competitive advantages for users, enabling dynamic supplier management based on data-driven insights rather than reactive measures.
Acceptance Criteria: Analysis of Historical Supplier Performance Data to Predict Future Reliability

Given a dataset of historical supplier performance, when the AI-driven forecast algorithm is executed, then it should accurately identify reliability patterns with a minimum 85% accuracy based on historical metrics.

Integration of Forecast Insights with Supplier Management Dashboard

Given that forecast algorithms generate supplier reliability scores, when these scores are displayed in the Supplier Management Dashboard, then users should be able to view and filter suppliers based on these scores within 2 seconds.

Forecast Algorithm Training on Diverse Data Sets

Given the historical performance data from various suppliers, when the AI algorithms are trained, then they should complete the training process within 24 hours and achieve a minimum accuracy rate of 90% during validation testing.

User Notification for Unreliable Suppliers Based on Forecast

Given that a supplier's reliability score drops below a defined threshold, when the forecasting system registers this change, then the system should automatically notify users via email within 10 minutes of the change occurring.

Impact Analysis of Forecast on Supplier Contracts

Given the forecast data, when users simulate adjustments in supplier contracts based on forecast insights, then they should receive a projected impact report outlining potential cost savings or risks within 5 minutes.

User Feedback Mechanism for Forecast Accuracy Evaluation

Given the forecast results generated by the algorithm, when users input their evaluations of forecast accuracy, then the system should record and analyze this feedback for future algorithm improvements without data loss.

Real-Time Performance Monitoring Post-Forecast Implementation

Given that the AI-driven forecast algorithms are actively in use, when users monitor supplier performance, then they should see real-time updates on supplier reliability metrics within a 5-minute interval.

User Role Permissions

User Story: As a system administrator, I want to manage user permissions for the Trend Analysis Insights functionality so that I can ensure secure access to sensitive supplier performance data.
Description: The User Role Permissions requirement ensures that different users within an organization can access the Trend Analysis Insights feature based on predefined roles. Permissions will dictate who can view, analyze, or modify supplier performance data, thereby maintaining data integrity and security. This requirement is significant for organizations with multiple users needing varying access levels, thus enabling collaborative work while safeguarding sensitive information. Implementing these permissions will enhance trust in data management and analysis processes.
Acceptance Criteria: User Access Based on Role Definition

Given a user is logged into InvenSage with a specific role, when they access the Trend Analysis Insights feature, then they should only see the data and options that their role permits, ensuring no access to unauthorized data.

Modification Rights for Senior Users

Given a senior user has logged into the application, when they navigate to the Trend Analysis Insights section, then they should have the ability to edit, add or remove supplier performance data successfully, with changes saved immediately.

View Permissions for Standard Users

Given a standard user accesses the Trend Analysis Insights feature, when they attempt to view supplier performance data, then they should be able to view all data but not have any options to modify or delete any information.

Audit Trail of Data Access

Given any user interacts with the Trend Analysis Insights feature, when they access, modify, or delete data, then an audit trail should be generated, logging the user action (who did what and when), ensuring accountability and traceability.

Role Change Implications

Given a user’s role has been changed within the organization, when they log into InvenSage, then their access permissions to the Trend Analysis Insights feature should be automatically updated to reflect their new role accurately.

Access Denial for Unauthorized Users

Given a user who does not have permission to access the Trend Analysis Insights feature, when they try to access it, then they should receive an access denied message clearly explaining the restriction without exposing any sensitive data information.

User Role Management Interface

Given an admin user is managing roles within InvenSage, when they attempt to assign roles and permissions for the Trend Analysis Insights feature, then they should be able to do so through a clear and user-friendly interface, with immediate updates reflected in user access.

Alert Notification System

User Story: As a logistics manager, I want to receive alerts when supplier performance metrics decline so that I can take swift action to mitigate supply chain disruptions.
Description: The Alert Notification System requirement involves the establishment of proactive alerts based on supplier performance trends that fall below certain thresholds. For example, alerts could trigger when a supplier's reliability rating drops or when significant fluctuations in delivery times occur. This system aims to keep key personnel informed of critical changes, allowing for timely interventions and relationship management adjustments. The functionality provided by this requirement will ensure that businesses are always on top of supplier performance and can react swiftly to potential issues.
Acceptance Criteria: Supplier Reliability Rating Trigger Notification

Given a supplier's reliability rating has dropped below the defined threshold, when the Alert Notification System processes supplier performance data, then a notification should be sent to the designated personnel within 10 minutes.

Delivery Time Fluctuation Alert Notification

Given there is a significant fluctuation in delivery times from a supplier, when the Alert Notification System detects this change, then a notification should be sent to key stakeholders outlining the details of the fluctuation within 15 minutes.

Dashboard Overview of Alerts

Given multiple alerts have been triggered, when a user accesses the Alert Notification Dashboard, then they should see a real-time overview of all active alerts with potential impact assessments displayed clearly.

Historical Performance Data Analysis

Given the Alert Notification System has been in operation for the past month, when the user requests a report, then the system should provide an analysis of supplier performance trends and all triggered alerts during that timeframe.

User Permissions for Alerts

Given different roles within the company, when a user with administrative privileges updates alert settings, then the new settings should be saved and reflected across all user profiles within the system.

Email Notification Format

Given a notification alert is triggered, when the email is sent to key personnel, then the email must include the supplier name, type of alert, and action recommendations formatted professionally and clearly.

Escalation Protocol for Severe Alerts

Given an alert for severe performance issues is triggered, when the notification is processed, then the system should escalate this alert to higher management automatically and log this action for audit purposes.

Detailed Reporting Capabilities

User Story: As a financial analyst, I want to generate detailed reports on supplier performance trends so that I can present data-driven insights during budget discussions and strategy meetings.
Description: The Detailed Reporting Capabilities requirement entails the integration of customized reporting features that allow users to generate comprehensive reports on supplier performance, trend analysis, and forecast predictions. Users will be able to create reports tailored to specific needs, including performance comparisons, time-based evaluations, and trend summaries. This requirement is essential for businesses needing to analyze data in-depth and present findings to stakeholders effectively, thus enhancing data-driven decision-making and operational strategies.
Acceptance Criteria: User generates a comparative report on supplier performance over the last quarter to evaluate the best suppliers for their inventory needs.

Given the user selects 'Comparative Report' from the reporting options, when they input the desired time frame and select multiple suppliers, then the system should generate a report displaying performance metrics for each selected supplier side by side.

A user wants to create a trend summary report to present at an all-hands meeting, analyzing monthly sales trends connected to supplier performance.

Given the user selects 'Trend Summary' from the reporting options, when they choose a date range and click 'Generate Report', then the system should produce a summary report detailing monthly sales trends along with corresponding supplier performance data.

A retail manager needs to assess how well a supplier has been performing over the past year to decide on contract renewal.

Given the user accesses the 'Supplier Performance Report' feature, when they enter a specific supplier name and select the past year as the timeframe, then the report should show performance metrics including delivery reliability, quality scores, and order accuracy for that supplier for the specified period.

An e-commerce business owner wishes to forecast inventory needs based on historical supplier shipping performance using the reporting tool to improve order timing.

Given the user selects 'Forecast Report' from the reporting options, when they set parameters for historical performance data and future projections, then the system should output a forecast report indicating expected shipping performance and recommended reorder points based on historical trends.

A wholesaler needs to create a report that compares supplier performance across multiple metrics to identify areas for negotiation.

Given the user clicks on 'Performance Comparison Report', when they choose multiple metrics such as pricing, delivery speed, and quality ratings, then the report should display a side-by-side comparison for selected suppliers based on the chosen metrics.

A business analyst wants to refine the report output by filtering results based on supplier categories like 'Local', 'International', or 'Preferred'.

Given the user accesses the detailed reporting feature, when they apply a filter by supplier category before generating the report, then the system should display only the results that match the selected supplier category in the generated report.

A user must save custom report templates for regular use to streamline future reporting processes.

Given the user designs a report with specific parameters and data views, when they save the report as a template, then the system should allow the user to name and store this template for future access and modification.

Live Inventory Insights

Provides real-time updates on stock levels directly to retail managers on the sales floor. This feature helps users make immediate, informed decisions regarding product placements and replenishment needs, ultimately preventing stockouts and overstock situations.

Requirements

Real-time Stock Update

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to receive real-time updates on stock levels so that I can make informed decisions about product placements and replenish stock efficiently.
Description: The Real-time Stock Update requirement ensures that retail managers receive instant notifications regarding changes in stock levels on the sales floor. This functionality is essential for making timely inventory decisions, helping managers to react quickly to fluctuations in demand. By integrating with the existing InvenSage platform, this feature provides up-to-the-minute data on product availability, enabling proactive management of inventory levels. The expected outcome is a significant reduction in stockouts and overstock situations, which ultimately leads to improved customer satisfaction and increased sales.
Acceptance Criteria: Retail manager receives real-time stock updates on the sales floor during a peak shopping hour when multiple products are being sold.

Given the live inventory updates system is active, when a product is sold, then the retail manager should receive a notification within 5 seconds of the sale reflecting the reduced stock level.

Retail manager is alerted during a daily stock review of low-stock items needing replenishment so they can place orders timely.

Given the real-time stock update is operational, when stock levels of any product fall below the predefined threshold, then the retail manager should receive an alert via the dashboard within 1 minute.

A retail manager observes overstock items on the sales floor and wants to adjust inventory display based on real-time insights.

Given the inventory updates feature is functioning, when an overstock condition is detected for a product, then the system shall provide a recommendation to reduce stock levels and display relevant suggestions within the dashboard interface.

A retail manager is preparing for a large promotional event and needs confirmation of stock availability in real-time.

Given the inventory management system is in use, when a product is about to be replenished before the event, then the retail manager should receive an immediate update listing the current stock levels before and after replenishment.

During a store inventory audit, the retail manager needs to validate actual stock against the system's reported levels.

Given the real-time stock update feature is enabled, when the retail manager conducts an audit, then the stock levels shown in the system must match within a variance of 2% of the actual counts.

A retail manager adjusts product prices and wants to ensure that updated prices are reflected in stock notifications.

Given the real-time stock update includes pricing information, when a product price is updated in the system, then all subsequent stock notifications must reflect the most recent pricing within 1 minute of the update.

Integration with Sales Data

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to integrate sales data with inventory management so that I can align stock levels with actual sales and make data-driven decisions.
Description: The Integration with Sales Data requirement involves synchronizing inventory updates with real-time sales data from the point-of-sale (POS) system. This integration automatically adjusts stock levels based on sales activity, providing a comprehensive view of inventory in relation to actual sales trends. This requirement is critical for ensuring accurate inventory management and allows retailers to identify which products are performing well and which are underperforming. The anticipated benefit is a more agile inventory management process and enhanced forecasting capabilities, leading to better business outcomes.
Acceptance Criteria: Sales Manager on the retail floor wants to immediately respond to a sudden increase in product sales by checking inventory levels in real-time through InvenSage, ensuring that popular items are always stocked without delay.

Given the sales data from the POS system, when a product's sales exceed the predefined threshold within an hour, then the inventory should automatically update to reflect the stock level available in InvenSage.

A retail manager uses InvenSage to track live inventory levels for a promotion that has just started. They need to ensure adequate stock is available during high traffic periods to avoid losing sales.

Given a promotion has started, when a product's stock level reaches 20% of the initial quantity, then an automatic reorder notification should be generated for that product in InvenSage.

A retailer assesses sales performance at the end of the day and wants to analyze product sales trends against their inventory data to make decisions for the next day’s stock.

Given the end of day sales report is generated, when the sales data is compared with current inventory levels in InvenSage, then the system should clearly highlight any discrepancies or underperforming products.

The operations manager needs to ensure all staff can access real-time inventory insights across different locations to coordinate inventory management efficiently.

Given multiple store locations are integrated with the POS system, when a sales event occurs at any location, then all connected InvenSage dashboards should reflect updated inventory levels within 5 minutes.

A warehouse employee receives a low stock alert on the InvenSage app while preparing for shipment and needs to confirm stock levels before processing orders.

Given the low stock notification is triggered, when the warehouse employee checks the product's stock level in InvenSage, then the app should display accurate real-time inventory counts.

Custom Alert Settings

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to customize my alert settings for inventory levels so that I can be immediately informed when stock is low or excess, tailored to my store's needs.
Description: The Custom Alert Settings requirement allows retail managers to create personalized notifications for specific stock levels. Managers can set alerts for low stock thresholds or overstock situations, ensuring they are notified when inventory reaches critical levels. This feature enhances the manager's ability to tailor notifications according to their unique business needs, significantly improving responsiveness to inventory changes. The purpose of this requirement is to empower users with control over how and when they receive alerts, ultimately supporting a more efficient inventory management process.
Acceptance Criteria: Retail manager wants to set a low stock alert for a particular product category, such as electronics, to receive timely notifications when stock drops below a specified threshold.

Given that I am a retail manager, when I set a low stock alert for the 'Electronics' category at a threshold of 10 units, then I should receive a notification when the stock level for any product in that category falls to 10 units or below.

A retail manager needs to adjust an existing alert when business demands change, specifically increasing the threshold for overstock notification for a seasonal product.

Given that I am a retail manager, when I adjust the overstock alert threshold from 50 units to 80 units for a seasonal product, then the alert system should reflect this change immediately and notify me when stock levels exceed 80 units.

When products are manually counted and are deemed higher than expected, the retail manager must ensure that the alert system reflects this current stock level accurately.

Given that I have manually verified that the stock level for a product is now 120 units, when I update the stock level in the system, then I should no longer receive low stock alerts for that product until it drops below the set threshold.

On receiving a low stock alert, the retail manager must take immediate action by reordering stock, and the system must allow for seamless reordering from preferred suppliers.

Given that I receive a low stock alert for a product, when I click on the alert notification, then I should be directed to the reorder page with the product pre-selected for purchase from my preferred supplier.

The retail manager wishes to receive alerts through multiple channels, such as email and SMS, ensuring they are informed in various ways about stock levels.

Given that I am a retail manager, when I opt for both email and SMS notifications for low stock alerts, then I should receive the alert via both channels when inventory falls below my set threshold.

The retail manager wants to disable an alert that is no longer relevant, for instance, after a product line is discontinued, to avoid unnecessary notifications.

Given that I have a low stock alert for a product that has been discontinued, when I choose to disable the alert for that product, then I should no longer receive notifications related to that product's stock levels.

AI-driven Replenishment Recommendations

User Story: As a retail manager, I want AI-driven recommendations for inventory replenishment so that I can optimize stock levels based on predicted demand and reduce excess inventory.
Description: The AI-driven Replenishment Recommendations requirement leverages machine learning algorithms to analyze sales patterns and forecast future demand. This feature provides actionable insights into when and how much inventory to reorder, helping managers to optimize stock levels and decrease carrying costs. By integrating predictive analytics, the system can identify the best times for replenishment and ensure that stock levels align with upcoming demand. This capability is essential for maximizing profitability and minimizing waste, ultimately leading to improved inventory turnover rates.
Acceptance Criteria: Retail manager receives an alert for low stock levels during peak sales hours, prompting an immediate review of AI-driven replenishment recommendations.

Given the AI-driven replenishment system is operational, when stock levels drop below the defined threshold, then the system should send real-time alerts to the retail manager with actionable replenishment recommendations.

A manager reviews the AI-generated report on historical sales trends to determine the best time to reorder products before the upcoming holiday season.

Given that the manager is accessing the AI-driven replenishment recommendations, when they generate a historical sales report, then the system should display accurate data on past sales trends and suggested reorder timings.

A retailer implements AI-driven replenishment recommendations and subsequently experiences fewer stockouts during high-demand periods.

Given the retailer has integrated the AI replenishment recommendations, when high-demand products are forecasted, then the system should accurately recommend reorder quantities that prevent stockouts at least 90% of the time.

A system administrator overwrites a previously generated replenishment recommendation due to a marketing promotion affecting inventory levels.

Given the AI-driven replenishment has provided a recommendation, when the system administrator inputs a new promotional event, then the system should correctly adjust and update the replenishment recommendations accordingly.

The retail staff receives training on how to interpret and act on AI-driven replenishment recommendations during a staff meeting.

Given that training is taking place, when staff members are provided with the AI-driven replenishment recommendations, then they should demonstrate the ability to interpret the recommendations and apply them accurately in inventory management.

After implementing AI-driven replenishment recommendations, the business measures changes in inventory turnover rates over a three-month period.

Given the AI system is fully operational, when measuring inventory turnover rates, then the business should see an increase of at least 20% within three months of implementation.

User-friendly Dashboard

User Story: As a retail manager, I want a user-friendly dashboard to access real-time inventory insights quickly so that I can make informed decisions without navigating complex screens.
Description: The User-friendly Dashboard requirement mandates the development of an intuitive interface that presents real-time inventory insights and alerts in a clear and visually appealing manner. This dashboard should be designed to highlight critical information at a glance, ensuring that retail managers can quickly assess their inventory status and act accordingly. By focusing on usability and accessibility, this requirement aims to enhance the overall user experience, enabling managers to navigate efficiently and make timely decisions related to inventory management.
Acceptance Criteria: Retail manager accesses the dashboard during peak shopping hours to view stock levels for popular items being sold.

Given the retail manager is logged into the dashboard, When they navigate to the 'Real-Time Stock Levels' section, Then they should see updated stock levels for all items with a refresh rate of no more than 5 seconds and highlighted alerts for low stock items.

A retail manager receives an alert for a product that is running low on stock while on the sales floor.

Given the retail manager is on the sales floor, When they receive a low stock alert notification, Then the dashboard should display the affected product's current stock level, suggested reorder quantity, and the time since the last inventory check.

A retail manager reviews historical sales data on the dashboard to analyze inventory performance over the past month.

Given the retail manager selects the 'Historical Data' option, When they view the sales performance chart for the last 30 days, Then the dashboard should display accurate visual representation of sales trends, including peak sales days and stock levels over time.

The retail manager customizes the dashboard to prioritize specific product categories based on their sales performance.

Given the retail manager is on the dashboard settings page, When they select product categories to prioritize, Then the dashboard should update to display selected categories at the top of the dashboard screen for quick access.

A retail manager utilizes the dashboard to generate a report for upcoming inventory needs ahead of the next sales season.

Given the retail manager is on the dashboard, When they initiate a report generation for the next quarter's inventory needs, Then the dashboard should provide a comprehensive report that includes suggested reorder quantities and projected selling trends based on past performance.

A retail manager accesses the dashboard from a mobile device while on the go.

Given the retail manager is using a mobile device, When they access the dashboard, Then the interface should automatically resize to be mobile-friendly, ensuring all critical information is easily accessible and readable.

Historical Data Analysis

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to analyze historical inventory data so that I can understand past trends and make better decisions for future stock management.
Description: The Historical Data Analysis requirement involves providing users with the ability to access and analyze past inventory performance and sales trends. This feature will enable retail managers to identify seasonal patterns, assess the effectiveness of inventory strategies, and refine their future planning processes. By incorporating analytical tools that visualize historical data, this requirement provides valuable insights that can influence future inventory management decisions, ultimately leading to improved strategy formulation and execution.
Acceptance Criteria: Accessing Historical Sales Data for Seasonal Planning

Given that the retail manager is logged into the InvenSage platform, when they navigate to the Historical Data Analysis section, then they should be able to view a dashboard displaying historical sales data segmented by season over the past three years.

Analyzing Inventory Performance Trends

Given that the retail manager is in the Historical Data Analysis section, when they select a specific product category from a drop-down menu, then they should be able to view a line graph showing inventory performance trends for that category over the last 12 months.

Identifying Ineffective Inventory Strategies

Given that the retail manager is analyzing historical data, when they view the analysis report, then they should be able to identify at least three inventory strategies that resulted in stockouts or overstock situations in the past.

Visualizing Historical Data for Decision Making

Given that the retail manager has accessed the Historical Data Analysis module, when they generate a report for a specific timeframe, then the report should include visual representations (charts or graphs) of sales trends, stock levels, and reorder frequencies.

Exporting Historical Data for External Analysis

Given that the retail manager is viewing historical data analysis results, when they click on the 'Export' button, then they should be able to download the data in CSV format for further analysis in external tools.

Comparing Current Inventory Levels with Historical Trends

Given that the retail manager accesses the Historical Data Analysis feature, when they view the current inventory levels alongside historical data, then they should see color-coded indicators that highlight discrepancies between past and current stock levels.

Receiving Recommendations Based on Historical Analysis

Given that the retail manager finishes analyzing the historical data, when they complete the analysis, then the system should provide at least three recommendations for future inventory strategies based on identified trends.

Replenishment Recommendations

Utilizing AI algorithms, this feature generates instant suggestions for product restocking based on current inventory levels, sales velocity, and historical data. This empowers retail managers to optimize inventory and reduce time spent on manual calculations and assessments.

Requirements

AI-Powered Stock Analysis

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to receive automated replenishment recommendations based on my current inventory and sales data so that I can optimize my stock levels and reduce time spent on manual inventory checks.
Description: The AI-Powered Stock Analysis requirement aims to implement sophisticated algorithms that analyze current inventory levels, historical sales data, and product turnover rates to generate precise replenishment recommendations. This feature will not only automate the labor-intensive process of inventory assessment but will also ensure timely restocking based on predictive analysis, significantly reducing the risk of stockouts and overstock situations. By integrating with the existing inventory system, this enhancement will enhance user productivity, facilitate better cash flow management, and optimize inventory levels to align with business goals.
Acceptance Criteria: Retail manager reviews inventory levels at the end of the day, seeking recommendations for restocking based on the current stock levels and sales data.

Given the current stock levels and historical sales data, When the AI-powered stock analysis is triggered, Then it should provide at least three accurate replenishment recommendations for items that are low in stock.

A retailer wants to adjust their inventory model to include seasonal trends and demand fluctuations, using the AI tool for improved accuracy.

Given that seasonal data has been incorporated into the system, When the AI runs the stock analysis, Then it should factor in seasonal trends and suggest restocking orders that align with these trends.

A wholesale business manager is preparing for a large sales period and wants to ensure they do not run out of popular items.

Given the sales velocity and historical turnover rates of items, When a large sales period is upcoming, Then the AI should generate replenishment recommendations that account for at least a 20% increase in demand for high-turnover items.

The e-commerce manager reviews weekly sales reports and seeks to optimize inventory levels to meet projected sales for the upcoming week.

Given the weekly sales report, When the manager accesses the AI recommendations dashboard, Then the recommendations should show an optimized inventory level based on projected sales for the next week, with a display of stockout risks for any critical items.

A user attempts to integrate the AI-powered stock analysis with their existing inventory management system before using it for the first time.

Given that integration setup is completed, When the user runs the AI stock analysis for the first time, Then the output should seamlessly reflect accurate data from the existing inventory system without discrepancies.

Inventory reports need to be generated automatically for end-of-month audits, reflecting AI recommendations and actual purchases.

Given an automated report setup within the system, When the end-of-month audit is triggered, Then the report should include a summary of AI recommendations along with actual purchases made, showing any variances and percentage effectiveness of the recommendations.

Customizable Notification System

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to customize notifications for stock levels and sales trends so that I can be promptly alerted and make informed decisions regarding inventory management without having to monitor everything constantly.
Description: The Customizable Notification System requirement is designed to allow users to set up personalized alerts based on specific inventory thresholds and sales patterns. Users will be able to define parameters for notifications regarding low stock levels, slow-moving products, or recommended restock dates. This flexibility will enable retail managers to stay informed and proactive in inventory management, ensuring timely actions are taken based on tailored insights, thus minimizing potential losses and optimizing stock through better timing of reorder decisions.
Acceptance Criteria: User has configured low stock level alerts for various products in the inventory management system.

Given the user has set a low stock threshold for a product, when the stock level falls below this threshold, then the user should receive an instant notification via email and in-app alert.

User wants to receive notifications for slow-moving products based on sales velocity data.

Given the user has activated alerts for slow-moving products, when a product's sales velocity drops below the defined stale threshold for two consecutive weeks, then the user should receive a notification indicating the slow movement status.

User is looking to receive reminders for recommended restock dates provided by the system.

Given the user has defined parameters for restock dates, when the current date matches the recommended restock date for any product, then the user should receive a notification with restock recommendations for those products.

User intends to cancel or modify existing notification settings for certain inventory alerts.

Given the user has existing notification settings, when the user modifies or cancels these settings, then the system should save the changes, and the user should not receive notifications for the canceled conditions.

User wants to view a historical log of notifications sent regarding inventory alerts.

Given the user accesses the notification history section, when the user views the log, then the log should display all notifications sent in the past 30 days, including timestamps and details of the alerts.

User requires the option to adjust alert preferences specifically for different types of inventory (e.g., perishables vs. non-perishables).

Given the user is configuring notification settings, when the user selects different inventory categories, then the system should allow the user to set unique alert parameters for each category, reflecting in the notification logic.

Integrated Demand Forecasting

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to access integrated demand forecasts within the replenishment recommendations so that I can make data-driven decisions for my inventory management and ensure I have the right products at the right time.
Description: The Integrated Demand Forecasting requirement involves incorporating advanced demand forecasting capabilities directly into the replenishment recommendation feature. By utilizing machine learning algorithms that analyze trends, seasonality, and external factors, this integration will provide more accurate predictions for product demand, enabling managers to make better-informed inventory decisions. This feature will enhance the platform's capability to minimize stockouts and optimize order quantities, directly impacting profitability and supply chain efficiency.
Acceptance Criteria: Scenario for predicting product demand during peak holiday season.

Given the current sales velocity and historical data, when the demand forecasting feature is utilized, then the system should accurately predict product demand within a 10% margin of error for the next quarter.

Scenario for managing overstock situations after integrating demand forecasting.

Given historical sales data and forecasted demand, when a product's inventory level exceeds the optimal threshold, then the system should provide recommendations to reduce stock levels by suggesting promotional strategies or discounts.

Scenario for generating replenishment recommendations based on accurate forecasting.

Given the integrated demand forecasting data, when the replenishment recommendation feature is activated, then the system should provide restocking suggestions that align with predicted demand and optimize order quantities accordingly.

Scenario for real-time inventory adjustments based on updated demand forecasts.

Given a change in sales velocity or external factors affecting demand, when new data is entered into the system, then the demand forecasting should automatically adjust and reflect updated replenishment recommendations within 5 minutes.

Scenario for evaluating the impact of demand forecasting on stockout reduction.

Given a defined sales period with varying demand, when comparing stockout occurrences before and after implementing the demand forecasting feature, then there should be at least a 20% reduction in stockouts.

Scenario for user notifications related to demand forecasting updates.

Given significant changes in demand trends, when the demand forecasting system recalculates predictions, then relevant users should receive automated notifications summarizing the key changes and recommended actions within 24 hours.

User Training and Documentation

User Story: As a new user of the InvenSage platform, I want to access training materials and documentation specifically about replenishment recommendations, so that I can quickly learn how to optimize my inventory management and use the system efficiently.
Description: The User Training and Documentation requirement seeks to develop comprehensive training materials and resources to support users in effectively utilizing the replenishment recommendations feature. This will include step-by-step guides, video tutorials, and best practice documents to ensure that retail managers can easily understand and leverage the AI-driven insights provided. A well-trained user base will enhance satisfaction, reduce onboarding time, and increase the overall effectiveness of the feature, leading to improved business outcomes.
Acceptance Criteria: User completes a basic training module on using the replenishment recommendations feature, covering fundamental concepts and navigation.

Given the user accesses the training module, when they complete all steps and pass the interactive quiz with at least 80% accuracy, then they should be able to access the replenishment recommendations feature in their dashboard.

User utilizes video tutorials to learn about advanced features of the replenishment recommendations, including setting thresholds for alerts.

Given the user watches all video tutorials about advanced settings, when they configure the system based on what they learned, then the feature should produce accurate alerts based on the set thresholds without errors.

User accesses the best practice documents provided for the replenishment recommendations feature to enhance inventory management.

Given the user reads the best practice documents, when they implement at least three recommended strategies in their inventory management process, then they should see a measurable decrease in stockouts and overstock situations within the next quarter.

Retail manager trains a new employee using the provided training materials for the replenishment recommendations feature.

Given the new employee completes the training using the provided materials, when they demonstrate usage of the replenishment recommendations feature successfully without assistance, then the existing user should confirm their proficiency in using the feature.

User seeks support for troubleshooting issues related to the replenishment recommendations feature using the documentation.

Given the user encounters an issue with the feature, when they refer to the troubleshooting section of the documentation, then they should find a clearly outlined solution that resolves their issue efficiently.

User attempts to provide feedback on the user training and documentation resources through a feedback form.

Given the user submits feedback on the training materials, when they receive a confirmation message and follow-up communication about their feedback, then it should indicate that the feedback process is functional and user-friendly.

Mobile App Accessibility

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to access replenishment recommendations through a mobile app so that I can manage my inventory effectively from anywhere, even when I am not at my desk.
Description: The Mobile App Accessibility requirement entails the development of a mobile application or responsive design that enables users to access replenishment recommendations on-the-go. This feature will provide retail managers the ability to make real-time inventory decisions from anywhere, ensuring flexibility and responsiveness to changing business conditions while minimizing delays in inventory management. By enhancing mobility, the application will improve user engagement and increase system utilization, allowing decision-making to continue outside of traditional office environments.
Acceptance Criteria: Accessing Replenishment Recommendations on Mobile Devices

Given a retail manager is logged into the InvenSage mobile app, When they navigate to the replenishment recommendations section, Then they should see the current inventory levels and AI-generated restocking suggestions for their products.

Real-Time Updates for Inventory Changes

Given the mobile app is open, When a product's inventory level changes due to a sale or restock, Then the app should update the replenishment recommendations in real-time without requiring a refresh.

Offline Access to Replenishment Recommendations

Given the mobile app is being used in an area with poor internet connectivity, When the retail manager attempts to access previously viewed replenishment recommendations, Then they should be able to view cached recommendations without loss of functionality.

User Engagement Metrics on Mobile App Usage

Given the mobile app is deployed, When the usage analytics are reviewed, Then the average time spent on the replenishment recommendations section should be at least 5 minutes per session within the first month of launch.

User Notifications for Critical Reordering Levels

Given a product's inventory falls below the defined threshold, When the retail manager opens the mobile app, Then they should receive a notification alerting them to reorder this product for optimal inventory levels.

Intuitive Navigation Design for Mobile Users

Given a user interacts with the mobile app, When they attempt to find the replenishment recommendations feature, Then they should be able to access it within 3 taps from the home screen without confusion.

Sales Trend Analytics

Offers dynamic insights into trending products and sales patterns throughout the day, allowing retail managers to adapt strategies on the fly. This real-time analysis helps boost sales by ensuring popular items are prominently displayed and readily available.

Requirements

Dynamic Sales Dashboard

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to view a real-time sales dashboard so that I can quickly identify trending products and optimize my inventory accordingly.
Description: The Dynamic Sales Dashboard requirement involves creating an interactive dashboard that visualizes key sales metrics, trends, and patterns in real-time. This feature is designed to provide retail managers with an overview of sales performance, highlighting top-selling products, peak sales times, and inventory levels. By integrating with existing sales data sources, the dashboard allows for quick decision-making and strategy adjustments based on current trends. The benefits include enhanced visibility into sales dynamics, improved stock management, and the ability to respond promptly to market changes, collectively ensuring better sales performance and customer satisfaction.
Acceptance Criteria: Real-time Sales Data Visualization

Given a retail manager logs into the Dynamic Sales Dashboard, When they view the sales metrics, Then the dashboard should display real-time data reflecting current sales figures and inventory levels for all products in stock.

Top-Selling Products Highlighting

Given sales data is being analyzed, When the dashboard is accessed, Then the top 10 selling products should be highlighted prominently based on sales volume and revenue generated over the past 24 hours.

Peak Sales Time Identification

Given the sales trends data, When the dashboard is reviewed, Then the peak sales times should be clearly marked and represented on a time graph, indicating hours with the highest sales activity.

Inventory Level Alerts

Given the current inventory data, When viewed on the dashboard, Then the system should trigger alerts for any products that fall below the predetermined reorder levels, distinguishing critical low stock items in red.

Adaptive Strategy Suggestions

Given the sales trends and product performance data, When a significant drop in sales is detected, Then the dashboard should provide suggested strategies for restocking or promoting certain products based on past successful sales patterns.

User Interaction and Customization

Given a retail manager interacts with the dashboard, When they filter the data by date range or product category, Then the dashboard should refresh and display the updated metrics accordingly without delay.

Integration with Existing Systems

Given that the user's existing sales data systems are configured, When the dashboard is set up, Then it should seamlessly integrate and pull data from those systems, verifying data accuracy in reports.

Automated Trend Alerts

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to receive automated alerts about sales trends so that I can act quickly on emerging opportunities or challenges.
Description: The Automated Trend Alerts requirement involves establishing a system that automatically monitors sales data and notifies managers when significant trends or shifts occur. This feature aims to keep retail managers informed about emerging product trends, popular items, and any sudden changes in sales patterns that may require immediate attention. By leveraging machine learning algorithms, the system will learn from historical data to improve its predictive capabilities. The benefit of this requirement is to ensure that managers are proactively alerted to opportunities and potential issues, thereby enhancing their responsiveness and strategic planning capabilities.
Acceptance Criteria: Notification of Significant Changes in Sales Patterns

Given sales data is being monitored, when a significant increase or decrease in sales occurs for any product, then a notification is sent to the retail manager within 5 minutes of the change being detected.

Learning from Historical Data

Given historical sales data is available, when the system analyzes the data, then it must show improved prediction accuracy for at least 80% of products over three consecutive weeks.

Real-Time Alerts for Emerging Trends

Given that the system monitors sales in real-time, when emerging trends are detected for a product, then a detailed report on the trend should be generated and emailed to the retail manager within 10 minutes.

User Management for Alert Preferences

Given the retail manager has access to the system, when they update their alert preferences, then those preferences should be saved and reflected in the notification settings immediately.

Integration with Existing Inventory Systems

Given that the system is integrated with existing inventory management systems, when a trend alert is generated, then the corresponding stock levels should automatically be updated in the integrated system with accurate timestamps.

Customization of Alert Criteria

Given the functionality to customize alerts, when a retail manager sets specific criteria for trend alerts, then the system must respect these criteria and only send alerts that meet them.

Sales Forecasting Module

User Story: As a retail manager, I want an AI-driven sales forecasting tool so that I can optimize my inventory and reduce waste caused by overstocking or stockouts.
Description: The Sales Forecasting Module requirement encompasses the development of an AI-driven forecasting tool that analyzes past sales data, seasonality, and market trends to project future sales. This feature will aid retailers in making informed stocking decisions by predicting product demand accurately. The module will integrate seamlessly with other inventory management features, enhancing the overall reliability of the platform. The objective is to reduce stockouts and overstock situations by aligning inventory levels with projected sales, ultimately fostering better cash flow and customer satisfaction.
Acceptance Criteria: Sales Forecasting Module Analyzes Historical Data for Seasonal Trends

Given the user inputs past sales data, When the Sales Forecasting Module processes the data, Then it should accurately identify and highlight seasonal trends over the last three years.

Module Accurately Projects Future Sales Based on Historical Trends

Given seasonal trends identified, When the user requests a sales forecast, Then the module should generate projections for the next six months that are within a 10% margin of error compared to actual sales.

Seamless Integration With Inventory Management System

Given a functional Sales Forecasting Module, When the system syncs with existing inventory management features, Then there should be no discrepancies in inventory levels based on projected sales for items identified as trending.

User Receives Alerts for Stockout Risk Based on Sales Forecasts

Given the sales forecasts generated by the module, When stock levels drop below the threshold set for trending items, Then the user should receive an alert notification indicating the risk of stockouts.

Capability to Customize Forecast Parameters

Given the user accesses the Sales Forecasting Module, When the user adjusts parameters such as seasonality factors or external market influences, Then the module should update projections accordingly and display them in real-time.

Generating Comprehensive Reports on Forecast Accuracy

Given a time frame selected by the user, When they request a report, Then the module should generate a comprehensive report detailing the accuracy of past forecasts compared to actual sales, including metrics like mean absolute error (MAE).

Sales Performance Reports

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to generate detailed sales performance reports so that I can evaluate the effectiveness of my sales strategies and make informed adjustments.
Description: The Sales Performance Reports requirement involves generating comprehensive reporting capabilities for sales analysis. This feature will allow managers to create customizable reports that delve into sales performance metrics over different periods, categories, and regions. By providing insights into various sales dimensions, this feature will empower managers to identify strengths and weaknesses in their sales strategies. The reports will be exportable in multiple formats for sharing and presentation purposes, and the functionality will enhance strategic planning by supporting data-driven decision-making.
Acceptance Criteria: Sales Report Generation for Daily Analysis

Given a retail manager is logged into InvenSage, when they select 'Generate Sales Report' for the current day, then a comprehensive report with total sales, top-selling products, and sales by category should be generated and displayed within 2 seconds.

Customizable Reporting Filters

Given a retail manager is in the Sales Performance Reports section, when they apply filters for time period, category, and region, then the generated report should reflect only the data that meets the specified filter criteria without deviation.

Exporting Reports in Multiple Formats

Given a generated sales performance report, when the retail manager selects the 'Export' option, then the report should provide export options for PDF, Excel, and CSV formats, allowing the user to successfully export the report in at least one selected format.

Comparison of Sales Performance Over Time

Given a retail manager is viewing the Sales Performance Reports, when they choose to compare sales data from the current month to the previous month, then the report should accurately display the percentage increase or decrease in sales and show side-by-side comparisons of metrics.

Accessing Historical Sales Data

Given a retail manager is accessing the Sales Performance Reports, when they select a historical date range for comparison, then the report should correctly display historical data that matches the selected parameters without errors or data loss.

Visual Representation of Sales Trends

Given a retail manager has generated a sales performance report, when they view the report, then the report should include visual elements such as graphs or charts that illustrate key sales metrics and trends for easy interpretation.

User Notifications for Sales Report Availability

Given a retail manager has requested a sales report, when the report is generated, then the system should notify the manager via email and within the application about the report's availability for download.

Product Tagging System

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to tag products based on trends and performance so that I can easily manage inventory and highlight relevant items to customers.
Description: The Product Tagging System requirement is aimed at developing a feature that allows managers to tag and categorize products based on various attributes such as trends, seasonality, and sales performance. By creating an easy-to-use tagging interface, managers can organize products dynamically and adjust them according to current sales trends and customer preferences. This system will enhance the product discovery process and enable tailored marketing strategies, ultimately optimizing inventory management and boosting sales for trending items.
Acceptance Criteria: Retail manager categorizes products for a seasonal sale to align inventory with current trends.

Given that a product manager is on the tagging interface, when they tag a product with 'Seasonal - Winter Sale', then the product should be saved under 'Seasonal' category and flagged for promotional discounts.

A retail manager reviews the sales trend data and tags high-performing products for visibility in the store.

Given that sales data shows a product sold 50% above average, when the manager tags it with 'Trending', then this product should appear in the 'Trending Products' section of the dashboard.

Managers want to refine product visibility based on customer preferences during a specific promotional period.

Given that a manager is in the product tagging system, when they filter by 'Customer Preferences' and tag products accordingly, then those products should automatically adjust their visibility in the customer-facing interface during that period.

A manager uses the tagging system to group products by supplier for better tracking.

Given a list of products and their corresponding suppliers, when the manager tags these products with supplier names, then all products should be searchable by supplier within the inventory system.

A retail manager prepares for an upcoming product launch and needs to tag inventory quickly.

Given the need to tag multiple new products, when the manager uses the bulk tagging feature, then all selected products should be tagged with the appropriate categories and attributes in a single action without errors.

Product performance analytics are displayed to the manager after tagging updates.

Given that a product has been tagged and sales data gets updated, when the manager accesses the analytics dashboard, then the system should reflect real-time updates on sales performance for tagged products.

A manager wants to review and modify existing product tags to reflect new trends.

Given that a product has existing tags, when the manager selects a product and updates its tags, then the changes should be saved immediately and reflect on the product's profile without requiring a page refresh.

Customer Interaction Insights

Tracks customer interactions with products, providing retail managers with data on which items receive the most attention or inquiries. This feature enables them to adjust inventory displays and sales strategies to align better with customer interests.

Requirements

Real-time Customer Interaction Tracking

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to track customer interactions with products so that I can adjust our inventory displays and sales strategies to better align with customer interests and maximize sales.
Description: This requirement entails the development of a functionality that captures and displays customer interactions with products in real-time. The system should track which products customers engage with the most, the frequency of inquiries about specific items, and any associated data that reflects trends in customer interest. Integrating this functionality into the existing InvenSage inventory management system will enable retail managers to make informed decisions regarding product placement, promotions, and stock levels. The expected outcome is to enhance customer experience and align inventory strategies with customer preferences, ultimately leading to increased sales and improved inventory management efficiency.
Acceptance Criteria: Real-time tracking of customer interactions with product displays in a retail store setting, allowing managers to view data on customer engagement and inquiries throughout the day.

Given a retail manager is logged into InvenSage, when they access the Customer Interaction Insights dashboard, then they can see real-time updates on customer interactions with each product display, including views and inquiries per product.

A retail manager needs to analyze which products are being inquired about the most over the last week to adjust their stock levels and display arrangements.

Given a retail manager filters the reports for the last week, when they view the inquiries data for each product, then they can see a ranked list of products based on customer inquiries, allowing for informed adjustments to inventory management.

During a promotional campaign, the team wants to measure the impact of promotional displays on customer interactions in real-time.

Given that a promotional campaign is live, when a retail manager views the Customer Interaction Insights, then they can compare interaction rates for products on promotion against those not on promotion, visually highlighting differences in customer engagement.

After implementing changes to product displays based on Customer Interaction Insights, a manager wants to review the outcomes of their strategies.

Given that changes have been made to product displays based on interaction data, when a retail manager checks the analytics after one month, then they should see an increase in inquiries for the products that were adjusted compared to the previous month.

A sales associate is interested in understanding which products are trending among customers to assist with sales and inventory conversations.

Given a sales associate accesses the Customer Interaction Insights feature, when they look at the trending products, then they can view a summary of the top 10 products by engagement, enabling them to engage customers more effectively.

A manager wants to ensure that the system captures data on customer interactions accurately during busy sales periods, such as holidays.

Given the system is under a high volume of traffic during a busy sales period, when managers access the real-time interaction data, then they should see accurate and up-to-date information on customer interactions without data loss or delays.

Data Analytics Dashboard for Customer Insights

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to have a data analytics dashboard for customer insights so that I can visualize product engagement trends and make better inventory and marketing decisions based on customer data.
Description: This requirement covers the creation of a comprehensive analytics dashboard that provides visual representation and analysis of customer interaction data. The dashboard should offer insights such as heat maps showing popular products, filters for specific time frames, and trend analysis features. This will allow users to quickly identify which products are garnering the most customer attention and inquiries. Integrating this dashboard with predictive analytics tools within InvenSage will provide enhanced insights into customer behavior, thereby guiding strategic decisions on inventory and sales initiatives. The expected outcome is to empower users with a data-driven approach to inventory management, enhancing their ability to optimize stock levels and marketing efforts.
Acceptance Criteria: Dashboard displays real-time customer interaction data and trends based on user-selected filters.

Given the user has selected a specific time frame, when they access the dashboard, then the displayed data reflects customer interactions only for that selected period including heat maps and trend analysis.

Users can visualize which products are receiving the most inquiries through an interactive heat map in the dashboard.

Given the user is viewing the dashboard, when they hover over the heat map, then they should see a tooltip displaying the number of customer interactions for each product including details on peak inquiry times.

The dashboard integrates seamlessly with predictive analytics tools to provide actionable insights.

Given that the dashboard has been queried, when the user accesses the predictive analytics module, then they should receive recommendations based on customer interaction data and expected trends.

Users can filter customer interaction data by product categories within the dashboard.

Given the user has selected a product category filter, when they apply this filter, then the dashboard updates to display only the interactions for that specific category including associated metrics.

The dashboard allows users to compare customer interaction data over different time periods.

Given the user selects two different time frames, when they analyze the dashboard, then they should see a side-by-side comparison of customer interactions and trends for those selected periods.

Notification System for Staff Alerts

User Story: As a retail staff member, I want to receive notifications when a product becomes popular so that I can proactively assist customers with their inquiries and increase sales opportunities.
Description: The requirement involves developing a notification system that alerts retail staff when a product receives a significant increase in customer inquiries or interactions. This feature should utilize thresholds defined by the retail manager to trigger notifications through mobile or desktop alerts, allowing staff to proactively engage with customers regarding high-interest products. Integrating this system with customer interaction tracking will ensure that the staff is always aligned with current customer interests. The overarching goal is to enhance customer service and increase the likelihood of sales conversions by ensuring staff awareness and readiness related to popular products.
Acceptance Criteria: Notification for Significant Customer Interaction Increase on Product XYZ

Given that Product XYZ has received more than 30 customer inquiries in a 24-hour period, When the threshold is reached, Then the retail staff should receive a real-time alert notification on their mobile devices.

Adjust Threshold Settings for Alerts by Retail Manager

Given that a retail manager wants to adjust the threshold for customer interactions, When they change the threshold setting in the system, Then the system should successfully save the new threshold and apply it for subsequent notifications.

Display Notification History for Staff Reference

Given that the notification system has sent alerts, When staff access the notification history, Then they should see a log of all alerts sent, including product details and timestamps.

Integration Check with Customer Interaction Tracking Module

Given that the notification system is designed to integrate with the customer interaction tracking module, When a customer interacts with a product, Then the notification system should accurately log the interaction and trigger alerts based on the threshold settings.

Delivery of Alerts via Desktop Application

Given that retail staff are logged into the desktop application, When a customer inquiry exceeds the set threshold, Then they should receive a pop-up alert notification on their desktop screen as well as on mobile.

User Feedback on Notification Relevance

Given that staff receive alerts about customer interactions, When the alert system prompts for feedback after an interaction, Then at least 80% of staff users should respond with a rating of 'Helpful' or 'Very Helpful' within a week.

Multiple Alerts Management for High-Interest Products

Given that multiple products receive significant inquiry spikes, When the system triggers notifications for all affected products, Then staff should receive individual alerts for each product without overloading their notifications.

Historical Data Analysis for Trend Recognition

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to analyze historical customer interaction data so that I can recognize trends over time and adjust our inventory and marketing strategies accordingly.
Description: This requirement entails the development of a feature that allows users to analyze historical customer interaction data to identify trends over time. The system should enable users to view past interactions with various products, enabling a comparison of customer interest across different periods. Integrating this capability will allow retail managers to forecast demand based on historical trends, optimizing inventory levels and reducing excess stock. The expected benefit is that users will gain insights into seasonal trends and changes in customer preferences that can inform marketing strategies and promotional planning.
Acceptance Criteria: Analyzing Historical Customer Interactions on Product XYZ

Given a retail manager is logged into the InvenSage platform, when they navigate to the historical data analysis section and select Product XYZ, then they should be able to view a report showing customer interactions (views, inquiries) with Product XYZ over the last 12 months, broken down by month.

Comparing Trends Over Different Time Periods

Given a user has accessed the trend recognition feature, when they select two different time periods (e.g., Q1 2024 and Q1 2023) for analysis, then they should be presented with a side-by-side comparison of customer interaction trends for all products, highlighting increases or decreases in interest.

Forecasting Demand Based on Historical Trends

Given the historical data analysis is complete, when a user applies the trend recognition model, then the system should generate a demand forecast report for the next quarter based on past interaction data, indicating recommended inventory levels for each product.

Identifying Seasonal Trends

Given that the user is analyzing customer interactions over different seasons, when they filter interactions by season (e.g., Spring 2024), then they should see a summary of items that received the most inquiries, allowing them to identify seasonal trends for future stock planning.

Visualizing Engagement Levels on a Dashboard

Given that a retail manager wants to visualize historical interaction data, when they access the dashboard, then they should see graphical representations (charts/graphs) of the historical interactions for selected products, making it easy to identify engagement levels at a glance.

Exporting Historical Data for External Analysis

Given a user has completed their analysis of historical customer interactions, when they select the export feature, then they should be able to download the interaction data in CSV format for further analysis in external tools.

Integrating Interaction Data with Marketing Strategies

Given that historical interaction trends have been identified, when a retail manager develops a marketing strategy, then they should be able to access insights from the interaction analysis within the marketing plan module to support informed decision-making.

Integration with CRM Systems

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to integrate customer interaction data with our CRM system so that I can better understand customer preferences and tailor our marketing strategies accordingly.
Description: This requirement focuses on the integration of customer interaction insights collected through InvenSage with existing Customer Relationship Management (CRM) systems. By enabling data flow between the two systems, retail managers can gain a holistic view of customer behavior and preferences, aligning inventory with customer purchasing habits. This will enhance the effectiveness of promotions and customer engagement strategies. The expected outcome is a streamlined process that combines customer interaction with historical purchase data, allowing for more personalized marketing and improved customer satisfaction.
Acceptance Criteria: Integration of InvenSage Customer Interaction Insights with Salesforce CRM system allows retail managers to analyze customer inquiries related to specific products.

Given that the integration is established, when a customer inquiry is logged in InvenSage, then the corresponding data should be automatically synced to Salesforce CRM within 5 minutes.

Retail managers utilize the integrated data to view customer interaction trends on the Salesforce dashboard.

Given that data is synced successfully, when the retail manager accesses the Salesforce dashboard, then it must display customer interaction trends with a minimum of 90% accuracy compared to the data in InvenSage.

The integration allows real-time updates to promotions based on customer interests recorded in InvenSage.

Given that the integration is complete, when a product receives a surge in inquiries, then the promotion for that product should be recommended in the CRM within 10 minutes of the increase in inquiries.

Retail managers want to personalize marketing campaigns based on customer behavior by leveraging integrated insights from both systems.

Given the integration, when the retail manager creates a marketing campaign in Salesforce, then they must be able to segment customers based on at least three different interaction metrics from InvenSage.

Ensure data integrity between InvenSage and the CRM system during synchronization.

Given that the integration is active, when data is transferred from InvenSage to the CRM, then 100% of the synchronized records should match in terms of customer inquiries and interactions with products.

Retail managers can view consolidated reports combining data from both InvenSage and the CRM in one interface.

Given that the integration is operational, when the retail manager generates a report, then it should pull data from both systems and display it within 5 seconds without errors.

Retail managers can receive alerts for key metrics based on customer interaction data from InvenSage integrated with the CRM.

Given that integration is completed, when the interaction metrics hit specified thresholds, then alerts must be sent to the retail manager via email or CRM notifications within 2 minutes of detection.

Automated Stock Alerts

Sends timely notifications to retail managers about low stock items requiring immediate attention. This proactive approach allows for quick action to replenish popular items, reducing potential lost sales due to out-of-stock situations.

Requirements

Real-time Stock Monitoring

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to have real-time visibility into my stock levels so that I can make informed decisions about replenishing inventory and avoid stockout situations.
Description: The Real-time Stock Monitoring requirement involves implementing a feature that continuously tracks inventory levels for all products in the system. This allows retail managers to view current stock quantities in real-time. Benefits of this feature include immediate visibility into stock status, enabling better inventory management and reducing the likelihood of stockouts or overstocking. This requirement integrates seamlessly with the existing inventory tracking system, ensuring that data is always up-to-date and reflective of actual stock levels, which also enhances the automated stock alerts feature by providing accurate information for triggering notifications.
Acceptance Criteria: A retail manager logs into InvenSage to quickly check the inventory levels of a specific product category during peak hours before replenishing stock.

Given the retail manager has logged into the system, when they navigate to the inventory dashboard, then the current stock levels for all products in the selected category must be displayed accurately and in real-time.

A retail manager receives an automated stock alert notification on their mobile device due to a low stock level of a popular item.

Given that a product's stock level falls below the predefined threshold, when the manager checks the notifications, then a timely alert must be sent with the product name, current stock level, and recommended action to restock.

A retail manager reviews the historical stock data to analyze trends and make informed decisions about future orders based on stock monitoring data.

Given the manager accesses the historical stock monitoring reports, when they select a specific date range, then all relevant stock level data, including highs, lows, and averages, must be accurately displayed for that timeframe.

A retail manager integrates the real-time stock monitoring feature with their existing ERP system for synchronized data flow.

Given that the manager sets up the integration, when they perform a stock update in the ERP system, then the change must reflect in InvenSage's inventory levels within 5 minutes for seamless data accuracy.

A retail manager attempts to access the real-time stock monitoring feature while offline.

Given that the manager is offline, when they try to access the real-time stock monitoring feature, then they must receive a message stating that the functionality requires an internet connection.

A retail manager conducts a stocktake at the end of the month to validate the accuracy of the real-time monitoring system.

Given that the stocktake is completed, when the manager compares the physical count to the reported stock levels in InvenSage, then any discrepancies should be within a 5% tolerance level for accuracy confirmation.

A retail manager sets a threshold for automated stock alerts within the InvenSage platform.

Given that the manager accesses the settings for automated stock alerts, when they input a threshold value and save it, then the new threshold must be applied immediately for real-time monitoring of the relevant products.

Customizable Alert Thresholds

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to customize alert thresholds for different products so that I receive notifications based on my specific inventory goals and sales patterns.
Description: The Customizable Alert Thresholds requirement allows users to set specific stock level thresholds for each product. This feature provides managers the flexibility to define when they want to be alerted about low stock levels based on their unique business needs and product turnover rates. The ability to customize these thresholds enhances the user experience and ensures that alerts are more relevant and actionable. Integration of this feature with the automated stock alerts will enable tailored notifications that resonate with different product lines and sales patterns, improving responsiveness to inventory needs.
Acceptance Criteria: Scenario to set a customizable alert threshold for a product with variable sales patterns during holiday seasons.

Given that a retail manager is logged in, When they navigate to the inventory management section and select a product, Then they should see an option to set a customizable alert threshold and receive a confirmation message upon saving the changes.

Scenario to validate the notification trigger when stock levels drop below the customized threshold.

Given that a product's stock level has been set with a customizable alert threshold, When the stock level falls below that threshold, Then the retail manager should receive an automated alert notification indicating the low stock status.

Scenario to ensure that customized alert thresholds can be changed at any time during the management of stock.

Given that a retail manager has previously set a customizable alert threshold for a product, When they access the product details again and change the threshold, Then the updated threshold should be saved and reflected in the inventory system without errors.

Scenario to assess the user interface for setting and modifying customizable alert thresholds across multiple products.

Given that a retail manager is on the customizable thresholds page, When they view the list of products, Then they should be able to easily find and modify the alert thresholds for each product without any navigation issues.

Scenario to evaluate the integration effectiveness of customizable alert thresholds with the automated stock alerts feature.

Given that a customizable alert threshold has been set for a product, When the threshold is reached and an alert is triggered, Then the automated stock alerts system should accurately reflect this alert in its notifications.

Scenario to confirm that default alert thresholds can be reverted to their original settings after being customized.

Given that a retail manager has set a customizable alert threshold, When they choose to revert to default settings, Then the system should reset the threshold to its original value, confirming the change with a message.

Scenario to ensure that user permissions are enforced when setting customizable alert thresholds for different user roles.

Given a retail manager with limited permissions, When they attempt to set or modify customizable alert thresholds, Then they should receive an error message indicating insufficient permissions to perform this action.

Automated Reorder Suggestions

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to receive automated reorder suggestions for my inventory items so that I can optimize my stock levels and minimize both excess inventory and stockouts.
Description: The Automated Reorder Suggestions requirement translates real-time inventory data and demand forecasting into actionable reorder recommendations. By analyzing sales trends and inventory levels, the system will suggest optimal reorder quantities and timing to ensure that stock levels are maintained without over-ordering. This functionality supports accurate inventory management and contributes to overall profitability by reducing excess stock and minimizing shortages. The integration with existing systems allows these recommendations to be generated automatically, enhancing the efficiency of the replenishment process and aligning with business objectives.
Acceptance Criteria: As a retail manager, I want to receive notifications for low stock items so that I can reorder them promptly and avoid stockouts.

Given that the stock level of an item drops below the predefined threshold, when the system detects this condition, then it should send a notification to the retail manager indicating which item is low in stock and suggesting an optimal reorder quantity.

As a retail manager, I want to view automated reorder suggestions based on the latest sales trends so that I can make informed inventory decisions.

Given that the sales data has been analyzed, when the retail manager accesses the inventory dashboard, then they should see a list of suggested reorder quantities and timing for each low stock item based on current sales trends and inventory levels.

As a warehouse staff member, I want to implement reorder suggestions received from the system so that I can efficiently replenish inventory.

Given that the retail manager has reviewed the automated reorder suggestions, when they approve the suggestions, then the system should automatically generate purchase orders for the suggested stocks and send them to the respective suppliers.

As a business analyst, I want to evaluate the effectiveness of the automated reorder suggestions in reducing inventory costs so that I can assess the system's impact on profitability.

Given that the automated reorder suggestions have been in use for one month, when the analysis is performed, then the report should indicate a decrease in excess stock and a reduction in stockouts compared to the previous month.

As a retail manager, I want the automated reorder suggestions to consider seasonal trends so that I can adjust my inventory levels according to upcoming demand fluctuations.

Given that the seasonal sales data has been input into the system, when the system generates reorder suggestions, then it should include adjustments based on predicted seasonal demand for every relevant item in the inventory.

As a retail manager, I want to customize alert thresholds for different products so that I can set parameters that align with different product performance and sales behavior.

Given that the retail manager accesses the alert configuration settings, when they set a custom threshold for a specific product, then the system should acknowledge this setting and adjust the alert notifications accordingly.

User Role Management

User Story: As a system administrator, I want to manage user roles and permissions so that I can control access to sensitive information and functionalities within the inventory management system.
Description: The User Role Management requirement allows for the creation and management of different user roles within the InvenSage platform. This feature ensures that retail managers can assign access and functionalities based on roles such as inventory staff, sales associates, and executives. The ability to manage user roles enhances security and operational efficiency, as it restricts access to sensitive information and actions. Integrating user role management into the system will streamline operations, ensuring that each team member has the necessary permissions to perform their tasks effectively without compromising data integrity.
Acceptance Criteria: User Role Creation for Inventory Staff

Given an admin user, when they create a new user role for inventory staff with specific permissions, then the role should be successfully saved and accessible in the user role management interface.

User Role Assignment to Existing Users

Given a retail manager, when they assign the newly created inventory staff role to an existing user, then the user should be granted the permissions associated with that role immediately.

User Role Editing Functionality

Given an admin user, when they edit an existing user role to change permissions, then the changes should be reflected instantly, and the updated role should maintain its integrity in the system.

Permission Restriction for Sales Associates

Given a sales associate user, when they attempt to access inventory management functionalities not assigned to their role, then they should receive an access denied message.

User Role Deletion Process

Given an admin user, when they attempt to delete a user role that is assigned to any user, then the system should prompt an error message indicating that the role cannot be deleted until it is unassigned.

User Role Audit Trail

Given an admin user, when they review the user role management log, then they should see a complete history of changes made to user roles including creation, assignment, editing, and deletion activities.

Multi-channel Integration

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to integrate my inventory management system with multiple sales channels so that I can maintain accurate stock levels and provide a better customer experience.
Description: The Multi-channel Integration requirement involves enabling InvenSage to synchronize inventory data across various sales channels, such as e-commerce platforms, physical stores, and wholesale markets. This feature ensures that stock levels are consistent across all channels, preventing discrepancies and improving customer satisfaction. The integration supports businesses that operate in multiple sales environments, streamlining the inventory management process. By having a unified view of inventory across channels, managers can make better decisions regarding stock management and demand forecasting, bolstering overall efficiency and responsiveness.
Acceptance Criteria: Integration of inventory data across e-commerce platforms and physical stores during a promotional sale event.

Given that the promotional event is live, When stock levels are updated in the e-commerce platform, Then the physical store inventory is automatically updated in real-time showing consistent stock levels across channels.

Synchronization of stock levels when a product is sold in-store and online simultaneously.

Given that a product is sold in-store while an online order is being processed, When the sale is recorded, Then the inventory count is immediately decremented on both the e-commerce platform and the physical store inventory system.

Handling discrepancies in stock levels identified during routine inventory audits.

Given that an inventory audit is performed across all channels, When discrepancies larger than 5% are found, Then an alert is generated for the inventory manager detailing the affected product and the channel.

Real-time inventory visibility for managers across all sales channels through the InvenSage dashboard.

Given that a manager accesses the InvenSage dashboard, When viewing inventory levels, Then stock counts should accurately reflect the quantity available on all sales channels updated within the last 5 minutes.

Automation of reorder processes based on low stock alerts received from multiple channels.

Given that a product’s stock falls below the threshold set in the system, When the low stock alert is triggered, Then an automatic reorder request is sent to the supplier for that product across all relevant sales channels.

User experience for setting up and customizing integration preferences for different sales channels.

Given that a user navigates to the integration settings, When selecting different sales channels to integrate, Then the system must allow easy customization options and save the user’s preferences without errors.

Impact of multi-channel integration on customer satisfaction and order fulfillment.

Given that orders are fulfilled based on integrated inventory data, When measuring customer satisfaction scores post-implementation, Then there should be an improvement of at least 15% compared to the previous period.

Visual Product Placement Guidance

Utilizing augmented reality, this feature guides retail managers on optimal product placement strategies within the store layout. By analyzing customer movement and preferences, it provides recommendations on display setups that enhance customer engagement and sales.

Requirements

Augmented Reality Display Optimization

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to use augmented reality to visualize product placements in my store so that I can optimize display setups and enhance customer engagement while increasing sales.
Description: The Augmented Reality Display Optimization requirement focuses on developing functionality that allows retail managers to visualize product placement within their stores using augmented reality (AR) technology. This feature will analyze customer foot traffic and preferences to suggest optimal layouts for product displays. The system will integrate with InvenSage’s existing inventory management functionalities to ensure that the suggested placements are aligned with inventory levels and turnover rates, allowing retailers to maximize exposure of their best-selling products, enhance customer engagement, and ultimately increase sales. The requirement ensures that retailers can adapt their store layouts based on dynamic customer behavior and trends, thus improving their merchandising strategies and boosting profitability.
Acceptance Criteria: Retail manager scans the store layout using the InvenSage app to visualize product placement options via augmented reality.

Given a retail manager has accessed the augmented reality feature, when they scan the store layout, then the system displays a 3D representation of suggested product placements that maximizes visibility and aligns with inventory levels.

After analyzing customer foot traffic data, the InvenSage system provides product placement recommendations to the retail manager.

Given customer foot traffic data has been analyzed, when the retail manager requests product display recommendations, then the system provides a list of optimal placements including reasonings based on historical data.

The retail manager wants to implement suggested placements and track sales performance before and after changes.

Given a retail manager implements new product placements, when sales data is reviewed two weeks post-implementation, then a comparison report shows at least a 15% increase in sales for the products in the newly designed displays versus previous placements.

A retail manager accesses the augmented reality feature while physically walking through the store to get immediate feedback on product placements.

Given the retail manager uses a smartphone to access the augmented reality feature in-store, when they point the camera at specific areas, then the app overlays suggested products and display setups in real-time.

The retail manager wants to ensure proposed placements comply with stock availability.

Given the retail manager requests product placement recommendations, when the augmented reality suggestions are generated, then the system cross-references inventory data and only suggests placements for products with sufficient stock levels.

The retail manager receives alerts for overstock or understock situations based on product placement analytics.

Given the retail manager has set alerts for inventory levels, when the system detects low stock for a high-trafficked display, then it sends a notification to the retail manager for immediate action.

The retail manager intends to monitor changes in customer engagement following the implementation of optimized display strategies.

Given the retail manager has changed product placements according to AR recommendations, when customer engagement data is analyzed three weeks after changes, then an increase in customer interaction metrics (e.g., dwell time, conversion rates) of at least 10% is reported.

Customer Movement Analytics

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to track customer movement in my store so that I can analyze foot traffic patterns and improve product placement for better sales performance.
Description: The Customer Movement Analytics requirement entails the development of a module that tracks and analyzes customer movement patterns within the retail space. By leveraging data collected from in-store sensors and mobile tracking, this feature will provide insights into high-traffic areas and frequently visited sections of the store. This analysis will be critical for informing product placement decisions, as it will help managers understand which products gain the most engagement and how to strategically arrange displays for maximum impact. The insights generated can be visualized on the InvenSage dashboard, providing a clear representation of customer behavior and preferences, allowing retailers to make data-driven decisions about their inventory and placement strategies.
Acceptance Criteria: Customer Movement Analytics Visualization on InvenSage Dashboard

Given that customer movement data has been collected and analyzed, when a retail manager accesses the InvenSage dashboard, then they should see a visual representation of high-traffic areas with percentage breakdowns of movements.

Integration of In-Store Sensors with Movement Analytics

Given that in-store sensors are installed, when customer data is collected, then the analytics module must successfully retrieve and analyze movement patterns with at least 90% accuracy on recorded traffic.

Feedback Loop for Retail Managers on Product Placement

Given the insights provided by customer movement analytics, when a retail manager views the recommendations for product placements, then they should be able to implement at least 75% of the suggested changes within the first month of access and report a subsequent increase in sales by at least 10%.

Real-Time Updates of Customer Movement Data

Given that the system is in operation, when customer movements are tracked in real-time, then the dashboard should refresh every 5 minutes to display the latest customer movement data without requiring manual refresh.

User Training on Customer Movement Analytics Module

Given that the movement analytics module is implemented, when retail managers receive training, then 90% of participants should report confidence in using the new feature after the training session.

Alerts for Product Placement Recommendations Based on Analytics

Given that customer movement patterns indicate a surge in interest for certain products, when those patterns are realized, then the system should automatically send alerts to retail managers with actionable product placement recommendations within 30 minutes.

Compatibility and Integration with Existing Inventory Systems

Given that InvenSage is working with a retailer's existing inventory system, when the movement analytics module is activated, then it must seamlessly integrate without any data loss or disruption of current operations.

Dynamic Reorder Recommendations

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to receive dynamic reorder recommendations based on real-time analytics so that I can maintain optimal inventory levels and avoid stock-outs or overstock situations.
Description: The Dynamic Reorder Recommendations requirement focuses on implementing a smart system that provides real-time reorder alerts based on product performance and customer movement data. This feature will analyze sales velocity and customer engagement metrics, suggesting reorder points that are dynamic rather than static, allowing retailers to keep up with changing demand patterns. By integrating with the existing inventory management system, this feature will automate the reorder process, ensuring optimal stock levels are maintained without overstocking. The expected outcome is a reduction in inventory holding costs and the prevention of stock-outs, leading to improved service levels and enhanced profitability for retailers.
Acceptance Criteria: As a retail manager, I need to receive real-time reorder alerts for products that are low in stock during peak shopping hours, so that I can quickly respond to customer demand.

Given that a product's stock level falls below the dynamic reorder threshold, when the sales velocity and customer engagement data indicates high demand, then the system should send a real-time reorder alert to the retail manager.

As a retail manager, I want to track the impact of dynamic reorder recommendations on inventory levels, to evaluate whether it effectively reduces stock-outs and overstock situations.

Given the implementation of dynamic reorder recommendations, when analyzing inventory levels over a month, then the number of stock-outs should decrease by at least 20% and overstock situations should be reduced by 15% compared to the previous month without the recommendations.

As a realtor manager, I want to integrate the dynamic reorder recommendations feature with our existing inventory management system, so that the reorder process is automated and efficient.

Given that the dynamic reorder recommendations feature is activated, when a product reaches its dynamic reorder point, then the system should automatically generate and place a reorder request within the existing inventory management system without manual intervention.

As a retail manager, I would like to analyze the effectiveness of the dynamic reorder recommendations by measuring the average turnover rate of products post-implementation, so that I can assess its impact on sales.

Given the dynamic reorder recommendations have been implemented, when calculating the average turnover rate of products over a quarter, then the rate should show an improvement of at least 10% compared to the previous quarter.

As a retail manager, I need to ensure that the reorder alerts are user-friendly and actionable so that I can easily understand what actions are required.

Given that a reorder alert is generated, when the retail manager views the alert, then the alert should clearly display the product name, current stock level, suggested reorder quantity, and a direct link to initiate the reorder process.

As a retail manager, I want to ensure that the dynamic reorder recommendations adapt to seasonal changes in customer preferences, so that stock levels remain optimized throughout the year.

Given that the system analyzes customer movement and sales data, when there is a seasonal change or trend identified, then the dynamic reorder points should be adjusted accordingly to reflect these changes within two weeks of identification.

User-Friendly AR Interface

User Story: As a retail manager, I want a user-friendly interface to interact with the AR product placement feature so that I can easily optimize my store layout without facing technical challenges.
Description: The User-Friendly AR Interface requirement focuses on creating an intuitive interface for retail managers to interact with the augmented reality feature. This interface will simplify how users can input their layout preferences, analyze suggested placements, and visualize changes in real time. By ensuring that the interface is user-centric, the feature will lower the learning curve and foster greater adoption among retail managers who may be hesitant to use advanced technology. The design will prioritize accessibility, clarity, and seamless integration within the InvenSage platform, making it easier for users to leverage AR-driven insights and recommendations effectively.
Acceptance Criteria: Retail manager utilizes the AR interface to input store layout preferences and receives suggestions for product placements.

Given the retail manager has access to the AR interface, when they input layout preferences and initiate product placement analysis, then the AR interface should display at least three optimized product placement suggestions based on customer movement data.

Retail manager reviews and analyzes suggested product placements within the AR interface.

Given that the AR suggestions are displayed, when the retail manager selects a suggested placement, then the system should allow them to visualize the changes in the store layout in real time, including estimated customer engagement metrics.

Retail manager integrates the AR interface with the existing InvenSage inventory management tools to optimize stock levels.

Given the integration of the AR interface with the InvenSage platform, when the retail manager makes a product placement decision, then the inventory management system should automatically update stock levels and suggest reorder quantities based on the new layout.

Retail manager adjusts layout preferences after initial AR suggestions and receives updated recommendations.

Given that the retail manager modifies their layout preferences, when they refresh the AR analysis, then the application should present new product placement recommendations tailored to the updated layout.

Retail manager conducts a training session for staff using the AR interface for product placement.

Given that the retail manager is conducting a training session, when they demonstrate the AR interface, then at least three staff members should be able to navigate the interface and utilize its features for product placements without external assistance.

Retail manager evaluates the effectiveness of the AR suggestions on sales performance.

Given that the new product placements have been implemented, when the retail manager analyzes sales data after one month, then there should be at least a 15% increase in sales of the products that were relocated based on the AR suggestions.

Integration with Existing POS Systems

User Story: As a retail manager, I want InvenSage to integrate with my existing POS system so that I can get real-time insights on sales and inventory for better decision-making.
Description: The Integration with Existing POS Systems requirement involves creating a seamless connection between InvenSage and various point-of-sale (POS) systems currently used by retailers. This integration will allow for real-time data synchronization regarding sales transactions, inventory levels, and product movement. The goal is to enhance data accuracy and provide a comprehensive view of performance metrics that inform product placement and inventory decisions. This requirement is crucial for ensuring that retailers benefit from holistic insights, combining payout data with customer engagement analytics, thus fostering a more informed approach to inventory management and store layout design.
Acceptance Criteria: Retail managers need to integrate InvenSage with their existing POS systems during setup to ensure a smooth transition and data flow for sales and inventory management.

Given the retail manager selects the POS system from the integration list, when they enter the required credentials and confirm the connection, then the system should establish a secure link and display a success message within 5 seconds.

After the integration is complete, retail managers must verify that sales data from the POS system is being accurately reflected in InvenSage in real-time for inventory management purposes.

Given that a sale occurs at the POS system, when the transaction is completed, then the inventory level in InvenSage should decrease accordingly within 1 minute, reflecting the updated quantity.

Retail managers aim to monitor whether the integrated data provides a comprehensive view of sales and inventory metrics for informed decision-making on product placement.

Given the retail manager views the dashboard, when they select the metrics view, then they should see real-time sales data, inventory levels, and the corresponding product placement recommendations.

InvenSage should allow for troubleshooting in case of integration issues with the POS systems, aiding retail managers who encounter any errors during operation.

Given the retail manager encounters a connection error, when they access the troubleshooting guide, then they should find clear steps to resolve the issue or contact support within 2 minutes.

The integration should ensure that any changes in inventory levels due to returns at the POS are accurately reflected in InvenSage without discrepancies.

Given a return is processed at the POS system, when the transaction is finalized, then the inventory level in InvenSage should increase by the returned quantity within 1 minute without errors.

Retail managers need confirmation that the integration complies with data security standards to protect sensitive customer and sales information during transmission.

Given that the integration process is initiated, when data is being exchanged, then all transactions should utilize encryption protocols to secure sensitive data as per industry standards.

Dedicated Training Assistant

Offers interactive training modules for new staff on how to use the In-store Inventory AI Assistant effectively. This ensures that all team members are equipped to make the best use of the tool, improving overall store efficiency and customer service.

Requirements

Interactive Training Modules

User Story: As a new staff member, I want to have access to interactive training modules on the In-store Inventory AI Assistant so that I can quickly learn how to use the tool effectively and serve customers better.
Description: Develop interactive training modules that provide step-by-step guidance on how to effectively use the In-store Inventory AI Assistant. These modules will include video tutorials, quizzes, and practical exercises that enable new staff to learn at their own pace. By providing a comprehensive understanding of the tool's functions and features, the training module will increase user confidence, reduce errors, and enhance overall store efficiency. This requirement is crucial to ensuring that all team members can utilize the AI Assistant competently, leading to improved customer service and stock management.
Acceptance Criteria: Staff Member Accesses Training Module for the First Time

Given a new staff member has logged into the InvenSage system, when they navigate to the training section, then they should see an interactive training module titled 'Using the In-store Inventory AI Assistant' available for them to start.

Video Tutorials Completion Tracking

Given that the training module includes multiple video tutorials, when a staff member completes a video tutorial, then the system must record this completion and update the user's progress within the training module.

Quiz Evaluation After Training Module

Given a staff member has finished the training module, when they attempt the final quiz, then they must achieve a score of at least 80% to consider the training module as successfully completed.

Feedback Submission for Training Module

Given a staff member has completed the training module, when they are prompted for feedback, then they must be able to submit their feedback successfully, and it should be recorded in the system.

Accessing Practical Exercises

Given a staff member is in the training module, when they reach the section for practical exercises, then they must be able to access and complete at least three different practical exercises related to the AI Assistant usage.

Retake Quiz Option

Given that a staff member scores below 80% on the final quiz, when they finish the quiz, then they should be given an option to retake the quiz, which allows them to improve their score and receive additional guidance.

End of Module Assessment

Given a staff member completes the training module, when they finish all components, then they should receive a comprehensive assessment report detailing their training progress, quiz scores, and any pending tasks.

Progress Tracking Dashboard

User Story: As a store manager, I want to track my staff's progress in training modules so that I can ensure they are receiving the appropriate support and guidance during their training.
Description: Implement a dashboard feature within the training module that allows managers to track the progress of their staff as they complete the interactive training modules. This feature will provide insights into which areas each staff member is excelling in, and where additional training may be required. By having access to this data, managers can provide targeted support to individual employees, ensuring that each team member reaches a solid understanding of the AI Assistant. This will facilitate better resource management and optimize training efficiency.
Acceptance Criteria: Progress Tracking for New Staff Training Modules Completion

Given a manager accesses the progress tracking dashboard, When the manager selects a specific staff member, Then the dashboard displays the completion status of all training modules for that staff member, including percentage completed and areas of strength.

Individual Training Insights Display

Given a manager reviews the progress tracking dashboard, When the manager clicks on a specific training module, Then the dashboard shows a detailed report of all staff members' performance in that module, indicating who excelled and who needs additional training.

Progress Tracking Real-Time Updates

Given that a staff member completes a training module, When the module completion is recorded, Then the dashboard reflects the updated progress in real-time for that staff member and the overall training statistics.

Exporting Training Progress Reports

Given a manager wants to evaluate staff training performance, When the manager selects the option to export the training progress report, Then the system generates a downloadable report that includes individual and overall training metrics for all staff members.

Notifications for Incomplete Training Modules

Given a manager is tracking staff progress, When a staff member remains inactive on a module for more than 7 days, Then the manager receives an automated notification highlighting the staff member's incomplete training status.

User-Friendly Dashboard Navigation

Given that a manager accesses the progress tracking dashboard, When navigating through the dashboard, Then the manager can seamlessly move between different sections (individual reports, module completion metrics, etc.) without confusion or errors.

Performance Comparison Across Staff Members

Given a manager is evaluating team performance, When the manager selects the comparison feature on the dashboard, Then the dashboard visually represents performance metrics for all staff members side by side, highlighting strengths and training needs for each individual.

Mobile Accessibility

User Story: As a staff member, I want to access training modules on my mobile device so that I can learn on the go and fit training into my schedule more easily.
Description: Ensure that the interactive training modules are mobile-friendly, allowing staff to access the training materials from their smartphones and tablets. This will accommodate varying schedules and allow staff to engage with the training material anytime and anywhere. Mobile accessibility is essential for fostering a flexible learning environment, leading to higher completion rates of the training modules and enhancing overall staff readiness for using the In-store Inventory AI Assistant.
Acceptance Criteria: Staff members need to access training modules during a break to learn how to use the In-store Inventory AI Assistant.

Given a staff member is logged into the InvenSage training platform on their mobile device, when they navigate to the training module, then the content should load within 5 seconds and be fully accessible without errors.

New staff members want to complete training modules from various locations, such as their homes or while commuting.

Given a staff member has a stable internet connection, when they launch the training module on their mobile device, then the module must be fully functional with no disruptions for at least 30 minutes of continuous use.

A staff member is reviewing the training content on a small-screen mobile device at the store.

Given the training module is designed for mobile use, when the staff member views the module on a smartphone, then all text and images must be clearly displayed without horizontal scrolling and retain readability.

Staff members are required to complete quizzes within the training modules on their mobile devices.

Given a staff member selects a quiz within the training module, when they complete the quiz, then their answers should be recorded, and a confirmation message must be displayed within 3 seconds of submission.

Training modules need to be available for offline access for staff who may not have consistent internet access.

Given a staff member downloads the training module on their mobile device, when they attempt to access the module offline, then the content should be accessible and fully functional without internet connectivity for at least 24 hours.

The training module should be updated with new information immediately available for mobile access.

Given the training module is updated on the platform, when a staff member accesses the module on their mobile device, then they should see the latest content without needing to refresh or reload the app.

Users need notifications about new training modules added to the platform.

Given a new training module is published, when a staff member opens the mobile app, then they should receive a push notification alerting them about the new module within 5 minutes of its publication.

Feedback Mechanism

User Story: As a staff member, I want to provide feedback on the training modules so that the content can be improved for future users and enhance the learning process.
Description: Create a feedback mechanism within the training modules that allows users to provide feedback on the training content and user experience. This will enable continuous improvement of the training material based on user insights and experiences. An effective feedback mechanism is vital for ensuring that the training remains relevant, engaging, and effective for new staff members, ultimately leading to a better learning experience and more proficient use of the AI Assistant.
Acceptance Criteria: Feedback Mechanism Usage During Training Sessions

Given a new staff member is using the training module, when they complete a module, then they should see an option to provide feedback on that module's content and user experience.

Feedback Submission Confirmation

Given a user submits feedback on the training module, when the feedback is submitted successfully, then they should receive a confirmation message indicating their feedback has been recorded.

Feedback Analysis and Reporting

Given feedback has been collected from multiple users, when the feedback is reviewed by the admin, then there should be a report generated that categorizes feedback into themes for improvements.

Feedback Mechanism Accessibility

Given a new staff member is using the training module, when they navigate the interface, then the feedback mechanism should be easily accessible without needing to exit the training module.

User Experience on Feedback Form

Given a user is providing feedback, when they interact with the feedback form, then the form should be user-friendly and allow for easy submission without technical issues.

Feedback Loop Implementation

Given feedback has been implemented into the training modules, when a user accesses a newly updated module, then they should notice the changes made based on previous user feedback.

Anonymous Feedback Option

Given a user is providing feedback, when they are filling out the feedback form, then they should have the option to submit feedback anonymously.

Certification upon Completion

User Story: As a new staff member, I want to receive a certificate after completing the training modules so that I have a tangible acknowledgment of my learning and skills acquired.
Description: Develop a certification process that awards users a certificate upon successfully completing the interactive training modules. This recognition will motivate staff to engage with the training content thoroughly and promote a sense of achievement. The certification can also serve as an internal benchmark for knowledge and competency regarding the In-store Inventory AI Assistant, helping to create a more skilled workforce.
Acceptance Criteria: Certification Process Completion for New Staff

Given a new staff member has completed all interactive training modules, when they submit their module completion information, then a digital certificate of completion should be generated and issued to the staff member's email address within 24 hours.

Certificate Content Verification

Given that a certificate of completion is generated, when the staff member views the certificate, then it should display the staff member's name, training module titles, completion date, and a unique certification ID that can be verified.

Tracking User Engagement with Training Modules

Given that a staff member is enrolled in the training modules, when the staff member logs into the training system, then their progress should be tracked and updated in real-time, showing the percentage of completion for each module.

Admin Access to Certification Data

Given that an administrator needs to monitor staff training, when they access the administrative dashboard, then they should be able to view a report of all issued certificates, including staff names and completion dates.

Multiple Attempts Allowance for Module Completion

Given that a staff member fails a module quiz, when they retake the module, then they should be allowed to attempt the quiz up to three times before the system locks them out for further attempts.

Feedback Collection After Certification

Given that a staff member has received their certificate, when they click the feedback link, then they should be taken to a feedback form to provide their thoughts on the training modules, allowing for a rating scale and suggestions.

Integration of Certificates into Staff Profiles

Given that a staff member has completed the training and received a certificate, when their profile in the system is viewed, then the certificate details should be visible in their profile for internal review by HR or managers.

Integration with User Profiles

User Story: As a manager, I want to see which staff members have completed their training in the user profiles, so that I can assign roles and tasks appropriately based on their training status.
Description: Integrate the training module completion status with user profiles within the system, allowing team leads and managers to view which staff members have completed training and are certified. This integration will help managers quickly identify qualified staff members and streamline the onboarding process by recording training completion automatically. It will also allow for better planning of shifts and assignments based on the skills of available staff.
Acceptance Criteria: User Profile Integration for Training Completion

Given a user profile exists for a staff member, when they complete a training module, then their training completion status should automatically update in their user profile.

Display Training Completion Status in Dashboard

Given that training completion status is integrated into user profiles, when a manager accesses a user dashboard, then they should see a clear and accurate representation of each staff member's training status.

Notifications for Incomplete Training Modules

Given that a staff member has not completed their required training modules, when the training deadline approaches, then an automated notification should be sent to both the staff member and their manager.

Reporting on Training Completion Rates

Given that training completion data is integrated, when a manager generates a report on training completion rates, then the report should reflect accurate statistics on the number of staff trained vs. total staff.

Filtering Staff by Training Completion for Shift Planning

Given that training completion status is displayed in user profiles, when a manager is planning shifts, then they should be able to filter staff members based on their training completion status.

Administering Changes in Training Module Requirements

Given changes in training requirements occur, when an admin updates the training modules, then the system should automatically reflect these changes in user profiles to ensure accurate tracking of training status.

Regulatory Reminder System

The Regulatory Reminder System sends timely notifications about upcoming compliance deadlines and changes in regulations relevant to inventory management. This feature helps users stay informed, preparing them in advance for audits and ensuring they meet industry standards, ultimately reducing risks associated with non-compliance.

Requirements

Automated Compliance Notifications

User Story: As a compliance manager, I want to receive automated notifications about upcoming regulatory deadlines so that I can ensure our business remains compliant and avoid any potential penalties.
Description: The Automated Compliance Notifications requirement involves implementing a system that triggers alerts and reminders for upcoming compliance deadlines, regulatory changes, and necessary documentation updates. This functionality must integrate seamlessly with the existing inventory management workflow, allowing users to receive notifications via email and in-app alerts. By keeping users informed about compliance-related tasks, this feature minimizes the risk of missed deadlines and helps ensure adherence to industry regulations, enhancing the integrity of the inventory management process. The outcome is an improved compliance awareness among users, leading to timely actions on regulatory requirements and reduced liabilities associated with non-compliance.
Acceptance Criteria: User receives an email notification about an upcoming compliance deadline for inventory management.

Given a compliance deadline is approaching, when the system checks for upcoming deadlines, then the user should receive an email notification at least 48 hours before the deadline.

User receives an in-app notification for any changes in inventory management regulations.

Given a regulatory change has been detected, when the change is logged in the system, then the user should see an in-app notification immediately upon logging into the application.

Users can view a history of previous compliance notifications within the application.

Given that compliance notifications have been sent, when users navigate to the notifications history page, then they should see a list of all past notifications with timestamps and details.

System allows users to customize notification preferences for compliance alerts.

Given a user is in the notification settings page, when they select their preferences for receiving alerts, then the system should save these preferences and apply them to all future notifications.

User seeks assistance through the help feature regarding compliance notifications.

Given a user is experiencing issues with compliance notifications, when they access the help feature, then they should find relevant FAQs and contact options for support.

System successfully integrates with existing inventory management workflows to trigger compliance notifications.

Given the user's inventory management system is integrated, when a new compliance deadline is entered into the system, then an automatic notification should be triggered based on users' preferences.

Regulatory Change Tracking

User Story: As an operations manager, I want to track changes in regulations that affect our inventory processes so that I can quickly adjust our compliance strategies accordingly.
Description: The Regulatory Change Tracking requirement focuses on developing a system that monitors and tracks changes in relevant regulations that affect inventory management processes. This feature will capture and analyze updates from official regulatory bodies and provide users with contextualized insights into how these changes impact their operations. It should include features for customizing alerts based on specific industry standards or regions. The benefit of this requirement is that it prepares businesses for adaptations in their procedures in real-time, ensuring smooth transitions and minimizing disruptions. Ultimately, this enhances users' capability to maintain compliance proactively as regulations evolve.
Acceptance Criteria: The system should notify users about upcoming regulatory compliance deadlines relevant to inventory management processes, ensuring they have sufficient time to prepare for audits.

Given a user has set up regulatory alerts for their specific industry, when a new compliance deadline is approaching, then the user should receive a notification at least 14 days prior.

Users should be able to customize alert settings based on their specific industry standards or regions for regulatory changes that affect their inventory processes.

Given a user is in their regulatory alert settings, when they select their industry and region, then the system should properly save their preferences and only alert them about relevant regulatory changes.

The system must provide contextualized insights for any changes in regulations that impact inventory management, helping users understand the implications of these changes.

Given a regulatory change has been detected, when the user accesses the insights page, then they should see a clear explanation of how this change affects their inventory processes along with suggested actions.

Users should be able to view a history of all regulatory changes tracked by the system for their operations, providing accountability and reference.

Given a user requests the history of regulatory changes, when they access the history section, then they should see a complete list of regulatory changes with dates and descriptions of the implications.

The system should ensure that notifications are delivered via multiple channels, such as email and in-app alerts, ensuring users receive important updates in a timely manner.

Given a regulatory change notification is generated, when the change occurs, then the system should send notifications via email and display an in-app alert for the user.

The system must allow users to dismiss notifications and provide options for re-enabling them at a later time, ensuring that users manage their notifications effectively.

Given a user receives a notification about a compliance deadline, when they choose to dismiss it, then the notification should be marked as dismissed and not shown again unless re-enabled by the user.

The system should offer a dashboard widget summarizing upcoming regulatory changes and their deadlines, providing users with a quick overview of compliance status.

Given a user accesses their dashboard, when they view the regulatory reminder widget, then it should display a list of upcoming deadlines and the corresponding regulatory changes in a clear format.

Integrated Compliance Checklist

User Story: As a warehouse manager, I want to use an integrated checklist for compliance tasks so that I can ensure all required actions are completed systematically and on time.
Description: The Integrated Compliance Checklist requirement entails creating a unified checklist tool within the InvenSage platform that outlines necessary compliance tasks related to inventory management. This checklist will guide users through the compliance process, ensuring they complete all required actions before deadlines. Users should be able to add notes, attach documents, and mark tasks as completed. The benefit of this feature is to enhance accountability and provide a clear framework for compliance, allowing users to visually track their progress and ensure no step is overlooked. The expected outcome is a more organized and systematic approach to managing compliance activities, which reduces oversight and errors.
Acceptance Criteria: User adds a new compliance task to the Integrated Compliance Checklist.

Given the user is logged into InvenSage, when they navigate to the Integrated Compliance Checklist and select 'Add Task', then the user should be able to input task details including title, description, and due date, and the task should appear in the checklist after saving.

User marks a compliance task as completed.

Given the user is viewing their Integrated Compliance Checklist, when they select a task and click 'Mark as Completed', then the task should change its status to completed and should be visually indicated as such in the checklist.

User attaches a document to a compliance task.

Given the user is on the compliance task details page, when they click 'Attach Document' and successfully upload a file, then the document link should be visible in the task details and accessible for download.

User adds notes to a compliance task.

Given the user is editing a compliance task, when they input text into the notes section and save the task, then the notes should be displayed clearly in the task details section, allowing for review at any time.

User receives a notification for upcoming compliance deadlines.

Given the user has compliance tasks with approaching deadlines, when they access their dashboard, then they should see notifications highlighting these tasks and their respective deadlines.

User views the progress of completed and pending tasks in the checklist.

Given the user is on the Integrated Compliance Checklist page, when they check their progress, then they should see a summary indicating the number of completed tasks versus total tasks, along with a visual progress bar.

User edits an existing compliance task in the compliance checklist.

Given the user is viewing their Integrated Compliance Checklist, when they select a task and choose 'Edit', then they should be able to modify the task details and save changes, reflecting those changes immediately in the checklist.

Checklist Customization Toolkit

The Checklist Customization Toolkit allows users to create personalized compliance checklists tailored to their specific industry needs and regulatory requirements. This feature empowers businesses to fine-tune their compliance processes, ensuring that all necessary areas are covered and enhancing operational efficiency.

Requirements

Dynamic Checklist Template Creation

User Story: As a compliance manager, I want to create dynamic checklists tailored to my industry so that I can ensure all regulatory requirements are met without manual tracking.
Description: The Dynamic Checklist Template Creation requirement enables users to design and customize compliance checklists with ease, allowing for the incorporation of various fields and types of inputs relevant to specific industries. Users can save these templates for reuse, ensuring consistency across teams and adherence to regulatory standards. This feature not only speeds up the checklist creation process but also reduces the likelihood of oversight by automating reminders and updates, thus enhancing operational efficiency and compliance tracking.
Acceptance Criteria: User creates a dynamic checklist template for a new compliance requirement specific to the e-commerce industry.

Given a user is logged into the InvenSage platform, When they navigate to the Checklist Customization Toolkit and select 'Create Template', Then they should be able to choose from a variety of input types (text, checkbox, date) and save the template for future use without errors.

Industry-specific users want to add compliance requirements to an existing checklist template.

Given a user is editing an existing compliance checklist template, When they add a new field relevant to their industry and save the template, Then the new field should be present in the checklist when it is accessed again.

Users need to receive reminders for compliance checklist updates based on regulatory changes in their industry.

Given that a checklist template has associated regulatory requirements, When a regulation is updated, Then the user should receive a notification reminding them to review and update their checklist within 7 days.

A team member uses a saved checklist template to conduct a compliance review.

Given a compliance checklist is saved and available, When a team member selects the shared checklist template and fills it out, Then upon submission, the responses should be recorded properly and aligned with the original template structure.

Users wish to share their customized checklist templates with other team members within the InvenSage platform.

Given a user has created a checklist template, When they choose to share it with team members, Then all selected team members should be able to view and use the shared checklist without losing any template functionalities.

Users want to delete a checklist template that is no longer needed.

Given a user navigates to their list of saved checklist templates, When they select a template and choose 'Delete', Then the template should be removed permanently from their list without any confirmation errors.

Users want to ensure that their checklist templates comply with industry standards before finalization.

Given a user has created a checklist template, When they complete the template and click 'Validate', Then the system should run checks against predefined industry standards and provide feedback on compliance status before allowing finalization.

Collaborative Checklist Sharing

User Story: As a team leader, I want to share compliance checklists with my team so that we can collaborate and ensure consistent adherence to industry standards.
Description: The Collaborative Checklist Sharing feature facilitates team collaboration by allowing users to share their customized checklists with colleagues in real-time. Users can set permissions to control who can view or edit the checklists, fostering teamwork and ensuring everyone is aligned on compliance standards. This requirement enhances communication within teams and ensures consistent compliance practices across multiple users, improving overall operational efficiency.
Acceptance Criteria: User A creates a customized compliance checklist and shares it with User B in real-time using the Collaborative Checklist Sharing feature.

Given User A has created a checklist, when User A shares the checklist with User B, then User B should receive an instant notification and be able to access the checklist with the appropriate permissions.

User C attempts to edit a checklist shared by User D but does not have the necessary permissions to do so.

Given User C does not have edit permissions, when User C tries to make changes to the checklist shared by User D, then User C should receive an error message indicating insufficient permissions.

User E modifies a compliance checklist and wants to notify all users who have access to it.

Given User E has made changes to a checklist, when User E selects the option to notify all collaborators, then all users who have access to the checklist should receive an email notification detailing the changes made.

User F wants to view a checklist shared by User G, but the checklist is archived.

Given User G has archived the checklist, when User F attempts to access the checklist, then User F should be unable to view or interact with the checklist and receive a message indicating that it is archived.

User H wishes to remove a collaborator from a shared checklist after a team reassessment.

Given User H is the owner of the checklist, when User H removes User I from the list of collaborators, then User I should no longer have access to the checklist and receive a notification confirming their removal.

Automated Compliance Alerts

User Story: As a business owner, I want to receive automated alerts for compliance deadlines so that I can take timely action to avoid penalties and ensure smooth operations.
Description: The Automated Compliance Alerts requirement introduces a system for notifying users about upcoming deadlines, necessary updates, or changes in regulatory requirements related to their custom checklists. By setting user-defined triggers, this feature ensures that businesses are proactively informed of compliance obligations, reducing the risk of penalties for non-compliance. This feature serves as an essential tool for maintaining up-to-date compliance practices and improving accountability within organizations.
Acceptance Criteria: User sets up a custom checklist for their industry with various compliance items and specific deadlines.

Given a user has created a custom checklist with specific deadlines, when the deadlines are approaching, then the user should receive automated alerts via their chosen notification method (email, SMS, etc.).

A user modifies an existing checklist to add new compliance items and updates the deadlines for existing items.

Given a user has modified their checklist and saved the changes, when the deadlines for any compliance items are updated, then the system should trigger alerts based on the new deadlines.

A user accesses the system the day before a compliance deadline to check for alerts.

Given a user logs in the day before their set compliance deadline, when viewing their dashboard, then they should see a summary of all upcoming alerts related to their custom checklist.

A user removes a compliance item from their checklist after realizing it is no longer applicable.

Given a user removes a compliance item and saves the checklist, when the compliance item is removed, then the system should cease sending alerts for that item.

A user defines a custom trigger for a compliance item based on an external regulatory change.

Given a user has set up a trigger for alerts based on external regulatory changes, when a relevant change occurs, then the automated system should notify the user about the update within 24 hours.

A user accesses their compliance checklist on a mobile device and wants to ensure they receive alerts.

Given a user accesses their checklist from a mobile device, when they modify their notification preferences, then the system should successfully update their preferences and notify them accordingly.

A user checks their notification history for compliance alerts they previously received.

Given a user navigates to the notification history section, when they review past alerts, then the system should display all compliance alerts sent to the user, organized by date.

Compliance Checklist Analytics

User Story: As a data analyst, I want to analyze compliance checklist data so that I can identify trends and improve our compliance strategy based on performance metrics.
Description: The Compliance Checklist Analytics feature aggregates data from completed checklists, providing insights into compliance performance over time. Users can visualize trends, identify areas of risk, and generate reports that help in strategic decision-making. This requirement empowers businesses to refine their compliance processes based on real data, enhancing their overall efficiency and risk management strategies.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the Compliance Checklist Analytics dashboard to view the performance metrics of their completed compliance checklists over the last quarter.

Given that the user is logged into the system, when they navigate to the Compliance Checklist Analytics dashboard, then they should see a summary displaying completion rates, average compliance scores, and areas flagged for improvement.

User generates a report based on the data aggregated from completed compliance checklists for a specified time period.

Given that the user is on the Compliance Checklist Analytics page, when they select a start and end date and click 'Generate Report', then a downloadable report should be created that includes visual graphs and detailed metrics of compliance performance during that period.

User views visual trends in compliance performance over time to identify potential areas of risk.

Given that the user is on the Compliance Checklist Analytics dashboard, when they select the 'Trends' tab, then they should see a line graph displaying compliance scores over the selected time frame, highlighting any downward trends with color-coded alerts.

User receives a notification for compliance checklists that consistently show low scores across multiple time periods.

Given that the analytics system is continuously monitoring compliance checklist scores, when a checklist scores below a defined threshold for three consecutive reporting periods, then an automated alert should be sent to the user for review.

User customizes the data displayed in the Compliance Checklist Analytics based on specific metrics they are interested in.

Given that the user is on the Compliance Checklist Analytics page, when they select or deselect specific metrics from the settings menu, then the displayed data should update in real time to reflect the user's preferences.

User accesses historical compliance data to compare performance across different time periods.

Given that a user selects a specific year and area of the compliance checklist, when they click 'Compare', then the system should show a side-by-side comparison of compliance performance against the selected metrics over the two specified time periods.

Checklist Version Control

User Story: As a compliance officer, I want to track changes in my compliance checklists so that I can ensure all modifications are documented and approved.
Description: The Checklist Version Control functionality allows users to track changes made to their compliance checklists over time. Users can access previous versions, see who made changes, and revert to older versions if necessary. This ensures transparency and accountability in the checklist management process, making it easier to understand how compliance requirements evolve and ensuring that the most current version is always in use.
Acceptance Criteria: Accessing Previous Versions of a Compliance Checklist

Given a user is on the checklist management page, when they select a specific checklist, then they should be able to view a list of all previous versions with timestamps and user details for each change.

Tracking Changes Made to a Compliance Checklist

Given a user has made changes to a compliance checklist, when the user saves the checklist, then the system should automatically log the change, including the date, time, and user information.

Reverting to an Older Version of a Compliance Checklist

Given a user is viewing the version history of a checklist, when they select an older version to revert to, then the system should replace the current checklist with the selected version and notify the user of the successful update.

Receiving Notifications for Checklist Changes

Given a user is assigned to a compliance checklist, when any changes are made to that checklist, then the user should receive an email notification detailing the changes made and by whom.

Ensuring Compliance with the Latest Checklist Version

Given multiple users are accessing a compliance checklist, when a change is made and saved, then all users should see a prompt to refresh their view to the latest version within 5 minutes.

Displaying Version Control History

Given a user views the compliance checklist, when they access version control, then they should see a detailed history log that includes changes made, the author of each change, and comparison notes.

Audit Trail Insights

Audit Trail Insights automatically logs compliance checklist activities and changes, providing a comprehensive history of compliance actions taken. This feature promotes transparency and accountability within the organization, while also simplifying the audit process by presenting easily accessible documentation.

Requirements

Automatic Change Logging

User Story: As a compliance officer, I want to automatically log all changes in the compliance checklist so that I can maintain a clear, accessible history of compliance actions taken for audits.
Description: The requirement involves the automatic logging of all compliance checklist activities and changes within the Audit Trail Insights feature. This logging mechanism should record the date, time, user, and nature of changes made to ensure a detailed history of compliance actions. This requirement is essential for enhancing transparency within the organization, enabling easy tracking of who made modifications and when, which ultimately simplifies audit processes by providing readily accessible and verifiable documentation of compliance activities.
Acceptance Criteria: Automatic logging of changes made to compliance checklists by users during routine audits.

Given a user updates a compliance checklist, when the action is completed, then the system should automatically log the date, time, user, and change details in the Audit Trail Insights.

Reviewing the audit trail for compliance activities after an incident is reported.

Given that an incident has occurred, when the audit trail is accessed, then the logged activities should display a complete history of compliance actions for the relevant period, including user details and timestamps without errors.

Verifying user permissions and access to audit logs for security purposes.

Given that a non-authorized user attempts to access the Audit Trail Insights, when the user tries to view the logs, then access should be denied, and a notification stating 'Insufficient Permissions' should be displayed.

Generating reports from the audit logs for regulatory compliance reviews.

Given that a compliance officer requests a report, when the audit logs are filtered by date and user, then a report should be generated that accurately reflects all compliance checklist activities for the selected criteria, and it should be downloadable in PDF format.

Tracking changes made to the compliance checklists during system updates and maintenance.

Given a system update has been performed, when a compliance checklist is modified as part of the update, then the system should log the changes made with explicit details regarding the system update and the user responsible.

Automatically notifying users about successful logging of compliance activities.

Given a user completes a compliance checklist update, when the logging occurs successfully, then the user should receive a notification confirming that the changes have been logged.

User-Friendly Interface for Audit Access

User Story: As an auditor, I want a user-friendly interface to access compliance logs so that I can efficiently find and review specific compliance actions during audits.
Description: This requirement focuses on creating an intuitive user interface that allows users to easily access the logged compliance activities. The interface should incorporate filtering options, date ranges, and user-specific logs to ensure that users can find necessary information quickly. This feature will enhance the efficiency of users when conducting audits, leading to easier compliance verification and faster decision-making processes within the organization.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the Audit Trail Insights feature to retrieve compliance checklist activities for the past month during a scheduled audit review meeting.

Given the user is logged into the InvenSage platform, When the user selects the Audit Trail Insights feature and inputs a date range for the past month, Then the system should display all compliance activities logged within that time frame in a clear and organized manner.

An auditor filters compliance activities by user to evaluate the performance of individual team members.

Given the user has selected the Audit Trail Insights feature, When the user applies a filter to view logs for a specific user, Then the system should accurately display only the compliance activities associated with that user, ensuring all entries are correct and accessible.

The user navigates the Audit Trail Insights interface to locate a specific compliance activity related to a product return.

Given the user is in the Audit Trail Insights interface, When the user searches for compliance activities by keyword related to a product return, Then the system should provide a list of relevant activities matching the search term, allowing the user to easily identify the necessary information.

A compliance officer reviews the system's user-specific logs to ensure accountability during a compliance assessment.

Given the compliance officer has access to the Audit Trail Insights feature, When the compliance officer selects user-specific logs, Then the system should accurately compile compliance activities for that user, presenting the data in an easily digestible format for review.

The user conducts an audit for multiple compliance checklists in one session.

Given the user wants to conduct a comprehensive audit review, When they access the Audit Trail Insights feature and select multiple checklists at once, Then the system should display the combined logs for all selected checklists, enabling efficient auditing without switching contexts.

User views the Audit Trail Insights interface on a mobile device during an off-site meeting.

Given the user accesses the InvenSage platform on a mobile device, When the user navigates to the Audit Trail Insights feature, Then the interface should render appropriately, allowing the user to filter and view compliance activities without loss of functionality or readability.

Role-Based Access Control

User Story: As an administrator, I want to ensure that only authorized personnel can access the audit logs so that I can protect sensitive compliance information and maintain security across our system.
Description: This requirement includes implementing role-based access control (RBAC) for viewing and interacting with the Audit Trail Insights. Different user roles (e.g., admin, compliance officer, auditor) should have varying access levels, ensuring that sensitive information is only accessible to authorized personnel. This feature is crucial for enhancing data security and maintaining confidentiality while ensuring that users can perform their roles effectively within the compliance processes.
Acceptance Criteria: As an admin, I need to set up the initial user roles and permissions within the Audit Trail Insights module to ensure that users have appropriate access levels based on their job functions.

Given that I am logged in as an admin, when I navigate to the role management section and create a new role with specified permissions, then that role should be saved and reflected in the user access settings.

As a compliance officer, I want to access the Audit Trail Insights to review compliance activities pertinent to my responsibilities without exposure to information outside my role's authorization.

Given that I am logged in as a compliance officer, when I attempt to access the Audit Trail Insights, then I should see only the data related to my compliance activities and not any sensitive information reserved for higher roles.

As an auditor, I need to view the complete audit trail for a specific compliance activity to ensure accountability and accuracy in reporting.

Given that I am logged in as an auditor, when I filter the audit trail by a specific compliance activity, then I should be able to access a complete history of actions related to that activity, including timestamps and user details.

As a system administrator, I want to modify permissions for existing user roles to align with organizational policy changes regarding access to the Audit Trail Insights.

Given that I am logged in as a system administrator, when I update the permissions for a specified user role, then those changes should take immediate effect and be reflected in the access levels of users assigned to that role.

As a user in a restricted role, I need to ensure that attempts to access unauthorized sections of the Audit Trail Insights result in an appropriate error message without exposure to sensitive data.

Given that I am logged in as a user with restricted access, when I try to access a section of the Audit Trail Insights that is not permitted for my role, then I should receive a clear error message indicating insufficient permissions without any data leakage.

As an organization, I want to ensure that all interactions with the Audit Trail Insights are logged appropriately to maintain compliance and accountability.

Given that I am logged in with any user role, when I perform actions within the Audit Trail Insights module, then each action should be logged with the user ID, timestamp, and type of action performed for documentation purposes.

Notifications for Compliance Changes

User Story: As a compliance officer, I want to receive notifications about changes in the compliance checklist so that I can act quickly on important updates and ensure adherence to company policies.
Description: Develop a notification system that alerts relevant users when significant changes are made in the compliance checklist, such as additions, deletions, or modifications. These notifications should be configurable based on user preferences (e.g., email alerts, in-app notifications) and can help in promoting accountability and ensuring all stakeholders are informed of compliance-related activities immediately. This requirement will enhance coordination and timely responses to compliance issues.
Acceptance Criteria: Notification system triggers alerts for compliance checklist modifications by authorized users.

Given a compliance checklist, when an authorized user adds, deletes, or modifies an item, then all configured users should receive a notification for that specific change.

Configurable user preferences for notification types and methods are available and functional.

Given a user profile, when a user updates their notification preferences to include email alerts or in-app notifications, then the system should save these preferences and apply them to subsequent compliance checklist changes.

All relevant users are informed regularly of significant compliance checklist changes as per their configurations.

Given a compliance checklist with recent changes, when the notifications are sent out, then users who have preferences set for notifications must receive them within 5 minutes of the changes being made.

Audit trail insights are accessible and provide documentation of notification history related to compliance checklist changes.

Given the audit trail logs, when a user queries compliance change notifications, then the system should provide a comprehensive log detailing the timestamp, type of changes made, and recipients notified.

User interface supports clear and easy access to change notifications and their history.

Given the notification settings page, when a user navigates to it, then they should see a well-organized list of past notifications related to compliance changes along with options to configure settings.

System performance meets standards with the implementation of the notification system for compliance changes.

Given simultaneous compliance checklist modifications by multiple users, when changes occur, then the notification system should not exceed a response time of 2 seconds for dispatching notifications.

Data Export Functionality

User Story: As an auditor, I want to export audit trail data to a file format so that I can share it with stakeholders and use it for further reporting and analysis.
Description: Implement functionality that allows users to export logged audit data for further analysis or archiving purposes. The audits can be exported in various formats (e.g., CSV, PDF), making it easier for users to share compliance data with stakeholders or save for record-keeping. This requirement is important to ensure that users can leverage compliance data outside the platform for reporting and accountability purposes.
Acceptance Criteria: User needs to export audit trail data of compliance checklists for review by management at the end of each month.

Given that the user is logged in and has access to Audit Trail Insights, when the user selects the export option and chooses 'CSV' format, then the system should generate a downloadable CSV file containing all logged audit data for the specified period.

Regulatory auditor requests recent compliance audit records in a suitable format for analysis during an audit review.

Given that the user is on the Audit Trail Insights page, when the user selects 'PDF' as the export format and clicks 'Export', then the system should create a well-formatted PDF document with the complete audit history for the last six months.

User wants to ensure that exported data is accurate and reflects the latest compliance activities.

Given that the user has just completed several compliance checks, when they export the audit data, then the exported file must include all activities performed since the last export with timestamps and user details for each action.

Management team requires a summary overview of compliance progress in a shared team meeting.

Given that the user selects the export option to summarize auditable compliance data, when they choose 'CSV' format, then the system should generate an aggregated file with counts of different compliance states (e.g., completed, pending, overdue), along with the total number of audits conducted.

Audit trail data needs to be shared with an external stakeholder for independent review.

Given that the user is preparing for a stakeholder meeting, when they select the option to export audit data, then they should have the choice to include a cover page in the PDF report that outlines the purpose and scope of the document.

User seeks to archive completed audit trail data from the previous year for future reference and compliance needs.

Given that the user navigates to the audit archive section, when they choose to export audit data from the past year in 'CSV' format, then the system should successfully retrieve and save the requested data without any errors or omissions.

Interactive Compliance Dashboard

The Interactive Compliance Dashboard consolidates all compliance-related metrics and checklist statuses into an easy-to-navigate interface. This feature delivers a clear view of compliance performance over time, enabling users to quickly identify areas needing attention and ensuring ongoing adherence to industry standards.

Requirements

Real-time Compliance Metrics

User Story: As an inventory manager, I want to see real-time compliance metrics so that I can quickly address any compliance issues before they escalate.
Description: The Real-time Compliance Metrics requirement involves the implementation of live metrics that reflect the current compliance status of inventory management practices. This feature will allow users to view immediate updates on compliance statuses, enabling them to make timely adjustments and selections in inventory management. By integrating this feature with InvenSage’s existing real-time tracking capabilities, users can receive alerts or notifications about compliance changes as they occur, significantly lowering the risk of falling behind on industry regulations and standards.
Acceptance Criteria: User views the Interactive Compliance Dashboard and expects to see real-time updates on compliance metrics as inventory changes occur.

Given the user is logged into the InvenSage platform, When inventory changes occur, Then compliance metrics in the Interactive Compliance Dashboard should refresh in real-time with no significant delay (less than 5 seconds).

User receives a notification for compliance status changes directly from the Interactive Compliance Dashboard.

Given that compliance standards have changed, When a compliance metric is affected, Then the user should receive a notification alerting them of the change within the Dashboard.

User analyzes historical compliance metrics over time to ensure adherence to industry standards.

Given the user accesses the compliance history section of the Interactive Compliance Dashboard, When the user selects a specific time frame, Then compliance metrics should display accurately for that selected period without any data discrepancies.

User identifies non-compliance alerts on the dashboard.

Given the user is monitoring the Interactive Compliance Dashboard, When a compliance metric falls below the acceptable threshold, Then the system should prominently display a non-compliance alert with suggested remediation actions.

User utilizes the compliance dashboard to generate a report for regulatory submissions.

Given the user has completed their data analysis within the Interactive Compliance Dashboard, When generating a report for compliance review, Then the report should accurately reflect all compliance metrics and be exportable in multiple formats (PDF, Excel).

System performs an integrity check to validate compliance metrics displayed on the dashboard.

Given that the user is reviewing compliance metrics, When the system performs an integrity check, Then it should confirm that 100% of the displayed metrics are sourced from valid and up-to-date data.

User customizes their compliance dashboard view to highlight crucial metrics relevant to their business.

Given that the user is on the Interactive Compliance Dashboard, When the user customizes their view, Then the dashboard should save the customization options and persist them during future logins.

Historical Compliance Trends

User Story: As a compliance officer, I want to view historical compliance trends so that I can understand how our compliance status has changed and identify areas for improvement.
Description: The Historical Compliance Trends requirement aims to provide users with a visual representation of compliance data over time, showcasing how compliance statuses have fluctuated. Users should have the ability to analyze trends, allowing them to recognize patterns, improve forecasting for compliance-related matters, and create strategies for maintaining strong compliance records. This functionality will be particularly beneficial for compliance audits and evaluations, making it easier to showcase adherence to regulations over time.
Acceptance Criteria: User wants to view the compliance data trends for the past year to analyze the compliance performance of their organization.

Given the user is on the Interactive Compliance Dashboard, when they select the 'Historical Compliance Trends' option for the past year, then the system should display a line graph showing compliance status over time with data points for each month.

User needs to filter compliance trends based on specific compliance metrics like 'Data Protection' or 'Health & Safety' to focus on relevant areas.

Given the user is on the Historical Compliance Trends section, when they apply the 'Data Protection' filter, then the dashboard should update to display only the trends related to Data Protection compliance metrics.

User wants to compare compliance performance between two distinct periods to identify improvements or declines in compliance.

Given the user is on the Historical Compliance Trends dashboard, when they select two different time periods for comparison, then the system should display side-by-side comparison charts for each selected period, indicating compliance metric changes.

User requires a summary report of compliance trend analysis to present in an upcoming audit.

Given the user has analyzed the compliance trends, when they click on 'Generate Report', then the system should produce a downloadable report summarizing the compliance metrics and trends over the selected time frame.

User wants to set alerts for compliance metrics that fall below a certain threshold over time to proactively address potential issues.

Given the user is on the dashboard, when they set an alert threshold for a compliance metric, then the system should notify the user through email or dashboard alerts if that metric falls below the established threshold within the specified time frame.

User needs to visualize compliance data in various formats for better insight and decision-making.

Given the user selects the 'View as' option on the Historical Compliance Trends dashboard, when they choose a different representation (e.g., bar chart, pie chart), then the system should re-render the compliance data in the selected format without losing any information.

User seeks to download the compliance trends data in a CSV format for further analysis.

Given the user is viewing the Historical Compliance Trends, when they click on the 'Download as CSV' button, then the system should initiate a download of the displayed data in CSV format.

Custom Compliance Checklists

User Story: As a business owner, I want to create custom compliance checklists so that I can ensure our specific industry standards are met efficiently.
Description: The Custom Compliance Checklists requirement will enable users to create and manage personalized compliance checklists that align with their specific regulatory needs. Users will be able to add, modify, and prioritize items on their checklists, ensuring that their compliance measures are tailored to their operations. This feature will enhance user engagement and help users stay organized, providing flexibility in managing diverse compliance requirements.
Acceptance Criteria: User creates a custom compliance checklist for their specific regulatory needs.

Given the user is logged in, when they navigate to the compliance dashboard and select 'Create New Checklist', then they should be able to add items, modify them, and save the checklist successfully.

User modifies an existing compliance checklist to prioritize certain compliance items.

Given the user has an existing checklist, when they open the checklist and reorder items, then the changes should be saved and reflected in the checklist view immediately.

User adds a new compliance item to their existing checklist.

Given the user is viewing a specific checklist, when they click on 'Add Item', enter a new item and save it, then the new item should appear at the bottom of the checklist.

User deletes a compliance item from their checklist.

Given the user is managing their checklist, when they select an item and click 'Delete', then the item should be removed from the checklist without affecting other items.

User views the compliance dashboard to monitor checklist statuses over time.

Given the user has created multiple checklists, when they access the compliance dashboard, then they should see an overview of compliance performance including completion percentages for each checklist.

User prints their customized compliance checklist for physical records.

Given the user has a completed checklist, when they select 'Print' from the dashboard, then a print dialog should appear, allowing them to print the checklist in a clear format.

Interactive Compliance Alerts

User Story: As a user, I want to receive interactive compliance alerts so that I can quickly address any compliance issues and meet deadlines.
Description: The Interactive Compliance Alerts requirement will notify users of any compliance breaches or upcoming deadlines. This feature will use automated alerts to highlight areas that require immediate action, ensuring proactive management of compliance responsibilities. The alerts can be customized based on user preferences, allowing them to set thresholds for different compliance criteria. Enhanced by push notifications or email integration, users will have real-time awareness of their compliance obligations.
Acceptance Criteria: User receives notifications for compliance breaches when a compliance guideline is not met during a scheduled audit.

Given a compliance breach exists, when the audit results are finalized, then the system should automatically send a push notification and email to the user within 5 minutes.

User sets up custom alert thresholds for different compliance criteria based on their operational needs.

Given the user has specific compliance criteria, when they configure the alert thresholds, then the system should allow saving these thresholds without error and reflect them in the notification settings.

User checks the compliance dashboard to identify areas needing immediate attention before an upcoming deadline.

Given the dashboard is open, when the user views the compliance metrics, then all metrics that are approaching or have exceeded the compliance threshold should be highlighted in red with applicable alerts.

User wants to review compliance alerts history to track past notifications and responses.

Given the user accesses the compliance alerts history, when they select a date range, then the system should display all alerts sent within that range, including their statuses and responses.

User would like to modify the configuration of their compliance alerts preferences.

Given the user is in the alert preferences section, when they change any settings, then the system should save these changes and present a confirmation message to the user.

User receives a summary of compliance alerts at the end of each week to review their compliance status.

Given the end of the week, when the user logs into the system, then a summary report of all compliance alerts received during the week should be available for review on the dashboard.

Multi-user Compliance Roles

User Story: As a team leader, I want to assign multi-user compliance roles so that I can control who accesses which compliance information according to their responsibilities.
Description: The Multi-user Compliance Roles requirement will support the assignment of different roles to users within the compliance dashboard. Users can have varying levels of access based on their roles, ensuring that sensitive compliance information is protected while allowing relevant team members to contribute to compliance management. This will facilitate collaboration and accountability within teams, streamlining the compliance process across the organization.
Acceptance Criteria: User Role Assignment for Compliance Dashboard Access

Given an admin user on the Interactive Compliance Dashboard, when they assign a user role (Admin, Editor, Viewer), then the assigned user should receive an email notification confirming their new role and access level immediately after the assignment.

Role-Based Access Control Testing

Given a user assigned the Viewer role, when they access the Interactive Compliance Dashboard, then they should only see compliance metrics relevant to their permissions and should be unable to edit any compliance data.

Audit Trail for Role Changes

Given a compliance manager modifies user roles, when the modification is saved, then the system should log the change in an audit trail, capturing the user’s ID, previous role, new role, and timestamp of the change.

Multi-User Collaboration on Compliance Tasks

Given multiple users assigned with the Editor role, when they collaborate on compliance tasks within the Interactive Compliance Dashboard, then all edits made by any Editor should be reflected in real-time for all other Editor users without delay.

Default Role Assignment upon User Creation

Given a new user created in the system, when their profile is set up, then the default role assigned should be Viewer unless specified otherwise by the Admin during the creation process.

Role Modification Alert for Users

Given an existing user whose role has been modified by the admin, when they attempt to log into the Interactive Compliance Dashboard, then they should receive a notification indicating their role has changed and to review their new access level.

Compliance Performance Reporting by Roles

Given the Interactive Compliance Dashboard, when a user with the Admin role generates a compliance report, then the report must include data specific to all users and their role-based contributions over the selected time frame.

Automated Compliance Reporting

Automated Compliance Reporting generates real-time compliance reports based on completed checklists and audit histories. This feature streamlines the reporting process, saving time and effort while providing stakeholders with clear insights into compliance status and any areas for improvement.

Requirements

Real-time Data Integration

User Story: As a compliance officer, I want real-time updates on compliance checklists so that I can generate accurate reports without manual data entry.
Description: Real-time Data Integration ensures that compliance reporting is dynamically updated as new data and checklist entries are completed. This functionality streamlines data flow from various sources into the compliance reporting framework in InvenSage. It facilitates hassle-free reporting by ensuring that all compliance-related data is readily available, reducing the risk of errors and missed entries. The seamless synchronization between different modules will enable businesses to maintain accurate compliance records while also enhancing transparency with stakeholders.
Acceptance Criteria: Real-time Data Updates during Compliance Audits

Given that a compliance checklist has been filled out, When new data entries are submitted, Then the compliance report must reflect these updates within 5 minutes.

Audit History Retrieval for Stakeholder Review

Given that a stakeholder requests a compliance report, When they access the report, Then it must display an accurate history of compliance checklist statuses and any amendments made within the last 30 days.

Error Handling for Data Integration Failures

Given an error occurs in data integration, When the compliance report is generated, Then it must notify users of the error and provide an error report detailing the issues.

Data Sync Confirmation Post-Entry

Given that new data entries are made, When the entries are saved, Then the system must provide a confirmation message indicating that all data has been synced for compliance reporting.

Real-time Compliance Monitoring

Given that compliance data is integrated from multiple sources, When the data is updated, Then compliance reports should reflect the most current data and notify users of any compliance breaches immediately.

Customizable Reporting Templates

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to customize my compliance report template so that it aligns with specific industry regulations and stakeholder needs.
Description: Customizable Reporting Templates allow users to tailor compliance reports according to their specific needs, preferences, and regulatory requirements. Users can select from predefined templates or create their own layouts, ensuring the reports highlight the most relevant information. This flexibility enhances the usability of the compliance reporting feature by accommodating various industries and regulatory standards. Customization options will support different formats, such as PDF and Excel, making it easier to share with stakeholders.
Acceptance Criteria: User selects a predefined template for compliance reporting.

Given a user has logged into the InvenSage platform, When the user navigates to the Automated Compliance Reporting section and selects a predefined template, Then the system should generate a report using the selected template with the relevant data populated correctly.

User creates a custom reporting template for compliance reporting.

Given a user has logged into the InvenSage platform and is in the reporting section, When the user chooses to create a new custom template and selects the desired fields, formats, and layout, Then the system should save the new custom template and allow the user to apply it to future compliance reports.

User exports a compliance report in PDF format.

Given a compliance report has been generated using a selected template, When the user chooses to export the report, Then the system should provide an option to download the report in PDF format, ensuring that the download contains all relevant data and formatting as per the chosen template.

User exports a compliance report in Excel format.

Given a compliance report has been generated using a selected template, When the user selects the export option for Excel, Then the system should allow the user to download the report in Excel format, maintaining the integrity of data and layout.

User modifies an existing reporting template.

Given a user has accessed a predefined template within the reporting section, When the user makes changes to the template's layout or fields, Then the system should save the modifications and allow the user to generate reports using the updated template.

User views compliance status insights within the reporting module.

Given a compliance report is generated, When the user accesses the report insights, Then the system should display clear metrics and visualizations that summarize compliance status and areas for improvement, aiding decision-making.

Automated Alert System

User Story: As an operations manager, I want to receive automated alerts for compliance deadlines so that I can ensure all obligations are met on time without having to manually track them.
Description: The Automated Alert System notifies users of upcoming compliance deadlines or outstanding checklist items through various channels such as email, SMS, or in-app notifications. This capability ensures that all relevant stakeholders are informed in real-time, allowing for timely action and updates to compliance records. By prompting users proactively, the Automated Alert System helps in minimizing non-compliance risks and enhances overall accountability within the organization.
Acceptance Criteria: User receives a notification for a compliance deadline approaching in two days via email.

Given a compliance deadline is set for two days from now, when the system checks for upcoming deadlines, then the user should receive an email notification about the pending compliance obligation.

User wants to review checklist items that need completion to stay compliant.

Given there are outstanding checklist items, when the user accesses the automated alert system, then the system should display a list of all outstanding items that require action.

System administrator verifies that SMS notifications are being sent for missed checklist deadlines.

Given a checklist item is overdue, when the system sends a notification, then the user should receive an SMS alert within 5 minutes of the deadline being missed.

User checks the in-app notifications for compliance management updates.

Given there are outstanding compliance tasks, when the user logs into the application, then they should see a prominent in-app notification indicating the number of outstanding tasks and relevant deadlines.

Manager assesses compliance reporting through generated reports and dates of last updates.

Given compliance reports are generated automatically, when the manager reviews the compliance dashboard, then all reports should reflect the latest updates based on the checklist completion status.

System ensures that notifications are sent through all selected channels (email, SMS, in-app) simultaneously for deadlines.

Given a compliance deadline has two days remaining, when notifications are triggered, then the user should receive alerts through email, SMS, and in-app notification at the same time.

Audit History Tracking

User Story: As a quality assurance auditor, I want to access the audit history for compliance reports so that I can review changes made and ensure accuracy during audits.
Description: Audit History Tracking records all changes made to compliance reports, checklists, and settings, offering a comprehensive trail that enhances transparency and accountability. Users can easily look back at past reports, actions taken, and any alterations made over time. This feature is crucial for organizations that need to maintain compliance with regulations requiring thorough audit trails, as it helps in proving adherence to standards during external audits.
Acceptance Criteria: User wants to view the audit history of compliance reports to ensure that all changes made are documented for recent audits.

Given a user accesses the Audit History section, When they filter the reports by date range, Then they should see a list of all changes made within that range, including timestamps and user actions.

Compliance officer needs to download a complete audit trail of changes for an external audit review.

Given a user is in the Audit History section, When they select the 'Download Audit Trail' option, Then a CSV file containing all changes should be generated and made available for download.

A user wants to validate if changes made to compliance reports are logged accurately and can be retrieved as needed.

Given a user modifies a compliance report, When they check the Audit History, Then they should find an entry that reflects the change, including the specific details of the modification and the user who made it.

Management requires an overview report of compliance report changes for quarterly review.

Given a user requests an overview of changes made to compliance reports for the last quarter, When the report is generated, Then it should summarize the total number of changes and highlight significant edits or deletions.

Admin wishes to ensure that no unauthorized changes are made and to track who accesses the audit history.

Given an admin user accesses the Audit History settings, When they enable access logging, Then the system should track and display a log of all users who accessed the audit history along with their actions.

A user needs to confirm that the system retains historical data for compliance reporting over time.

Given an admin checks the system storage settings, When they review the retention policy, Then it should indicate that audit history is retained for a minimum of seven years.

Compliance personnel need to verify that all previous versions of a compliance report are accessible for reference.

Given a user requests to view previous versions of a compliance report, When they access the version history, Then they should be able to select and view all saved versions with details of changes made in each.

Interactive Dashboard Metrics

User Story: As a business owner, I want to see visually engaging compliance metrics on my dashboard so that I can quickly understand my compliance status and make informed decisions accordingly.
Description: Interactive Dashboard Metrics display key performance indicators (KPIs) related to compliance status in a visual format that allows users to quickly assess their compliance levels. Users can view graphs, charts, and progress bars that summarize compliance performance over time. This feature enhances decision-making by providing instant insights, enabling users to focus on areas needing improvement and to celebrate compliance successes. The dashboard will be customizable, allowing users to choose which metrics are most relevant to them.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the interactive dashboard to view compliance metrics after completing an internal audit.

Given the user has completed a compliance audit, when they access the interactive dashboard, then they should see their compliance metrics displayed in graphs and charts reflecting the latest audit results.

User customizes the dashboard to show specific compliance metrics tailored to their business needs.

Given the user is on the dashboard customization page, when they select their desired metrics and save changes, then the dashboard should reflect only the selected metrics upon refresh.

User reviews the compliance performance over a specific time period using the interactive dashboard.

Given the user selects a time period for review, when they apply the filter, then the displayed metrics should update to show compliance performance data for that selected time frame only.

User identifies areas for improvement from the compliance metrics on the dashboard.

Given the user is viewing compliance metrics, when they analyze the data visualizations, then they should be able to pinpoint at least three metrics indicating areas that require attention.

Stakeholders receive a summary report of compliance metrics displayed on the dashboard.

Given that the user clicks the 'Export' button on the dashboard, when they generate the report, then the report should include all displayed metrics and be formatted for easy sharing with stakeholders.

User interacts with the dashboard using various devices to ensure responsiveness.

Given the user accesses the dashboard from a tablet, when they navigate through the metrics, then the dashboard layout should adjust and remain functional without loss of information.

User has historical data displayed alongside current compliance metrics to track progress over time.

Given the user is reviewing compliance metrics, when they toggle the historical data option, then the dashboard should display the comparison between current and past metrics clearly and accurately.

Training Compliance Tracker

The Training Compliance Tracker monitors team member training on compliance-related procedures and best practices. This feature ensures that all staff are adequately educated on compliance standards, thereby reducing the risk of violations and enhancing overall adherence.

Requirements

Automated Training Scheduling

User Story: As a compliance manager, I want the system to automatically schedule training sessions for staff based on compliance requirements, so that I can ensure everyone is trained on time without manually tracking each individual.
Description: The Automated Training Scheduling requirement involves the creation of a system that automatically schedules training sessions for all team members based on compliance requirements and individual training status. This system should integrate seamlessly with the existing user management and calendar tools in InvenSage, sending reminders and notifications to users when training is due. The benefit of this feature is that it reduces the administrative burden on managers and ensures timely compliance education for each team member. By automating this process, we enhance adherence to compliance standards and minimize the risks of human error, which may lead to violations. This will improve overall training completion rates and ensure all staff are well-informed on necessary practices.
Acceptance Criteria: Automated scheduling of compliance training sessions for all team members based on individual training requirements and compliance deadlines.

Given a team member with pending training, When the automated scheduling system is activated, Then the system should create a training session in the user’s calendar according to their designated schedule.

Sending notifications to users about upcoming training sessions to ensure timely participation.

Given a scheduled training session for a team member, When the notification reminder is triggered 48 hours before the session, Then the user should receive an email and in-app notification regarding the upcoming training.

Automatically updating the training status of each team member after completion of a training session.

Given a completed training session, When the training is marked as completed by the trainer, Then the system should automatically update the training status in the user’s profile and notify the user of the update.

Integration of the Automated Training Scheduling system with existing user management tools to pull user data.

Given the integration with the user management system, When the training scheduling system is accessed, Then it should successfully retrieve a list of all team members along with their current training statuses.

Generating reports on training compliance across the team to identify gaps in training attendance.

Given the training compliance tracker, When the report generation feature is accessed, Then it should display the completion rates and training statuses of all team members accurately.

Compliance Training Progress Dashboard

User Story: As a manager, I want to see a visual dashboard of my team’s training progress so that I can easily identify who needs to complete training and ensure compliance is maintained.
Description: The Compliance Training Progress Dashboard provides a visual representation of team members' compliance training statuses. This dashboard must display metrics such as completed trainings, upcoming sessions, and individual performance tracking. The integration with the existing dashboard module of InvenSage is essential to maintain a unified experience for users. This feature will help managers identify training gaps and assess overall compliance readiness at a glance. It reduces the time spent on report generation and enhances visibility into the training landscape of the organization. By using this dashboard, organizations can make data-driven decisions about further training needs and compliance effectiveness.
Acceptance Criteria: Compliance Training Progress Dashboard displays the completion status of training modules for team members.

Given a user accesses the Compliance Training Progress Dashboard, When the dashboard loads, Then the dashboard should display a list of all team members with their respective trainings completed and pending.

The dashboard integrates seamlessly with the existing InvenSage dashboard module.

Given the Compliance Training Progress Dashboard is part of the InvenSage system, When users navigate to the compliance training section, Then the layout and styling should be consistent with the existing InvenSage dashboard.

Managers can filter training status by time period and team member roles.

Given a manager is viewing the Compliance Training Progress Dashboard, When the manager applies filters for specific date ranges and roles, Then the dashboard should update to display only the relevant training statuses for the selected criteria.

Notifications are sent to managers about upcoming training sessions for team members.

Given a training session is scheduled in the system, When the date of the training approaches (e.g., one week prior), Then an automated notification should be sent to managers responsible for the team members enrolled in that training.

The dashboard provides visual metrics for training compliance levels.

Given a user views the Compliance Training Progress Dashboard, When the dashboard loads, Then it should display graphical representations (e.g., bar charts, line graphs) that summarize the overall training compliance levels of the team.

Individual performance tracking is accessible on the dashboard for each team member.

Given a user selects a specific team member on the Compliance Training Progress Dashboard, When the team member's profile is loaded, Then it should show detailed information about the training modules completed, scores, and upcoming requirements.

The dashboard allows export of training compliance reports in various formats.

Given a user wants to generate a compliance report, When the user selects the export option on the Compliance Training Progress Dashboard, Then they should be able to download the report in formats such as PDF, CSV, and Excel.

Customized Compliance Training Modules

User Story: As a training coordinator, I want to create customized compliance training modules for my team so that the training is relevant and engaging, leading to better understanding and adherence to compliance standards.
Description: The Customized Compliance Training Modules requirement entails the development of a flexible module creation system that allows managers to design tailored training courses specific to the compliance needs of their industry or business. This will involve the implementation of various content types, such as videos, quizzes, and documents, which can be assembled into a cohesive training course. Integration with the existing content delivery and Learning Management System (LMS) within InvenSage is necessary for effective management and tracking of user performance. The primary benefit of this requirement is that it allows organizations to deliver targeted training that resonates with their employees' specific needs and improves retention of crucial compliance information.
Acceptance Criteria: Compliance Training Module Creation for Retail Industry

Given a manager has access to the Customized Compliance Training Modules system, when they select 'Create New Module', then they should be able to choose from multiple content types including video, quiz, and document to build their training course.

Integration with LMS for Tracking User Progress

Given a completed training module is published, when a team member completes the training, then their progress should be automatically recorded in the InvenSage LMS, reflecting a 'Completed' status for that module.

Customizing Module Content for Specific Compliance Needs

Given a manager is creating a compliance training module, when they select specific compliance regulations relevant to their industry, then the system should allow them to upload and integrate related content specific to that regulation.

Testing and Feedback Mechanism for Training Effectiveness

Given a training module has been completed by team members, when they provide feedback, then the system should compile and summarize feedback rating on a scale of 1 to 5, indicating the effectiveness of the training received.

User Accessibility of Training Modules Across Devices

Given a team member logs into InvenSage, when they access the Compliance Training Tracker, then they should be able to view and complete training modules from desktop, tablet, or mobile devices without any issues.

Updating Training Content Based on Compliance Changes

Given a compliance regulation update occurs, when a manager accesses the training module, then they should be able to edit and update the content of existing modules to reflect the new compliance standards.

Incident Response Checklist

The Incident Response Checklist standardizes the steps to be taken in case of compliance breaches or incidents. This feature provides a clear, actionable guide to teams on how to respond effectively, minimizing potential damages and ensuring that corrective measures are documented.

Requirements

Standardized Incident Response Protocol

User Story: As a compliance officer, I want a standardized incident response checklist so that I can ensure our team responds effectively to compliance breaches, minimizing potential damages and maintaining regulatory standards.
Description: The Standardized Incident Response Protocol will provide a structured and uniform process for team members to follow in case of compliance breaches or incidents. This requirement ensures that every team member is aware of the exact steps that need to be taken, which minimizes confusion during a crisis. The protocol will include pre-defined actions, roles, and responsibilities, allowing for quick and effective responses. It will also be integrated with existing incident management tools within InvenSage to facilitate real-time tracking and updates during incidents, ultimately leading to reduced damages and improved compliance management.
Acceptance Criteria: Standardized response protocol is utilized by the team during a compliance breach scenario.

Given a compliance breach occurs, when the incident is reported, then all team members must follow the steps outlined in the Standardized Incident Response Protocol without deviation and document each step taken.

The protocol is integrated into existing incident management tools used by InvenSage.

Given the Standardized Incident Response Protocol is developed, when it is integrated into the incident management tools, then all triggered incidents should automatically prompt the checklist to be displayed for the user, ensuring adherence to the protocol.

Users are trained on how to utilize the Incident Response Checklist in a real-world crisis.

Given that team members have undergone training, when a simulated compliance breach is presented, then at least 90% of the team must successfully navigate the incident using the checklist and complete all required documentation within the specified timeframe.

The checklist allows for real-time updates during an ongoing incident response.

Given that an incident is in progress, when a team member updates the checklist with new information, then all other users must receive real-time notifications of the updates immediately, ensuring everyone is informed of the current status.

Post-incident review using the checklist to assess team performance and compliance with the protocol.

Given an incident has been resolved, when the post-incident review is conducted, then at least 85% of the documented actions should align with the steps outlined in the Incident Response Checklist, evidencing the protocol's effectiveness.

Documentation of each incident response is securely stored and easily retrievable.

Given that an incident has been resolved, when the incident records are accessed, then all documentation related to the response must be stored in a centralized, secure location and retrievable within three clicks, ensuring compliance and accountability.

Stakeholders receive a summary of the incident response performance metrics.

Given that an incident has been handled, when the response is completed, then a summary report detailing performance metrics and adherence to the Incident Response Checklist should be automatically generated and emailed to stakeholders within 24 hours.

Automated Notification System

User Story: As a security manager, I want an automated notification system for incident responses so that I can ensure the right team members are promptly informed about compliance issues and act quickly to mitigate risks.
Description: The Automated Notification System will instantly alert relevant team members about compliance breaches or incidents as they occur. This requirement is crucial for ensuring timely communication, allowing for swift action and coordination. The notifications will be customizable based on the type of incident, severity, and team roles, ensuring that everyone who needs to be informed can take immediate action. By integrating with existing communication tools, such as email and messaging platforms, the system will enhance responsiveness and ensure that incidents are addressed promptly, mitigating potential risks.
Acceptance Criteria: User receives an instant alert when a compliance breach occurs during peak business hours, ensuring that relevant team members can respond quickly and minimize impact.

Given a compliance breach occurs during peak hours, When the breach is detected, Then the Automated Notification System must send instant alerts to all relevant team members designated for such incidents.

Team members can customize notification settings to receive alerts based on their specific roles and the severity of the incident, ensuring relevance and effectiveness of communications.

Given a team member accesses the notification settings, When they select their role and preferred severity levels for incidents, Then the system must save these preferences and only notify them about incidents that match their criteria.

Users can integrate the notification system with their existing communication tools like Slack and email to enhance the response efficiency during incidents.

Given a user has provided the necessary API keys for integration, When they complete the configuration process, Then the system must be able to send notifications through the integrated channels without errors.

Notification alerts must include clear and actionable information that guides the team on the next steps to take in response to the incident.

Given a compliance breach notification is sent, When team members receive the alert, Then the notification must contain detailed information about the breach, including the type of incident, severity, and immediate actions to be taken.

The system logs all notifications sent for compliance breaches, allowing for an audit trail of incidents and responses taken by the teams.

Given a compliance breach notification is triggered, When the notification is sent, Then the system must log the incident details, recipients, time of alert, and any follow-up actions taken in a searchable database.

The Automated Notification System must provide a user-friendly dashboard that allows administrators to manage notification settings, review incidents, and monitor response times.

Given an administrator accesses the dashboard, When they navigate through the settings and incident logs, Then the interface must be intuitive, allowing efficient management of all aspects related to notifications and incident responses.

Incident Documentation Repository

User Story: As a team leader, I want an incident documentation repository so that I can easily store and retrieve information about past incidents for analysis and training, improving our future response strategies.
Description: The Incident Documentation Repository will serve as a centralized location for all incident-related materials, including checklists, response actions, and outcomes. This requirement will streamline the documentation process, ensuring that all incidents are recorded systematically and are easily retrievable for future reference. The repository will enhance transparency, assist in post-incident analyses, and help update training materials by providing insights into past incidents. Integration with the incident response checklist will allow for automatic saving of completed documents, ensuring that teams can focus on resolution rather than administrative tasks.
Acceptance Criteria: User Access to Incident Documentation Repository

Given that a user has valid credentials, when they log in to the system, then they should be able to access the Incident Documentation Repository without encountering errors.

Automatic Saving of Completed Checklist Items

Given that a user has completed an Incident Response Checklist, when they submit the checklist, then the associated documentation should automatically save to the Incident Documentation Repository without user intervention.

Search Functionality in Incident Documentation Repository

Given that a user is in the Incident Documentation Repository, when they enter a search term related to an incident, then relevant documents should be displayed within 3 seconds.

Document Retrieval from the Repository

Given that a user is in the Incident Documentation Repository, when they select a specific incident from the list, then they should be able to retrieve and view all related documents without issues.

Updates to Incident Training Materials

Given a recorded incident evaluation, when a team identifies areas for improvement, then the training materials should be updated within 7 days after documentation of the incident.

User Role Permissions for Repository Access

Given that a user is assigned a role, when they attempt to access the Incident Documentation Repository, then their access level should match the permissions of their assigned role.

Incident Documentation Archive Process

Given that incidents are documented in the repository, when the repository reaches 1,000 documents, then the system should initiate an archive process for older incidents based on a defined retention policy.

Customization of Response Checklists

User Story: As a compliance manager, I want to customize the incident response checklist so that our team's response aligns with our specific compliance requirements and incident types, ensuring effective management of incidents.
Description: The Customization of Response Checklists feature will allow teams to tailor the incident response checklist to their specific needs and compliance requirements. This requirement is essential as different types of incidents may require varying responses based on industry standards or company policies. Users will be able to add, modify, or remove checklist items, ensuring that the protocol reflects the most up-to-date practices and requirements. This flexibility enhances the effectiveness of incident management and ensures that every incident is met with an appropriate response based on its context.
Acceptance Criteria: Team members need to customize the incident response checklist to align with recent compliance updates during a security breach incident.

Given a user with the appropriate permissions, when they access the incident response checklist, then they should be able to add new checklist items, modify existing ones, and delete items from the checklist.

The compliance officer wants to ensure that all checklist modifications are accurately logged for audit purposes during an incident response.

Given that a user modifies the incident response checklist, when they save the changes, then the system should log the changes with timestamps and user details for each modification.

A company experiences a data breach and needs to activate the customized checklist for immediate response.

Given an active incident scenario, when the response team accesses the checklist, then it should display the customized items relevant to the current incident type and priority level, ensuring the checklist is contextual.

After completing an incident response, the team needs to review the checklist to evaluate the response effectiveness and compliance adherence.

Given that an incident has been resolved, when the team accesses the incident response checklist used, then they should be able to view all items marked as completed, along with any notes and feedback added by team members during the response.

A manager wants to ensure that all team members use the latest version of the incident response checklist during incident handling.

Given that a new version of the incident response checklist has been published, when a team member logs into the system, then the system should display a notification prompting them to review the latest checklist before proceeding with any incident response.

A quality assurance team needs to validate the checklist customization feature to ensure it meets user requirements.

Given that the QA team conducts testing, when they attempt to customize the checklist interface and functionality, then all customization actions (add, modify, delete) should yield successful results without errors or unexpected behavior.

Post-Incident Review Workflow

User Story: As an operations manager, I want a post-incident review workflow so that I can ensure our team reflects on incidents, learns from them, and improves our response strategies to reduce future risks.
Description: The Post-Incident Review Workflow will formalize the process for analyzing and reviewing incidents after they occur. This requirement is designed to ensure that teams gather insights from incidents, identify areas for improvement, and document lessons learned. A structured workflow will guide teams through the review process, enhancing accountability and ensuring that findings are integrated back into training and future response strategies. By conducting thorough reviews, organizations can continually improve their incident response capabilities and compliance posture, ultimately reducing the likelihood of future incidents.
Acceptance Criteria: Reviewing an Incident After a Compliance Breach Occurs

Given an incident of compliance breach is reported, when the team initiates the Post-Incident Review Workflow, then all relevant stakeholders must be notified automatically with a summary of the incident.

Gathering Insights from Incident Reviews

Given the Post-Incident Review Workflow is initiated, when the team completes the review meeting, then a document summarizing insights, areas for improvement, and lessons learned must be created and stored in the system.

Integrating Review Findings into Training

Given the insights from the Post-Incident Review have been documented, when the team finalizes the review, then a proposed update to training materials must be generated for review.

Tracking Non-Conformance from Incident Reviews

Given a completed Post-Incident Review, when the team identifies non-conformance issues, then a non-conformance report must be generated and assigned for corrective action tracking.

Ensuring Follow-Up on Action Items

Given the Post-Incident Review workflow has concluded, when action items are assigned, then notifications must be sent to the responsible individuals with deadlines for completing each action item.

Reviewing Historical Incidents for Continuous Improvement

Given a new incident occurs, when the team accesses the Post-Incident Review database, then they must be able to view previous incident reviews and their outcomes to inform current practices.

Compliance Reporting Post Review

Given that a Post-Incident Review has been completed, when compliance personnel request a summary of reviews, then a comprehensive report must be generated that includes all findings and corrective actions taken.

Instant Feedback Widget

A user-friendly interface that allows customers to provide instant feedback on inventory-related questions or issues directly on the website or app. This feature streamlines the feedback process, ensuring a high response rate and enabling businesses to capture customer sentiments immediately upon inquiry.

Requirements

Feedback Submission Form

User Story: As a customer, I want a simple form to provide feedback on inventory issues, so that I can share my experience and help improve the service.
Description: The Feedback Submission Form requirement involves creating an easy-to-use form that allows customers to submit feedback regarding their inventory-related questions or issues directly through the InvenSage platform. This form should have fields for customer information, feedback details, and a rating system, making it simple for users to express their sentiments. The form will immediately capture and store these responses in the system, enabling businesses to review and act upon feedback quickly. Additionally, it will play a crucial role in gathering customer insights that can inform inventory management decisions, leading to improved customer satisfaction and enhanced operational efficiency.
Acceptance Criteria: Feedback Submission is Initiated by a Customer

Given a customer is on the InvenSage platform, When they click on the 'Submit Feedback' button, Then the Feedback Submission Form should appear with all required fields clearly labeled.

Required Fields in the Feedback Submission Form

Given the Feedback Submission Form is displayed, When a customer submits the form without filling in required fields, Then an error message should indicate which fields are missing and prevent submission until filled.

Successful Submission of Feedback

Given a customer has filled in all required fields, When they click the 'Submit' button, Then the feedback should be successfully submitted and a confirmation message should appear.

Storing Feedback in the System

Given feedback has been submitted, When checking the backend database, Then the feedback details should be stored accurately in the designated feedback table with a timestamp.

User Rating System Functionality

Given the customer is submitting feedback, When they select a rating between 1 to 5, Then the selected rating should be captured and stored alongside the feedback message.

Customer Feedback Display and Accessibility

Given feedback has been submitted and stored, When a business user accesses the feedback dashboard, Then the submitted feedback should be visible along with user details and timestamp.

Feedback Submission Response Management

Given feedback has been submitted, When the business reviews the feedback, Then they should have the capability to categorize and respond to the feedback efficiently through the platform.

Real-time Feedback Notifications

User Story: As a business owner, I want to receive instant notifications when customers submit feedback, so that I can quickly address their concerns and improve their experience.
Description: The Real-time Feedback Notifications requirement entails implementing a notification system that alerts businesses when new customer feedback is submitted. These notifications will be delivered via email and push notifications through the InvenSage app, ensuring that business owners or customer service representatives are promptly notified of any customer concerns. This immediate awareness allows teams to address issues swiftly, fostering a positive relationship with customers while allowing for timely resolution of any inventory-related problems. Such responsiveness can significantly enhance customer retention and satisfaction rates.
Acceptance Criteria: Notification Alert for New Feedback Submission

Given a new customer feedback submission in the system, when the feedback is submitted, then an email and a push notification should be sent to the designated business owner or customer service representative within 5 minutes of submission.

Email Notification Formats

Given that a feedback submission has been received, when the email notification is generated, then the email must contain the feedback details, customer name, and timestamp in a clear and structured format.

Push Notification Functionality

Given that a feedback submission has been received, when the push notification is triggered, then the notification should display a concise message summarizing the feedback and include a link to view more details in the app.

Feedback Submission Data Capture

Given a customer submits feedback through the Instant Feedback Widget, when the submission is complete, then the system must successfully capture and log all relevant feedback data including customer ID, timestamp, and feedback content in the database.

Multiple Feedback Alert Handling

Given multiple feedback submissions in a short time frame, when these submissions occur, then the system must aggregate notifications and send a single summary notification to avoid spamming users while still alerting them to new feedback.

User Preferences for Notifications

Given that a business owner has preferences set for notifications, when a feedback is submitted, then the notification method (email or push) should respect the user’s preference settings.

Testing Notification Delivery Speed

Given recent changes to the notification system, when feedback is submitted, then the delivery of email and push notifications should be tested to ensure they arrive within the defined time limits (5 minutes for email, 2 minutes for push).

Feedback Analytics Dashboard

User Story: As a business analyst, I want an analytics dashboard to view customer feedback trends so that I can make informed decisions based on customer insights and improve inventory management.
Description: The Feedback Analytics Dashboard requirement involves creating an analytical tool within the InvenSage platform that aggregates and presents customer feedback data in a visual format. This dashboard will track key metrics such as the volume of feedback, common issues raised, and customer sentiment trends over time. It will empower businesses to visualize feedback, identify patterns, and derive actionable insights that inform inventory management decisions. Integrating this analytics tool enhances the overall product by enabling users to make data-driven decisions, proactively address customer issues, and ultimately improve product offerings and service quality.
Acceptance Criteria: Customer views the Feedback Analytics Dashboard to monitor trends and issues related to recent feedback submissions.

Given that the user is logged into InvenSage, when they navigate to the Feedback Analytics Dashboard, then the dashboard displays key metrics such as the total feedback count, common issues identified, and overall sentiment analysis over the last 30 days.

Business owner analyzes customer feedback trends on the dashboard to make informed inventory decisions.

Given the feedback data is aggregated, when the business owner selects a specific time period on the dashboard, then the dashboard updates to reflect metrics and sentiment trends for that selected period accurately.

User accesses the Feedback Analytics Dashboard to generate reports for team meetings.

Given the user is on the Feedback Analytics Dashboard, when they select the 'Export Report' option, then a downloadable report in CSV format should be generated containing visualized data of feedback metrics and trends.

An admin monitors the responsiveness of the feedback widget integrated into the website.

Given that the feedback widget is enabled, when users submit feedback, then the dashboard should update in real-time to reflect new feedback submissions within a maximum of 5 minutes.

Customer accesses the analytics to identify improvements needed in product offerings.

Given that customer feedback contains issues with products, when they view the Feedback Analytics Dashboard, then the dashboard highlights top 3 product issues raised by customers based on frequency of mentions.

Marketers analyze customer sentiment over time to tailor campaigns based on feedback data.

Given an analysis is performed on customer sentiment, when the user selects the sentiment filter on the dashboard, then the dashboard should only display feedback relating to the selected sentiment (positive, negative, neutral) over the chosen timeframe.

Customizable Feedback Questions

User Story: As a business owner, I want to customize the feedback questions to gather specific information from customers, so that I can better understand their needs and improve our inventory management.
Description: The Customizable Feedback Questions requirement allows businesses to tailor the feedback submission form by selecting relevant questions or categories according to their specific needs. This feature enables businesses to ask targeted questions that align with their unique inventory challenges, ensuring that they gather precise information from customers. Implementing this customization will enhance the feedback process and allow businesses to gather more useful insights tailored to their daily operations, thereby driving continuous improvement and enhancing customer satisfaction.
Acceptance Criteria: Customizable Feedback Questions for Customer Satisfaction Survey

Given the business settings have been configured, when the customer accesses the feedback widget, then they are able to view the selected customizable questions that align with their needs.

Verification of Added Questions in Feedback Widget

Given an admin user customizes the feedback questions, when they save their changes, then the new questions should be reflected in the feedback widget in real time.

Displaying Selected Questions to Customers

Given the customizable feedback questions have been set, when a customer visits the feedback section, then only those selected questions should appear for their input.

User Experience of Feedback Submission

Given a customer is able to access the feedback widget, when they provide their feedback and submit, then they should receive a confirmation message of their submission.

Reporting on Feedback Responses

Given feedback has been submitted by customers, when the admin views the feedback report, then they should see responses categorized according to the customized questions.

Editing Custom Questions by Admins

Given the admin is on the customizable feedback settings page, when they edit an existing question, then the changes should be saved and updated in the feedback widget immediately.

Feedback Response Acknowledgment

User Story: As a customer, I want to receive confirmation that my feedback has been submitted, so that I feel valued and know that my input is being considered.
Description: The Feedback Response Acknowledgment requirement focuses on implementing an automatic acknowledgment system that confirms to customers that their feedback has been received. This response can be a simple thank-you message sent via email or an on-screen confirmation when they submit their feedback. This feature enhances user experience by providing immediate reassurance that their input matters and will be reviewed, thus promoting a continuous feedback loop. It’s an essential part of maintaining customer trust and encouraging ongoing engagement with the InvenSage platform.
Acceptance Criteria: Customer submits feedback through the Instant Feedback Widget on the website after a recent purchase, expecting immediate acknowledgment of their input.

Given the customer submits their feedback, when they submit the form, then they should receive an on-screen confirmation message indicating that their feedback has been received.

After submitting feedback about an inventory issue, a customer checks their email to see if they received an acknowledgment of their feedback submission.

Given the customer has submitted feedback, when they check their email, then they should receive an email confirmation containing a thank-you message within 5 minutes.

A customer provides feedback through the app regarding a product availability issue and expects real-time acknowledgment of their feedback.

Given the customer submits their feedback through the app, when they submit the form, then they should immediately see a success notification on their screen confirming receipt of their feedback.

A user of the InvenSage platform submits multiple feedback items over a period and wants to ensure each submission received a confirmation response.

Given the user submits multiple feedback entries, when each submission is made, then they should receive a unique acknowledgment email for each submission separately.

A customer submits feedback and expects to be assured that their feedback will be reviewed and acted upon.

Given the customer submits their feedback, when they receive the acknowledgment message, then it should include a statement indicating that their feedback will be reviewed and appreciated.

A tester verifies the feedback acknowledgment system by submitting test feedback through the platform during a testing phase.

Given the tester submits test feedback, when they review the acknowledgment within the system logs, then there should be a recorded entry confirming the acknowledgment was sent successfully.

A user navigates the feedback widget on a mobile device and submits feedback expecting responsive confirmation features.

Given the user is on a mobile device and submits feedback, when they submit the form, then the confirmation message should be optimized for mobile display and easy to read.

Sentiment Analysis Tool

Integrates AI-driven sentiment analysis to categorize and interpret customer feedback, highlighting positive, neutral, or negative sentiments. This tool empowers businesses to gauge public perception and prioritize areas for improvement, enhancing the customer experience and driving strategic decisions.

Requirements

Sentiment Data Integration

User Story: As a business owner, I want the Sentiment Analysis Tool to gather customer feedback automatically from various platforms so that I can easily understand customer sentiment without manual data collection.
Description: This requirement involves developing a seamless integration with various customer feedback platforms, such as social media, survey tools, and e-commerce sites, to ensure that the Sentiment Analysis Tool captures all relevant customer expressions. By allowing the tool to aggregate data from multiple sources, businesses can achieve a more holistic view of customer sentiment, which is critical for accurate interpretations and strategizing improvements in products and services. The integration will also automate data collection processes, reducing manual efforts and enhancing the overall user experience.
Acceptance Criteria: Integration with Social Media Platforms

Given the Sentiment Analysis Tool is integrated with social media platforms, when customer feedback is posted, then the tool should automatically retrieve and categorize the sentiment of each comment in real-time as positive, neutral, or negative.

Data Aggregation from Survey Tools

Given that customer feedback is collected from various survey tools, when responses are submitted, then the Sentiment Analysis Tool should aggregate these responses and classify the overall sentiment within 10 seconds.

E-commerce Feedback Integration

Given the Sentiment Analysis Tool is integrated with e-commerce platforms, when customers leave reviews, then the tool should successfully extract and analyze the sentiment from at least 95% of the reviews without errors.

Real-time Sentiment Dashboard Update

Given that new customer feedback is received from multiple sources, when the Sentiment Analysis Tool processes this data, then the dashboard should update in real-time, reflecting the latest sentiment categorization for users.

Automation of Data Collection Processes

Given the requirement for seamless integration, when the tool is deployed, then the data collection process should operate autonomously without requiring manual intervention for at least 48 hours post-launch.

Error Handling in Data Retrieval

Given the Sentiment Analysis Tool is functioning, when there is a temporary connection issue with any data source, then the tool should log this error and attempt to reconnect every 5 minutes until successful.

Historical Data Analysis

Given that the Sentiment Analysis Tool can access historical feedback, when the tool is queried for data analysis, then it should provide sentiment trends over the past 12 months, accurately reflecting customer sentiments during this period.

Sentiment Categorization Algorithms

User Story: As a product manager, I want to utilize precise algorithms to categorize customer feedback so that I can quickly identify areas needing improvement and enhance the customer experience.
Description: This requirement focuses on developing advanced AI algorithms capable of accurately categorizing customer feedback into positive, neutral, and negative sentiments. The algorithms will utilize machine learning techniques to analyze text and derive sentiment scores, considering context, nuances, and language variations. This is vital for generating actionable insights from customer feedback, allowing businesses to identify strengths and weaknesses in their offerings. The algorithms will also be designed to improve over time, learning from new data and user interactions, thus increasing the accuracy of categorization.
Acceptance Criteria: Customer submits feedback through the InvenSage platform after receiving a product.

Given a product feedback input, when the sentiment analysis algorithm processes the feedback, then it should categorize the sentiment as positive, neutral, or negative with an accuracy of at least 85%.

Business users access the sentiment analysis dashboard to view categorized customer feedback over a selected time period.

Given customer feedback data processed by the algorithms, when a user selects a time period on the dashboard, then the dashboard should display categorized feedback with correct sentiment labels reflecting the user's selection.

A business user reviews specific feedback items categorized as negative sentiment to take corrective actions.

Given negative feedback items, when the user clicks on a specific item, then the system should provide detailed sentiment analysis, including the original feedback and suggested actions for improvement.

The sentiment analysis tool is fed new feedback data from various sources, including social media and direct surveys.

Given a new set of feedback data, when the sentiment analysis algorithm is updated with this data, then it should integrate this data without errors and improve sentiment categorization accuracy over time by at least 5%.

The algorithm is evaluated for its performance against a set of labeled test feedbacks for validation purposes.

Given a dataset of 1,000 labeled feedback instances, when the sentiment analysis algorithm is tested, then it should achieve at least 90% accuracy in categorizing the sentiments as compared to the labeled data.

The sentiment analysis output is utilized by the business to adjust their marketing strategy based on customer perception.

Given categorized sentiment data, when the business analyzes the trends in customer sentiment regarding their products, then they should see a measurable improvement in customer satisfaction metrics after implementing changes within one quarter.

An update to the machine learning model occurs based on new customer interactions and feedback data.

Given the feedback loop provided by new customer interactions, when the algorithm is retrained, then the system should demonstrate improved accuracy on at least 80% of test cases compared to pre-update performance.

Sentiment Dashboard Visualization

User Story: As a marketing director, I want a visual dashboard that displays customer sentiment trends so that I can quickly assess public perception and make data-driven decisions.
Description: This requirement entails the creation of an intuitive dashboard that visually represents sentiment analysis results through charts and graphs. The dashboard will display overall sentiment trends, sentiment distribution, and changes over time, offering a quick glance at customer perceptions. It will also highlight key areas for improvement and success stories based on operational data. This visualization is essential for facilitating strategic decision-making and ensuring that stakeholders can quickly comprehend customer sentiment, driving timely interventions and strategies.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the Sentiment Dashboard after collecting customer feedback during a product launch to assess the impact on customer perception.

Given the user accesses the Sentiment Dashboard, when they review the overall sentiment trends, then the dashboard displays a graphical representation of sentiment over time with distinct visual indicators for positive, neutral, and negative sentiments.

A business analyst wants to identify specific areas for improvement based on the sentiment distribution shown on the dashboard.

Given the sentiment distribution chart is displayed, when the user hovers over specific segments, then detailed metrics and key insights about customer feedback for positive and negative sentiments are provided in a tooltip.

The marketing team is preparing a report on customer sentiment for a quarterly review meeting based on data from the Sentiment Dashboard.

Given the user selects the date range for the sentiment data, when they generate the report, then the dashboard exports the sentiment trends and key narratives into a customizable PDF format that includes visual charts and insights.

A stakeholder reviews the dashboard to assess the effectiveness of recent marketing efforts by comparing sentiment before and after a campaign.

Given the stakeholder accesses the Sentiment Dashboard, when they apply filters for different time periods around the campaign, then the dashboard highlights the changes in sentiment with clear before-and-after comparisons in visual format.

An operations manager checks the dashboard to identify success stories highlighted by positive customer feedback.

Given the user navigates to the success stories section of the dashboard, when they click on individual success segments, then the dashboard provides detailed feedback and examples of customer testimonials that contributed to standout sentiments.

A product team wants to analyze negative trends in customer feedback over the last month to identify potential issues.

Given the user accesses the recent sentiment analysis data, when they view the negative sentiment trend chart, then the dashboard shows specific feedback categories that contributed to negative sentiments over the selected timeframe, enabling targeted action plans.

A new team member is onboarded and needs to understand the key functionalities of the Sentiment Dashboard.

Given the new user accesses the Sentiment Dashboard for the first time, when they click on the help icon, then a guided walkthrough appears, outlining the main features and how to interpret the data presented on the dashboard.

Real-time Sentiment Alerts

User Story: As a customer service manager, I want to receive real-time alerts on sentiment changes so that I can respond to customer concerns swiftly and improve service quality.
Description: This requirement involves setting up a real-time alert system that notifies users of significant changes or trends in customer sentiment as they occur. By implementing machine learning techniques to monitor sentiment scores continuously, the system will trigger alerts for spikes or dips in sentiment, allowing businesses to respond proactively to customer feedback. This capability is crucial for mitigating potential issues before they escalate and for capitalizing on positive sentiment trends to enhance marketing efforts.
Acceptance Criteria: User receives a real-time alert for a significant drop in customer sentiment after a negative review is posted about a product.

Given a customer feedback monitoring system in place, when a sentiment score drops below a predefined threshold, then an alert is triggered and sent to the user via email or in-app notification.

User is notified of a significant increase in positive sentiment following a marketing campaign, allowing for strategic planning of next actions.

Given the sentiment analysis tool is actively monitoring sentiment scores, when a spike in positive sentiment is detected, then an alert should be sent to the user with insights on the sources of positive feedback.

The system tracks sentiment trends over time and notifies users of consistent patterns that may require attention or adjustments in strategy.

Given that sentiment analysis data is being collected continuously, when a trend analysis identifies a consistent pattern of sentiment scores over several days, then an alert should be generated to inform the user of the trend.

User wants to be alerted during peak business hours regarding any significant sentiment changes to react promptly.

Given that the user specifies peak business hours for alert notifications, when a sentiment change occurs during these hours that meets the alert threshold, then the user receives immediate alerts during these specified hours only.

User receives an alert regarding mixed customer sentiments for a newly launched product to assess overall customer reception.

Given the sentiment analysis tool has gathered feedback on a new product launch, when sentiment scores are categorized as mixed (both positive and negative), then an alert should be triggered to notify the user along with an analysis report of the feedback received.

User wants to customize the alert thresholds based on specific business needs or product lines.

Given that the alert system allows user customization, when the user adjusts the sentiment score thresholds for alerts, then the adjustments are saved and the system generates alerts based on the new thresholds.

User receives historical sentiment data along with alerts to track improvements or declines over time.

Given that previous sentiment data is accessible, when a real-time alert is triggered, then the alert includes a summary of the last week's sentiment trends to provide context for the recent change.

Sentiment Impact Analysis

User Story: As a business analyst, I want to analyze how customer sentiment impacts business metrics so that I can inform strategic planning and optimize our offerings accordingly.
Description: This requirement focuses on developing tools for analyzing the impact of sentiment changes on key business performance indicators, such as sales, customer retention, and brand perception. By correlating sentiment data with performance metrics, businesses can gain valuable insights into how customer feelings influence overall performance. This understanding will enable better strategic decisions and resource allocation, ensuring that efforts align with customer expectations and sentiments.
Acceptance Criteria: Sentiment Analysis Reporting for Stakeholders

Given the sentiment analysis tool is integrated, when a report is generated for the last quarter, then the report must clearly categorize 70% or more of customer feedback into positive, neutral, or negative sentiments with detailed insights provided for each category.

Correlation Between Sentiment and Sales Metrics

Given sentiment data and sales performance data are available, when the data is analyzed, then the correlation coefficient between customer sentiment and sales must be at least 0.5, indicating a moderate positive correlation.

Impact of Sentiment Changes on Customer Retention

Given the sentiment data collected over a six-month period, when the retention rates are analyzed, then the analysis must show at least a 10% change in retention rates correlating with significant changes in sentiment scores (up or down).

Brand Perception Analysis Based on Sentiment Data

Given customer sentiment data is available, when a brand perception index is generated, then the index must reflect an increase or decrease in brand perception that matches sentiment shifts by at least 15% over a specified period.

User Interface for Sentiment Impact Analysis

Given the sentiment impact analysis module is accessible, when users navigate to the sentiment impact analysis feature, then it must be intuitive, allowing users to generate insights within three clicks without prior training.

Real-time Monitoring of Sentiment Changes

Given the sentiment analysis tool is operational, when there is a change in sentiment, then the system must alert users in real-time with a summary of the sentiment shift within five minutes of detection.

Feedback Dashboard

A comprehensive dashboard that aggregates real-time feedback from customers, providing an overview of inventory-related inquiries, trends, and common concerns. This centralized hub enables customer service representatives and management to identify issues swiftly and respond effectively, fostering proactive problem-solving.

Requirements

Real-time Feedback Aggregation

User Story: As a customer service representative, I want to see real-time customer feedback aggregated in one place so that I can quickly identify issues and respond to customer inquiries efficiently.
Description: The requirement entails developing functionality that consolidates customer feedback from multiple channels in real-time. This feature will allow for the collection of inquiries, suggestions, and issues related to inventory, presented in an organized manner within the dashboard. By leveraging this consolidated data, customer service representatives can identify trends and commonly reported concerns, which can significantly enhance customer satisfaction and streamline decision-making processes. Integration with existing CRM systems will be crucial, ensuring a seamless flow of information from feedback submission to response. The desired outcome is to enable a proactive response to customer needs and to make informed adjustments in inventory management based on real feedback.
Acceptance Criteria: Real-time feedback is received from customers representing various channels such as email, social media, and in-app messaging. This feedback is consolidated in the Feedback Dashboard, which customer service representatives monitor throughout their shifts to manage inquiries efficiently.

Given customer feedback is submitted via email, social media, or in-app messaging, when the feedback is submitted, then it should appear in the Feedback Dashboard within 2 minutes of submission.

Customer service representatives use the Feedback Dashboard to review feedback at the start of each shift. They analyze trends and common concerns to prepare for potential issues that customers might raise.

Given the Feedback Dashboard is accessed, when representatives review customer feedback, then they should see analytics that categorize feedback into at least 3 common issues and trends, updated in real-time.

Management reviews the Feedback Dashboard at the end of each day to assess inventory-related customer concerns and performance. This information helps them make informed decisions to optimize inventory levels based on actual customer feedback.

Given management accesses the Feedback Dashboard at the end of the day, when they view the inventory-related customer concerns, then they should have access to a summary report of feedback trends and insights from the entire day.

Integration with existing CRM systems is essential for seamless feedback processing. IT staff conduct tests to ensure feedback submissions are reflected accurately in both the Feedback Dashboard and the CRM system.

Given a feedback submission is made, when the feedback is processed, then it should exist in both the Feedback Dashboard and the integrated CRM system within 5 minutes of submission without data loss or discrepancies.

Customer service representatives respond to customer feedback promptly using the Feedback Dashboard as a reference. They track response times to ensure customer satisfaction is maintained.

Given feedback is reviewed and responded to, when a representative responds to a customer inquiry, then the average response time should be less than 10 minutes for all feedback submissions addressed within a shift.

The Feedback Dashboard is used to identify issues that require immediate attention, enabling proactive customer service management to prevent further complaints.

Given customer feedback indicates an emerging issue, when a representative marks it as urgent in the Feedback Dashboard, then the concerned management should receive an automated alert within 5 minutes to address the issue promptly.

New employees undergo training using the Feedback Dashboard to familiarize themselves with customer feedback management and reporting functionalities.

Given a training session is conducted, when new employees use the Feedback Dashboard to log and categorize practice feedback, then they should be able to do so accurately with 100% success during the training assessment.

Trend Analysis Reporting

User Story: As a management user, I want to analyze feedback trends over time so that I can recognize systemic issues and implement improvements in our inventory processes.
Description: This requirement involves building an analytics module within the Feedback Dashboard that analyzes and visualizes trends in customer feedback over time. The tool will utilize AI-driven insights to highlight patterns related to inventory-related issues, such as product availability or delivery times. Users will be able to filter data by time frames, product categories, and types of inquiries, which helps in identifying persistent problems or successful interventions. This data-driven approach will elevate inventory management decisions and improve overall service levels, ultimately leading to a boost in customer loyalty and reduced operational inefficiencies.
Acceptance Criteria: Feedback trend analysis for inventory-related inquiries over the past three months.

Given that the user selects a three-month time frame and applies filters for product categories, When the user views the trend analysis report, Then the user should be able to see visual representations of feedback trends and specific inquiries for that time period.

Identification of patterns affecting product availability through customer feedback.

Given that the user inputs customer feedback data regarding product availability, When the data is analyzed, Then the system should identify and display patterns related to types of inventories that frequently receive negative feedback.

Real-time updates of feedback inquiries as new data is collected.

Given that new feedback is submitted by customers, When the data is processed, Then the Feedback Dashboard should refresh to show the latest feedback in real time without the need for a manual refresh.

Comparison of feedback trends before and after implementing inventory changes.

Given the user has conducted inventory changes based on previous feedback, When the user generates a report for the time period before and after changes, Then the report should clearly show differences in customer feedback trends related to those inventories.

Filtering feedback inquiries by inquiry categories (such as delivery times and product quality).

Given that the user selects filters for inquiry categories in the Feedback Dashboard, When the user applies the filters, Then the report should display feedback inquiries accurately categorized according to the selected filters.

Exporting trend analysis reports for external presentations.

Given that the user has generated a trend analysis report, When the user chooses to export the report, Then the system should allow the user to download the report in multiple formats (PDF, Excel) without losing data integrity.

Dashboard accessibility for users with different roles in the organization.

Given that users with different roles (admin, customer service, management) access the Feedback Dashboard, When the dashboard is displayed, Then each user should see a customized view according to their role's access level and permissions.

Response Workflow Integration

User Story: As a customer service representative, I want to respond to customer feedback directly from the dashboard so that I can handle inquiries more efficiently and improve customer satisfaction.
Description: The requirement focuses on creating an integrated workflow system that allows customer service representatives to respond to feedback directly from the dashboard. This feature will streamline the process of addressing customer concerns by providing pre-defined response templates based on the type of feedback received. Integration with email or messaging platforms will facilitate seamless communication with customers. The intended outcome is to reduce response times and enhance the overall customer experience, allowing representatives to focus on more complex inquiries that require detailed attention.
Acceptance Criteria: Customer service representative accesses the Feedback Dashboard to view inventory-related customer feedback during peak hours.

Given the Feedback Dashboard is open, when the representative clicks on a specific feedback entry, then the appropriate response template should populate automatically based on the feedback type.

A customer submits a feedback inquiry about a stock-out situation through the website chat.

Given the feedback is received, when the representative selects the feedback entry in the dashboard, then they should be able to send a predefined response acknowledging the issue with one click.

A representative needs to review feedback trends for the past month to identify common issues.

Given the Feedback Dashboard displays current feedback, when the representative selects the 'trends' view, then they should see a graphical representation of feedback categories over the selected time frame.

The customer service team wants to ensure a response is sent to customer concerns via email after selecting a response template in the dashboard.

Given a response template is selected and the 'send' button is clicked, when the representative verifies the customer's email address, then the system should successfully send the response to the correct email address.

Management reviews the efficiency of the response workflow after a week of implementation.

Given a report is generated from the dashboard, when management views the report, then it should indicate a reduction in average response time compared to the previous month by at least 20%

A representative needs to change an existing response template before sending it to a customer.

Given the representative is viewing a response template, when they edit the template and save the changes, then the updated template should reflect immediately in the dashboard for future use.

Customer service representatives are using the dashboard to prioritize urgent feedback.

Given the feedback entries have urgency tags, when a representative filters by 'urgent' in the dashboard, then only feedback marked as urgent should be displayed.

Feedback Categorization System

User Story: As a product manager, I want customer feedback to be automatically categorized so that I can focus on the most relevant insights and relay them to the appropriate teams for action.
Description: In this requirement, a categorization system will be implemented within the Feedback Dashboard that automatically organizes incoming customer feedback into predefined categories, such as complaints, suggestions, or inquiries regarding product availability. By leveraging machine learning algorithms, the system will improve its categorization accuracy over time, ensuring that the most relevant teams can address the issues promptly. This feature helps in simplifying the feedback management process by directing inquiries to the appropriate departments, fostering timely resolutions and continuous improvement based on customer insights.
Acceptance Criteria: New customer feedback is submitted through the Feedback Dashboard regarding product unavailability.

Given a new customer feedback submission labeled as an inquiry about product availability, When the categorization system processes the feedback, Then it should correctly classify it as 'Inquiry' within the system.

Customer service representatives review the categorized feedback to address common complaints.

Given that multiple feedback entries are submitted as complaints, When the categorization system organizes the feedback, Then the complaints should be grouped and easily accessible by the customer service team for follow-up actions.

Regular assessments are made to improve the categorization accuracy of the system based on feedback trends.

Given historical feedback data, When the machine learning algorithm analyzes the data and retrains the model, Then the categorization accuracy should improve by at least 10% based on a comparison of labeled test data before and after the training.

Management generates reports on categorized feedback to identify trends over the last month.

Given the feedback dashboard's reporting tool, When management requests a report for the last month's feedback, Then the report should accurately display the distribution of feedback across all defined categories with visual representation.

Feedback categorized as suggestions is sent directly to the product development team for review.

Given that a feedback entry is categorized as a suggestion, When it is processed by the system, Then it should automatically forward the suggestion to the product development team and log the action in the feedback history.

The system handles ambiguous feedback entries that may fit into multiple categories.

Given a feedback entry that contains both a complaint and a suggestion, When the categorization system processes the entry, Then it should categorize the feedback into both 'Complaint' and 'Suggestion' for comprehensive tracking and alert appropriate teams.

The categorization system provides real-time feedback on its performance metrics to the administrative users.

Given the categorization system is operational, When administrative users access the performance metrics dashboard, Then it should display real-time accuracy percentages, number of categorized entries, and any uncategorized feedback alerts.

User Access and Permissions Management

User Story: As a manager, I want to control user access to the Feedback Dashboard so that sensitive customer feedback data is protected while enabling my team to work efficiently based on their roles.
Description: This requirement includes building a user management system that regulates access to the Feedback Dashboard based on user roles. Different team members (e.g., customer service agents, managers, and analysts) will have varying levels of access to ensure sensitive information is protected while empowering employees to perform their duties effectively. The implementation will include customizable permission levels, allowing flexibility in adjusting user roles according to departmental changes. The main benefit of this feature is strengthening data security while ensuring efficiency in feedback management processes.
Acceptance Criteria: User Role-Based Access Control to the Feedback Dashboard

Given that a user with the role of customer service agent logs into the Feedback Dashboard, when they attempt to view detailed feedback analytics, then they should only see a summary view with restricted data access.

Customizable Permission Levels for User Roles

Given that an admin user wants to change the role permissions for a specific user, when they access the user management settings and adjust the permissions, then the changes should be saved and reflected immediately in the user's access when they next log in.

Audit Trail of User Access and Actions on the Feedback Dashboard

Given that a user accesses the Feedback Dashboard, when they perform any actions (e.g., viewing feedback details or exporting reports), then an audit log should be created that records the user ID, timestamp, and action performed.

Role-Specific Feedback Dashboard Customization

Given that a manager accesses the Feedback Dashboard, when they customize the dashboard layout and widgets according to their needs, then those customizations should be saved and replicated every time they log in to the dashboard.

Notifications for Unauthorized Access Attempts

Given that a user attempts to access a restricted area of the Feedback Dashboard, when an unauthorized access attempt occurs, then a notification should be sent to the admin user and logged in the audit trail.

Training Material Access Based on User Roles

Given that a new customer service agent is onboarded, when they log into the Feedback Dashboard for the first time, then they should be presented with tailored training materials that match their user role.

Customer Feedback Alerts

Automated alerts that notify customer service teams of emerging trends or spikes in negative feedback related to specific inventory items. This feature ensures timely intervention, allowing businesses to address customer concerns quickly and prevent potential escalations.

Requirements

Real-time Negative Feedback Detection

User Story: As a customer service manager, I want to receive immediate alerts on negative feedback trends related to our products so that I can address customer concerns quickly before they escalate.
Description: This requirement involves developing a system that automatically monitors customer feedback across various platforms in real-time, categorizing responses related to specific inventory items. By leveraging natural language processing, the system will identify keywords and sentiment trends that signify negative feedback spikes. The backend integration with the existing InvenSage infrastructure will ensure seamless data flow, enabling timely alerts to customer service teams about emerging issues. This capability is vital for maintaining customer trust and satisfaction, as it allows businesses to act proactively rather than reactively. Ultimately, this leads to enhanced customer experience through swift resolution of complaints and a reduction in potential escalations.
Acceptance Criteria: Real-time monitoring of customer feedback across multiple platforms for specific inventory items.

Given that customer feedback is received on various platforms, when negative feedback is detected, then the system shall categorize the feedback by inventory item and trigger an alert to the customer service team.

Categorization of feedback based on keywords and sentiment analysis for specific items.

Given that the system uses natural language processing, when feedback containing negative keywords is analyzed, then the system shall accurately categorize the feedback and update the sentiment trend accordingly.

Timely alerts sent to customer service teams upon detection of feedback spikes.

Given that a spike in negative feedback is identified, when the feedback surpasses a predefined threshold, then the system shall send an immediate alert to the customer service team with the relevant details.

Integration with existing InvenSage infrastructure for seamless data flow.

Given that the feedback monitoring system is integrated with InvenSage, when feedback is captured, then the system shall ensure that data flows seamlessly into the existing database without errors.

User interface for customer service teams to view alerts and feedback trends.

Given that alerts are generated, when customer service teams access the dashboard, then they shall see a real-time view of alerts, categorized feedback, and sentiment trends related to each inventory item.

Historical analysis of feedback trends to identify recurring issues.

Given that feedback is continuously monitored, when negative feedback trends are analyzed over the previous month, then the system shall identify any recurring inventory issues and present them in a report.

Automated Alert System

User Story: As a customer service representative, I want to receive immediate alerts when negative feedback spikes so that I can respond to customer issues as soon as possible.
Description: This requirement entails creating a robust alert system that sends notifications to customer service teams upon the detection of negative feedback trends. The alert system will utilize predefined thresholds, allowing for customization based on severity and frequency of feedback. Alerts can be sent via email, SMS, or in-app notifications, ensuring that the customer service teams are promptly informed irrespective of their location. This capability will facilitate quicker response times and enhance the team’s ability to manage customer dissatisfaction efficiently. Integration with existing tools and workflows will further streamline operations and improve team coordination during critical incidents.
Acceptance Criteria: Customer service team receives an alert for negative feedback on a specific inventory item over a defined threshold.

Given that the predefined threshold for negative feedback is set to 10 complaints in one week, when the feedback for a specific inventory item reaches or exceeds this threshold, then an automated alert should be sent to the customer service team via email and SMS.

Assessment of alert customization options by the customer service manager.

Given that a customer service manager has access to the alert system, when they customize the alert thresholds for negative feedback severity levels from low to high, then these settings should be saved and applied to future feedback inputs without errors.

Customer service team receives alerts through the integrated in-app notification system.

Given that the customer service team is logged into the application, when a negative feedback threshold is reached, then an in-app notification should be displayed immediately to the team, alerting them of the issue.

Evaluation of alert delivery channels effectiveness and response time.

Given that a spike in negative feedback occurs, when the alerts are triggered, then they should be delivered within 5 minutes across all channels (email, SMS, in-app) to ensure prompt awareness and action by the customer service team.

Testing integration with existing customer service tools for alert notifications.

Given that the customer service team uses Slack for internal communication, when the alert system is triggered, then the alerts should also be sent as a message to a designated Slack channel without delays.

Verification of logging and tracking alert history for performance analysis.

Given that alerts are sent for negative feedback, when a customer service representative accesses the alert history, then they should see a complete log of alerts with timestamps, feedback severity, and channels of delivery for analysis.

Assessment of user training effectiveness in using the alert system.

Given that customer service representatives have undergone training on the alert system, when they are tested on the functionality of the alert features, then at least 90% of participants should be able to successfully demonstrate the use of the system in real-time scenarios without assistance.

Feedback Trend Reporting Dashboard

User Story: As a business analyst, I want to access a feedback trends dashboard so that I can analyze customer sentiments and identify problematic inventory items quickly and effectively.
Description: This requirement focuses on developing a visualization dashboard that displays feedback trends over time, allowing businesses to easily analyze spikes in negative feedback per inventory item. The dashboard will feature graphical representations such as charts and heat maps, enabling quick insights into customer sentiments and product performance. By providing the ability to filter data by date ranges and product categories, users can identify patterns and make informed inventory decisions. This feature enhances strategic planning by highlighting issues that require attention and aids in preventing future negative feedback through data-driven actions.
Acceptance Criteria: Visualizing negative feedback trends over time for specific inventory items in the Feedback Trend Reporting Dashboard.

Given a user selects a specific product, when they access the Feedback Trend Reporting Dashboard, then they should see a line chart representing negative feedback trends over the past month.

Filtering feedback data by date range and product categories within the dashboard.

Given a user is on the Feedback Trend Reporting Dashboard, when they apply a date range filter and select specific product categories, then the displayed data should only include feedback for the selected date range and categories.

Receiving automated alerts for spikes in negative feedback related to specific inventory items.

Given that a product receives a spike in negative feedback within a 24-hour period, when this occurs, then the customer service team should receive an automated alert detailing the product and the nature of the feedback.

Displaying data in graphical formats such as heat maps on the dashboard.

Given a user accesses the Feedback Trend Reporting Dashboard, when they view the data representations, then they should see heat maps color-coded to indicate levels of negative feedback intensity for each product category.

Analyzing feedback patterns for informed inventory decision-making.

Given a user analyzes feedback trends on the dashboard, when they identify a consistent pattern of negative feedback for a specific product, then they should be able to generate a report summarizing the trends and suggested actions for inventory adjustments.

Ensuring the system loads quickly even with extensive data sets.

Given a user is accessing the Feedback Trend Reporting Dashboard, when they load the dashboard with complete historical data, then the dashboard should load within 3 seconds.

Keyword-Based Custom Alerts

User Story: As a product manager, I want to set up custom keyword alerts for specific products so that I can be notified when customers mention critical issues or concerns.
Description: This requirement involves creating a system that allows users to define specific keywords or phrases that trigger alerts when mentioned in customer feedback. By setting customized keyword alerts for particular products or issues, teams can focus on the feedback that matters the most to them. This user-driven aspect empowers customer service teams to prioritize their responses based on the context of feedback and manage their workload more effectively. Additionally, combining keyword alerts with sentiment analysis will enable the team to filter noise from valuable insights, thereby refining their customer service strategies.
Acceptance Criteria: User-defined keyword alerts for immediate feedback response

Given a user has access to the keyword alert settings, when they enter a keyword and save, then the system should generate an alert whenever that keyword is mentioned in customer feedback.

Multiple keywords can be set for a single inventory item

Given a user is in the keyword alert section, when they add multiple keywords for a specific product, then the system should allow saving of all keywords without errors and trigger alerts for any of them.

Integration of sentiment analysis with keyword alerts

Given a user has set keyword alerts, when feedback containing a keyword is analyzed, then alerts should only be generated if the sentiment analysis predicts negative sentiment associated with that keyword.

Modify existing keyword alerts

Given a user has previously set keyword alerts, when they choose to edit the keywords and save, then the system should update the alerts accordingly and confirm the changes to the user.

Alert notifications via multiple channels

Given the keyword alerts have been triggered, when the alerts are generated, then notifications should be sent to the user via email and within the SaaS platform dashboard.

Tracking the history of keyword-triggered alerts

Given that keyword alerts are being triggered, when the user accesses the alert history, then they should see a log of all alerts triggered with timestamps and related feedback details.

Integration with CRM Systems

User Story: As a customer service agent, I want customer feedback to be integrated with our CRM so that I can have a full view of customer interactions and manage issues more effectively.
Description: This requirement focuses on integrating the automated feedback alert system with existing Customer Relationship Management (CRM) systems. By ensuring that customer feedback data flows directly into the CRM, customer service teams will have a comprehensive view of customer interactions, including feedback trends related to inventory items. This integration will minimize data silos and streamline processes, allowing support teams to access feedback alongside customer history for a more holistic understanding of issues at hand. It will facilitate more informed customer interactions and enhance the overall effectiveness of the customer service function.
Acceptance Criteria: Customer service representatives receive alerts when customer feedback for a specific inventory item shows a significant increase in negative trends, allowing them to take appropriate action.

Given a spike in negative customer feedback for a specific inventory item, When the alert system triggers, Then an automated notification is sent to the relevant customer service representatives with detailed feedback insights.

The CRM system automatically updates to include feedback received from customers about specific inventory items, ensuring complete visibility for the customer service team.

Given customer feedback is collected through the automated alert system, When it is integrated with the CRM, Then the feedback data should be accessible within the customer's profile in real-time.

Customer service teams review the integrated feedback to identify trends and take corrective actions on inventory items that are generating negative sentiments.

Given the integration of customer feedback in the CRM, When the support team views a customer's interaction history, Then they can see customer feedback trends highlighted alongside relevant customer interactions for informed decision-making.

Customer service representatives can efficiently access customer feedback data related to inventory interactions when handling customer inquiries.

Given a customer inquiry related to an inventory item, When the representative accesses the CRM, Then they can view real-time feedback data concerning that specific inventory item within the customer profile.

The automated alert system provides analytics reports to management that summarize negative feedback trends for review and action planning.

Given that customer feedback is collected and processed, When the report is generated, Then it should accurately reflect trends, item specifics, and the volume of feedback received over a specified period.

Customer service teams are notified of feedback patterns in advance, allowing proactive measures to be taken before issues escalate.

Given ongoing monitoring of customer feedback, When significant negative trends are detected, Then alerts should be generated to notify teams of potential issues within 24 hours.

The integration should function seamlessly with widely used CRM systems to ensure no disruption in workflow for customer service teams.

Given the integration process, When testing with popular CRM systems, Then it should successfully populate feedback data without errors and maintain system performance.

Feedback Response Templates

User Story: As a customer service manager, I want to provide my team with response templates to common negative feedback so that they can respond quickly and maintain consistency in our messaging.
Description: This requirement involves creating a library of response templates that customer service teams can use to respond to negative feedback efficiently. By providing pre-approved responses tailored to common issues identified through the feedback alert system, teams can ensure consistency in messaging and reduce response time. These templates can be customizable to address specific customer situations while maintaining standard protocols, thereby enhancing communication effectiveness. This feature supports the overall aim of improving customer satisfaction by enabling rapid responses and resolving issues before they escalate.
Acceptance Criteria: Usage of Feedback Response Templates in Customer Service Communication

Given a customer service team member is notified of negative feedback through the alert system, When they access the response template library, Then they can find and select an appropriate pre-approved response template to address the customer’s issue within 2 minutes.

Customizing Feedback Response Templates

Given a customer service team member selects a feedback response template for a specific issue, When they modify the template with customer-specific details, Then the customized template must be saved without losing the original template for future use.

Ensuring Effective Communication with Response Templates

Given a customer service team uses a response template to reply to negative feedback, When the response is sent to the customer, Then the customer satisfaction score should improve by at least 10% within the next feedback cycle based on customer follow-up ratings.

Training Customer Service Teams on Feedback Response Templates

Given new customer service team members are onboarded, When they complete the training on using feedback response templates, Then they should demonstrate the ability to use the templates effectively in simulated scenarios with a 90% success rate.

Monitoring the Usage of Feedback Response Templates

Given that the feedback response templates are in use, When customer service managers review performance metrics after one month, Then at least 75% of customer service interactions should utilize the response templates.

Feedback Response Templates Integration with Alert System

Given a new negative feedback alert is generated, When a customer service representative accesses the alert, Then the associated response template should be automatically suggested as part of the feedback alert details.

Feedback Integration Module

The capability to integrate real-time customer feedback with inventory management systems, allowing for immediate adjustments based on customer sentiment. This feature ensures that inventory decisions reflect customer needs and preferences, enhancing overall product offering strategy.

Requirements

Real-time Feedback Collection

User Story: As a retailer, I want to collect real-time customer feedback so that I can quickly adjust my inventory to meet customer preferences and demands.
Description: The Real-time Feedback Collection requirement involves implementing a mechanism to capture customer feedback instantly across various channels, including websites, mobile apps, and in-store interactions. This functionality should allow users to submit ratings, reviews, and suggestions conveniently. By integrating this feedback into the inventory management system, businesses can adapt their stock levels, product offerings, and even marketing strategies based on customer sentiment. This ensures that inventory decisions are aligned with customer preferences, leading to improved customer satisfaction and optimized inventory turnover.
Acceptance Criteria: Real-time feedback submission through the mobile app during a product purchase.

Given a customer is making a purchase in the mobile app, When they submit a rating or review for a product on the purchase completion screen, Then the feedback should be captured and sent to the inventory management system within 5 seconds.

Collecting feedback via website after a product return.

Given a customer has returned a product on the website, When they are prompted to provide feedback on the return process, Then their feedback should be collected and stored in the database for analysis, ensuring the submission process takes no longer than 3 minutes.

Capturing in-store customer feedback via a kiosk or tablet.

Given a customer is using an in-store kiosk to provide feedback after shopping, When they submit their comments and ratings on the tablet, Then the data must be transmitted to the central inventory system immediately and accessible for real-time reporting.

Analyzing customer feedback to adjust inventory levels.

Given the inventory management system has received new customer feedback, When the warehouse manager reviews the analytics dashboard, Then the suggested adjustments to stock levels should reflect the latest customer sentiment within 10 minutes of feedback collection.

Integrating feedback from multiple channels into a unified report.

Given feedback is collected from mobile, website, and in-store interactions, When a user requests a report of combined customer feedback, Then the report should present all feedback in a singular view with the ability to filter by channel within 2 seconds.

Notifying inventory managers of urgent feedback trends.

Given there is an unusual spike in negative customer feedback about a particular product, When the feedback exceeds a set threshold for alerts, Then an automated notification should be sent to inventory managers within 1 minute.

Generating actionable insights from customer feedback analytics.

Given the system compiles customer feedback data, When the inventory manager analyzes the insights report, Then the system should provide at least three actionable recommendations for product adjustments based on customer sentiment trends.

Sentiment Analysis Engine

User Story: As a product manager, I want to analyze customer feedback sentiment so that I can make data-driven decisions regarding inventory management and product offerings.
Description: The Sentiment Analysis Engine is a crucial component that processes collected customer feedback to evaluate sentiment, categorizing it into positive, neutral, or negative sentiments. This analysis will help managers understand overall customer satisfaction and identify trends or issues with specific products or services. The engine should leverage AI algorithms to analyze feedback over time, providing insights on how customer sentiment affects inventory decisions. Having this capability enables businesses to make informed adjustments to their stock levels and product offerings, ultimately enhancing customer experiences and reducing waste.
Acceptance Criteria: Sentiment Analysis Engine processes customer feedback collected from an integrated feedback system after a product launch and categorizes the sentiment accurately.

Given customer feedback is collected from various channels, when the Sentiment Analysis Engine is triggered, then it must categorize at least 90% of the feedback accurately as positive, neutral, or negative within 5 seconds.

Inventory managers review sentiment trends and make inventory adjustments based on analysis reports generated by the Sentiment Analysis Engine.

Given the Sentiment Analysis Engine has processed feedback over the last month, when the inventory manager accesses the analysis report, then they should see a clear visualization of sentiment trends affecting inventory decisions regarding specific products.

The Sentiment Analysis Engine identifies a sudden increase in negative sentiment for a certain product and triggers an alert for the inventory management team.

Given a spike in negative sentiment is detected for a product, when this occurs, then the system must generate an alert within 1 minute and notify the inventory management team via the integrated dashboard.

Sentiment analysis results are integrated into the inventory management dashboard for real-time decision-making by retailers and wholesalers.

Given updated sentiment analysis is made available, when an inventory manager logs into the dashboard, then they must see the latest sentiment scores reflected alongside stock levels for all products in real-time.

Historical sentiment data is analyzed to identify patterns over time, informing future stock levels and product offerings.

Given historical data is available, when the Sentiment Analysis Engine runs an analysis, then it should provide a report indicating three actionable insights about future inventory decisions based on past sentiment trends.

The Sentiment Analysis Engine undergoes a performance test to ensure it handles maximum expected user load during peak times.

Given a load test scenario simulates 500 simultaneous feedback submissions, when the Sentiment Analysis Engine processes this load, then it must maintain a processing time of under 5 seconds per feedback submission with 99% accuracy.

Inventory Adjustment Alerts

User Story: As a warehouse manager, I want to receive alerts about changing customer sentiment so that I can promptly adjust our inventory levels and avoid shortages or excess stock.
Description: The Inventory Adjustment Alerts requirement entails establishing a notification system that triggers alerts for managers when significant changes in customer sentiment are detected. This feature must integrate smoothly with existing inventory systems to allow users to receive timely updates regarding stock levels that need adjustment based on real-time feedback. Alerts should be customizable, allowing users to set thresholds for various sentiment levels, ensuring proactive inventory management that minimizes overstock or stockouts while responding to customer needs effectively.
Acceptance Criteria: Customer sentiment changes significantly after a new product launch and triggers inventory adjustment alerts.

Given a new product is launched, when customer sentiment drops below a predefined threshold, then a notification alert should be sent to inventory managers via email and the dashboard.

Inventory managers want to customize alert thresholds based on different sentiment levels for various products in their catalog.

Given an inventory manager is setting up alerts, when they customize the sentiment threshold for a product, then the system should save the new threshold and activate alerts accordingly.

A sudden spike in positive customer feedback on social media requires a review of stock levels for a best-selling product.

Given that customer sentiment exceeds the positive threshold, when the alert is triggered, then inventory managers should receive a real-time notification on their dashboard and via SMS.

An inventory manager reviews the list of all currently set thresholds for customer sentiment alerts to ensure accuracy.

Given the manager navigates to the alert settings page, when they view the list of products with set thresholds, then they should see all products along with their customized sentiment thresholds clearly displayed.

During a high-demand sales event, feedback indicates potential stockouts for popular items, necessitating adjustments to inventory levels.

Given that customer sentiment indicates potential stockouts, when the system detects sentiment below the critical threshold, then alerts should trigger to reorder stock automatically or inform the inventory manager.

The system tracks historical sentiment data to identify trends and adjust inventory strategies over time.

Given the historical data of customer sentiment, when the manager analyzes the trend report, then it should display insights that link sentiment changes to inventory levels for informed decision-making.

A user needs to turn off alerts temporarily during planned maintenance to avoid unnecessary notifications.

Given an inventory manager decides to deactivate alerts, when they toggle the alert setting to 'off', then the system should stop sending notifications until reactivated.

Customer Feedback Dashboard

User Story: As a business analyst, I want to view a comprehensive dashboard of customer feedback so that I can identify trends and support strategic decisions regarding inventory management.
Description: The Customer Feedback Dashboard requirement is focused on creating a user-friendly interface that visualizes collected customer feedback and sentiment analysis. It should incorporate graphical representations of data such as trends, patterns, and comparisons over time, allowing stakeholders to quickly interpret customer sentiment regarding different products. The dashboard should be customizable to display relevant KPIs for different teams, thereby facilitating informed discussions and strategic decision-making regarding inventory management and product offerings.
Acceptance Criteria: Customer views the Customer Feedback Dashboard to assess product performance based on recent user feedback collected over the last month.

Given the Customer Feedback Dashboard is open, when the user selects the 'Last Month' timeframe, then the dashboard should display graphical representations of feedback trends, allowing the user to see performance changes in products over that period.

A stakeholder customizes the dashboard to focus on specific KPIs relevant to the marketing team, such as average customer rating and feedback volume for outreach campaigns.

Given that a stakeholder is on the dashboard view, when they select the customization options and save their changes, then the dashboard should update to show only the chosen KPIs without any unrelated metrics.

The inventory management team uses the Customer Feedback Dashboard during a weekly strategy meeting to discuss potential product adjustments based on customer sentiment.

Given the meeting is ongoing and the Dashboard is displayed, when the team members review the sentiment analysis for a selected product, then they should be able to extract actionable insights that lead to at least one proposed inventory adjustment based on customer feedback.

An administrator accesses the Customer Feedback Dashboard to generate a report summarizing monthly feedback trends for upper management.

Given that the admin is on the dashboard, when they request a report for the last three months, then the system should generate a PDF report including key insights and data visualizations accurately reflecting the requested timeframe and feedback summaries.

A user encounters an error when loading the Customer Feedback Dashboard and reports the issue to the support team.

Given a user experiences a load failure on the dashboard, when they report the issue, then the support team should create an incident ticket, and the dashboard should have a functional status check mechanism to notify the user about the failure and expected fix time.

Integrate Feedback into Reorder Processes

User Story: As an inventory planner, I want customer feedback to influence our reorder processes so that we can align stock levels with actual customer preferences and avoid unnecessary costs.
Description: The Integrate Feedback into Reorder Processes requirement aims to ensure that customer feedback directly influences the automated reorder processes. When a product receives significant negative feedback, the system should flag it for review within the reorder system to prevent unnecessary restocking. Conversely, when positive feedback is detected, it should prompt consideration for increasing stock levels of high-demand products. This integration enhances the agility of inventory management, ensuring stock levels reflect real customer demand and enhancing overall profitability.
Acceptance Criteria: Feedback triggering reorder analysis for a product receiving significant negative reviews.

Given a product receives negative feedback exceeding the predefined threshold, When the system processes the reorder, Then the product is flagged for review and restock is temporarily halted.

Feedback influencing stock increase decisions for high-demand products.

Given a product receives positive feedback indicating high customer satisfaction, When the feedback is analyzed, Then a recommendation is generated to increase stock levels for that product.

Real-time monitoring of customer feedback to initiate reorder modifications.

Given the feedback integration module is active, When customer feedback is submitted, Then the system automatically updates the reorder status of affected products in real-time.

Report generation on the impact of customer feedback on inventory decisions.

Given the feedback module has collected data over a month, When a report is generated on stock adjustments made, Then the report includes before-and-after stock levels and financial impact.

Ensuring feedback processing does not delay reorder timelines.

Given that customer feedback is received, When the system assesses reorder requirements, Then the processing time for routine reorder operations remains within established guidelines regardless of feedback volume.

Feedback categorization ensuring targeted inventory actions.

Given a mix of feedback types (positive, negative, neutral), When feedback is categorized, Then the system must initiate tailored interactions with inventory for improving or reducing stock based on category outcomes.

Feedback loop closure on flagged products impacting decision-making.

Given a product is flagged for review due to negative feedback, When the product is reviewed and changes are implemented, Then feedback should be re-evaluated to assess the effectiveness of the change on customer sentiment.

Feedback History Log

User Story: As a sales manager, I want access to a historical log of customer feedback so that I can assess the effectiveness of previous inventory decisions and refine our strategies accordingly.
Description: The Feedback History Log requirement provides a historical record of all customer feedback received, enabling businesses to track trends over time, and analyze how inventory changes impact customer satisfaction. This log should be accessible within the inventory management platform and allow users to filter by product, time period, and sentiment. This will provide insights into past decisions, helping refine future inventory strategies and fostering continuous improvement in customer satisfaction.
Acceptance Criteria: User views the Feedback History Log for a specific product to analyze customer sentiment and trends over a defined period.

Given that the user navigates to the Feedback History Log, When they select a specific product and a time period, Then the system displays the relevant customer feedback records with filters applied correctly.

User searches for feedback sentiment regarding inventory changes and how it correlates with customer satisfaction metrics.

Given that the user has access to the Feedback History Log, When they filter results by sentiment and time, Then the system accurately reflects corresponding feedback entries along with satisfaction metrics.

User generates a report of feedback trends over a quarter to compare against inventory adjustments made during that period.

Given that the user selects the option to generate a trend report for the feedback history, When the user specifies the quarter, Then the report includes visual graphs and tables summarizing feedback trends compared to inventory changes.

User accesses the Feedback History Log from their dashboard to make data-driven inventory decisions.

Given that the user has permissions to view the Feedback History Log, When they access the log from their dashboard, Then the log loads without errors and displays all feedback entries available to their role.

User explores the historical feedback data to identify patterns in customer preferences and product performance.

Given that the user applies filters for product type and specific time periods, When they analyze the displayed feedback data, Then the system must show accurate trends indicating customer preferences and product performance ratings.

User saves a customized view of the Feedback History Log to quickly access frequently used filters.

Given that the user configures a specific view of the Feedback History Log with preferred filters, When they save this view, Then the system should allow retrieval of this customized view upon future log access.

User compares feedback history across multiple products to determine which products require inventory adjustments.

Given that the user selects multiple products in the Feedback History Log, When they request a comparison, Then the system displays a comprehensive overview of the feedback for all selected products, highlighting key differences and trends.

Follow-Up Engagement Tool

A follow-up module that allows businesses to reach out to customers after an initial feedback submission, inviting them to partake in surveys or further discussions. This engagement not only demonstrates commitment to customer satisfaction but also gathers deeper insights into inventory performance.

Requirements

Customer Feedback Notification

User Story: As a retail manager, I want to receive notifications whenever a customer submits feedback so that I can engage with them promptly and address their concerns or inquiries.
Description: This requirement encompasses the development of a notification system that alerts businesses when customers submit feedback. By facilitating prompt engagement, businesses can address concerns or gather more information on inventory performance. Implementing this feature will enhance customer satisfaction and build loyalty while enabling businesses to track and analyze feedback trends effectively.
Acceptance Criteria: Customer submits feedback through the InvenSage platform, triggering an immediate notification to the appropriate business personnel responsible for follow-up engagement.

Given a customer submits feedback, when the submission is processed, then a notification is sent to the designated business personnel within 5 minutes.

The business personnel receives the feedback notification and accesses the customer's feedback details via the notification link.

Given a notification is received, when the business personnel clicks on the notification link, then the feedback details are displayed correctly in the user interface.

The feedback notification includes relevant customer information and feedback context to enable effective follow-up engagement by business personnel.

Given a feedback submission is received, when the notification is generated, then it includes the customer's name, feedback summary, and timestamp of submission.

The follow-up engagement tool records each notification response, tracking engagement metrics such as response times and customer interactions.

Given a business personnel engages with the customer after receiving notification, when the engagement is recorded, then the system updates the engagement metrics accordingly.

Businesses can customize notification settings to select which feedback submissions trigger notifications and assign responsible personnel.

Given an admin accesses notification settings, when they customize triggers and personnel assignments, then the changes are saved and reflected in the notification system.

The notification system provides analytics on customer feedback trends based on the engagement metrics recorded.

Given feedback submissions and engagements are recorded, when an admin views the analytics dashboard, then it shows trends in customer feedback and follow-up engagement success rates over time.

Survey Distribution Mechanism

User Story: As a customer service representative, I want to send tailored surveys to customers who provided feedback so that I can gather specific insights that drive improvements in our inventory management.
Description: The survey distribution mechanism allows businesses to send personalized follow-up surveys to customers after they provide initial feedback. This feature will be designed to ensure that surveys are tailored to specific inventory transactions or experiences, thus maximizing response rates and quality of insights. By integrating this functionality, InvenSage can help businesses gather more nuanced data for enhancement and optimization of their inventory management strategies.
Acceptance Criteria: Survey invitation is sent to customers who have provided feedback on their recent purchase experience with specific inventory items.

Given a customer has submitted feedback on a recent purchase, when the follow-up engagement tool processes the feedback, then a personalized survey invitation should be sent within 24 hours via email.

The survey content is customized based on the customer's feedback regarding specific inventory items.

Given a customer feedback comment is linked to an inventory item, when generating the survey invitation, then the content should mention the specific item and tailor the questions to the feedback provided.

Tracking and reporting on the delivery and response rates of the surveys sent to customers.

Given a survey has been sent out, when tracking the survey engagement, then the system should record and display the survey delivery success rate and response rate in the admin dashboard within 72 hours.

Ensuring the follow-up survey is mobile-friendly and accessible on various devices.

Given a survey invitation is sent, when accessed via a mobile device, then the survey should be responsive and maintain usability on different screen sizes without functionality issues.

Identifying the effectiveness of the follow-up engagement tool in improving customer satisfaction scores over time.

Given multiple surveys are sent after feedback submissions, when analyzing the collected data, then there should be a measurable increase in customer satisfaction scores in the following quarter compared to the previous quarter.

Integrating the survey responses into the inventory performance metrics for actionable insights.

Given survey responses have been collected, when the inventory performance metrics are generated, then the responses should be analyzed and included in the overall inventory optimization recommendations.

Enabling the option for customers to provide additional comments or suggestions in the follow-up survey.

Given a survey is presented to customers, when designing the survey form, then there should be an open text field available for customers to input additional comments or suggestions.

Engagement Analytics Dashboard

User Story: As a business owner, I want an analytics dashboard that shows the engagement metrics following customer feedback submissions so that I can assess the effectiveness of our follow-up strategies and make necessary adjustments.
Description: This requirement involves the creation of a dashboard that provides insights and analytics related to customer engagement following feedback submissions. It will present key performance indicators (KPIs), such as response rates, engagement trends, and overall customer satisfaction scores. This functionality will allow businesses to monitor the effectiveness of their follow-up efforts, ultimately leading to data-driven and informed decision-making.
Acceptance Criteria: User views the Engagement Analytics Dashboard to assess the effectiveness of follow-up engagement efforts after customer feedback submissions.

Given a user accesses the Engagement Analytics Dashboard, When the dashboard loads, Then all KPI metrics including response rates, engagement trends, and customer satisfaction scores must be displayed accurately within 5 seconds.

A business analyst filters the engagement analytics data based on a specific time period to identify trends.

Given a user selects a specific time range, When the filter is applied, Then only data corresponding to the selected period must be reflected on the dashboard, ensuring that all visualizations update accordingly.

A user shares the Engagement Analytics Dashboard with team members for collaborative analysis.

Given a user clicks on the 'Share' button on the dashboard, When they input team members' email addresses and send the invite, Then a confirmation message must be displayed, and all invited team members should receive an email with dashboard access within 2 minutes.

A user interacts with the visualizations on the dashboard to drill down into specific metrics.

Given the user clicks on a specific KPI metric on the dashboard, When the user selects the drill-down option, Then the system must present detailed analytics of the selected metric, including historical data and relevant patterns, within 3 seconds.

The Engagement Analytics Dashboard updates in real-time as new follow-up engagement data comes in.

Given that new feedback data is submitted, When the dashboard is open, Then it must refresh automatically within 1 minute to reflect the new data without any manual intervention.

A user generates a report from the Engagement Analytics Dashboard to summarize engagement performance.

Given a user selects the report generation option, When they specify reporting parameters and submit, Then a downloadable report must be created and available in PDF format within 10 seconds, containing all relevant KPIs and visualizations.

The dashboard provides tooltips and explanations for each KPI to enhance user understanding of the metrics presented.

Given the user hovers over any KPI metric on the dashboard, When the tooltip is displayed, Then it must provide a concise definition and importance of the metric ensuring users can easily understand the data presented.

Automated Follow-Up Messaging

User Story: As a marketing manager, I want to set up automated messages to follow up with customers after they provide feedback so that I can maintain engagement without manually sending each message.
Description: The automated messaging functionality will enable businesses to set up personalized follow-up messages that are triggered after a customer submits feedback. This feature will ensure consistent communication and allow businesses to nurture relationships with customers without manual intervention. By incorporating automation, this capability helps strengthen customer engagement while also freeing up staff resources for more strategic tasks.
Acceptance Criteria: Follow-Up Engagement Tool Activation

Given a customer submits feedback, when the automated follow-up messaging feature is activated, then a personalized follow-up message is sent within 24 hours of feedback submission.

Customization of Follow-Up Messages

Given the automated follow-up messaging feature is enabled, when a business customizes the follow-up message template, then the changes should be reflected in the next automated message sent.

Triggering Follow-Up Messages for Multiple Feedback Types

Given various types of customer feedback have been submitted, when feedback triggers the automated follow-up system, then the respective follow-up message corresponding to each feedback type should be sent appropriately.

Tracking Follow-Up Engagement Rates

Given the follow-up messages are sent, when the engagement analytics dashboard is accessed, then it should display the engagement rates (open and response rates) for the follow-up messages sent.

Unsubscribe Option in Follow-Up Messages

Given a follow-up message is received by a customer, when the customer clicks the unsubscribe link, then the follow-up messaging system should remove that customer from future automated messages.

Response Collection from Follow-Ups

Given a follow-up message includes a survey or feedback form, when a customer submits their response, then that response should be recorded in the system and associated with the customer’s original feedback.

Resource Optimization after Automation Implementation

Given the automated follow-up messaging is implemented, when staff workload is analyzed, then there should be a measurable reduction in time spent on manual follow-ups by at least 50%.

Multichannel Communication Support

User Story: As a customer engagement specialist, I want to reach customers through their preferred communication channels after they provide feedback so that I can increase response rates and engagement.
Description: This requirement focuses on expanding the follow-up engagement tool to support multiple communication channels, such as email, SMS, and social media. By allowing businesses to connect with customers on their preferred platforms, this feature aims to improve engagement rates and accommodate varying customer preferences. The multichannel approach is crucial for businesses looking to enhance their customer engagement strategy.
Acceptance Criteria: Multichannel customer engagement through email, SMS, and social media platforms for follow-up after initial feedback.

Given a customer has submitted feedback, when the business selects a communication channel (email, SMS, social media), then the follow-up message should be successfully sent through the selected channel within 5 minutes.

Tracking and reporting the engagement rates for follow-ups sent through multiple channels.

Given a follow-up campaign has been executed, when the reports are generated, then the engagement rate for each communication channel should be accurately displayed in the dashboard.

Ensuring customer preferences are respected in engagement strategies.

Given a customer has specified their preferred communication channels, when sending follow-ups, then only the selected channels should be utilized to reach out to the customer.

Collecting survey responses after follow-up engagement through different channels.

Given a follow-up message is sent, when the customer responds to the survey, then the response should be recorded in real-time and reflected in the analytics dashboard.

Checking the performance and response time of the multichannel communication system.

Given a follow-up is triggered, when it is sent simultaneously across all selected channels, then each channel should acknowledge receipt within 2 seconds, ensuring system efficiency.

Allowing customizable follow-up messages based on the communication channel.

Given a business is setting up a follow-up campaign, when customizing the message per channel, then each channel's message should retain its unique features and formats as per the selected channel's standards.

Customer Preference Tags

An innovative tagging system that tracks customer feedback related to specific products or inventory categories. This feature delivers actionable insights regarding customer preferences and trends, enabling businesses to adapt their inventory strategies effectively and enhance product offerings.

Requirements

Tagging System Implementation

User Story: As a retailer, I want to tag customer preferences to products so that I can better understand trends and adjust my inventory accordingly.
Description: The Tagging System Implementation feature involves creating a robust framework for allowing users to add, edit, and manage customer preference tags associated with specific products or inventory categories. This will include a user-friendly interface for tagging products, enabling businesses to track customer feedback effectively. The functionality will support the analysis of customer preferences and trends, providing invaluable insights that drive inventory adjustments and tailored marketing strategies. Integrating this system with existing inventory modules will ensure that businesses can maximize the potential of their inventory based on actual customer feedback, thereby improving customer satisfaction and optimizing stock levels.
Acceptance Criteria: As a user, I want to add a customer preference tag to a specific product so that I can track customer feedback related to that product.

Given the user is on the product detail page, when the user clicks on the 'Add Tag' button and enters a valid tag name, then the tag should be saved and displayed in the tags section of the product details.

As a user, I want to edit an existing customer preference tag to ensure it accurately reflects customer feedback.

Given the user is on the product detail page with existing tags, when the user selects a tag and clicks on 'Edit', changes the tag name, and saves it, then the updated tag should replace the previous tag name.

As a user, I want to delete a customer preference tag that is no longer needed to keep my tagging system organized.

Given the user is on the product detail page with existing tags, when the user selects a tag and clicks on 'Delete', then the tag should be removed from the product and not displayed in the tags section.

As a user, I want to view all customer preference tags associated with a product to analyze customer feedback effectively.

Given the user is on the product detail page, when the user views the 'Tags' section, then all associated tags for that product should be displayed clearly and concisely.

As a manager, I want to generate a report that aggregates customer preference tags across multiple products to identify trends.

Given the manager is on the reporting page, when the user selects the 'Generate Tag Report' option, then a report should be created showing all tags used across products along with their respective counts.

As a user, I want to filter products by customer preference tags to quickly find items that meet specific feedback criteria.

Given the user is on the product listing page, when the user selects a tag from the filter options, then the product list should update to show only products associated with that tag.

Feedback Collection Mechanism

User Story: As a customer, I want to easily provide feedback on products so that my opinions can influence the store's inventory decisions.
Description: The Feedback Collection Mechanism requirement aims to provide a systematic approach to gather customer feedback on products and categories. This functionality will utilize surveys, quick feedback forms, and rating systems integrated into the customer interaction points, such as post-purchase emails and on-product pages. By streamlining this process, businesses can gather valuable data that directly influences their inventory decisions. The implementation will ensure that feedback is easy to submit and is categorized correctly for easier analysis, resulting in a more responsive inventory management system that aligns with customer needs.
Acceptance Criteria: Customer Feedback Submission via Email Post-Purchase

Given a post-purchase email is sent to the customer, when they click on the feedback link, then they should be able to submit their feedback through an easy-to-use feedback form that captures product ratings and comments.

Feedback Collection on Product Pages

Given a product page is viewed, when a customer interacts with the rating system, then their rating should be recorded and associated with the respective product for future analysis.

Integration with Existing Inventory System

Given feedback is collected, when the feedback is categorized, then it should automatically integrate with the existing inventory management system to adjust stock levels based on customer preferences.

Survey Completion Rate Tracking

Given a customer receives a feedback survey, when they complete the survey, then the completion rate should be recorded and reported to ensure the effectiveness of the feedback collection mechanism.

Real-time Feedback Analysis Dashboard

Given feedback data has been collected, when accessing the analytics dashboard, then users should be able to view real-time insights into customer preferences and trends related to specific products.

Automated Feedback Categorization

Given that feedback has been submitted, when the feedback is processed, then it should be automatically categorized into predefined tags for easier analysis and reporting.

Reporting Dashboard for Tag Analysis

User Story: As an inventory manager, I want a dashboard that visualizes customer preference tags and trends so that I can make data-driven inventory decisions.
Description: The Reporting Dashboard for Tag Analysis will provide users with a comprehensive visual representation of the tagged customer preferences and product trends. This dashboard will feature analytics tools that summarize feedback data over customizable time frames, highlight emerging trends, and display correlations between customer preferences and sales data. Users will be able to generate reports that include insights on which tags are most impactful on sales and which products might need reevaluation. This analytical capability empowers businesses to make informed decisions about their inventory and marketing strategies.
Acceptance Criteria: User views the Reporting Dashboard for Tag Analysis to assess customer feedback trends related to specific products over the past quarter.

Given the user is on the Reporting Dashboard, when they select a time frame of 'last 3 months', then the dashboard displays customer preference tags and associated product trends for that period.

User generates a report from the Reporting Dashboard focusing on the most impactful tags on sales for a particular product category.

Given the user has selected a product category and clicks 'Generate Report', then the report should display the associated tags and sales data, highlighting the top 5 tags affecting sales positively.

User wants to analyze the correlation between sales data and customer preference tags over the past year.

Given the user has selected the 'Correlate Tags with Sales' option, when they specify a time frame of 'last 12 months', then the dashboard should visualize the correlation between selected customer preference tags and the corresponding sales data over that period.

User adjusts the time frame on the Reporting Dashboard to view historical data for specific inventory tags.

Given the user modifies the time frame to 'last year', when they apply the changes, then the dashboard should refresh and display all relevant customer preference tags and trends over the last year.

User accesses the Reporting Dashboard and views emerging trends from customer feedback tags.

Given the user is on the Reporting Dashboard, when they select the 'Emerging Trends' section, then the dashboard should list the top 3 emerging tags based on recent feedback with a summary of their potential impact on sales.

User seeks to filter the displayed data by product categories to refine their analysis on customer preferences.

Given the user is on the Reporting Dashboard, when they choose specific product categories from the filter options, then the dashboard should update to only show feedback tags related to the selected categories.

User shares the reporting insights with their team through an export feature.

Given the user has generated a report, when they click the 'Export' button, then the report should be downloaded in a CSV or PDF format that includes all insights derived from customer preference tags and sales data.

Integration with Sales Data

User Story: As a data analyst, I want to see how customer preference tags correlate with sales data so that I can identify which product adjustments might benefit sales.
Description: The Integration with Sales Data requirement focuses on how the customer preference tags will interact with and enhance existing sales data. This integration will allow the system to correlate customer feedback on tags with actual sales performance. The collected data will be automatically analyzed to discover insights such as which customer preferences align with higher sales and how different tags impact overall performance. This interconnectedness will provide businesses with a holistic view of inventory performance, enabling more strategic stock management and refined marketing efforts.
Acceptance Criteria: Customer feedback regarding product preferences is collected and tagged systematically during monthly sales reviews to align insights with sales data.

Given that customer preference feedback is tagged in the system, when sales data is analyzed, then all relevant tags should correlate with their respective sales performance metrics, allowing for a clear understanding of customer preferences driving sales.

The system integrates customer preference tags with real-time sales data to identify trends in purchasing behavior during seasonal promotions.

Given that seasonal promotions are active, when sales data is reviewed with corresponding customer preference tags, then the system should provide a report highlighting which tags align with increased sales during specific promotions.

A retailer wants to identify underperforming products based on customer preference feedback and sales data integration.

Given customer preference tags and their corresponding sales data, when a retailer requests a report on underperforming products, then the system should return a list of products with low sales that have received positive customer feedback tags.

After implementing the tagging system, a business conducts a quarterly review to assess the impact of customer feedback on sales performance.

Given that quarterly sales performance data is available, when the review is conducted, then there should be a documented correlation showing at least a 15% improvement in sales of products with positive customer preference tags compared to previous quarters without tags.

A user wants to modify or add tags based on new customer feedback directly through the dashboard during daily operations.

Given that feedback is received from customers, when a user accesses the dashboard to modify or add tags, then changes should be successfully saved and reflect real-time updates in the customer preference tagging system—indicating no loss of data.

The system automatically generates insights based on the integration of customer preference tags with sales data for the marketing team.

Given the integration is fully operational, when customer preference data and sales metrics are combined, then the marketing team should receive actionable insights delivered through automated reports highlighting key trends and strategic recommendations at least once a month.

An inventory manager needs to check the performance of specific tags related to a product line over time to fine-tune inventory management.

Given existing tags and their performances, when an inventory manager queries the historical data for a particular tag, then the system should present a timeline analysis showing sales performance, customer engagement, and any correlation with inventory levels for that product line.

User Training and Documentation

User Story: As a store staff member, I want clear training and resources on how to use the tagging system so that I can effectively implement it in our inventory management processes.
Description: The User Training and Documentation requirement encompasses the development and delivery of educational materials focused on the new tagging feature and its utilization. This requirement includes creating step-by-step guides, video tutorials, and FAQs that assist users in understanding how to leverage customer preference tags effectively. Training sessions should also be scheduled for key staff members to ensure they are proficient in using the new system. This initiative is vital for maximizing user adoption and ensuring businesses can fully utilize the benefits of the tagging feature.
Acceptance Criteria: User accesses the online documentation for Customer Preference Tags before the first training session.

Given the user navigates to the InvenSage documentation page for customer preference tags, when they search for 'Customer Preference Tags', then they should see relevant step-by-step guides, video tutorials, and FAQs listed prominently, ensuring at least 90% of users find the needed resources easily.

A training session is held for key staff to learn about the Customer Preference Tags feature.

Given that a training session has been scheduled, when key staff members participate in the training, then 100% of participants should report improved understanding of how to use the tagging system, as measured by a feedback survey conducted immediately after the session.

A user attempts to use the new tagging feature without prior training.

Given a user tries to implement customer preference tags, when they refer to the documentation, then the user should successfully complete the tagging process with no more than two questions, indicating that the documentation is clear and comprehensive enough.

Post-training, users should apply the Customer Preference Tags to their products effectively.

Given that users have completed the training, when they use the tagging system within a week, then at least 75% of users should be able to create and apply customer preference tags correctly without external assistance, evaluated through a follow-up survey.

Users need to seek help regarding customer preference tags after utilizing the training materials.

Given users reach out for support regarding the tagging feature, when the help desk logs the inquiries, then less than 10% of users should require assistance, indicating effective training and documentation.

Video tutorials are available and accessible to users at all times.

Given that the video tutorials are published on the website, when users access the tutorials, then they should load successfully within 5 seconds and have an average user rating of at least 4 out of 5 stars within the first month after release.

Users are able to find answers to common questions about tagging in the FAQs.

Given users are looking for answers in the FAQ section, when they enter keywords related to customer preference tags, then at least 80% of the queries should return relevant results, ensuring user-friendly navigation and accessibility.

Press Articles

InvenSage Revolutionizes Inventory Management with Cutting-Edge AI Innovations: FOR IMMEDIATE RELEASE

InvenSage Revolutionizes Inventory Management with Cutting-Edge AI Innovations

San Francisco, CA – January 8, 2025 – InvenSage, an industry-leading inventory management SaaS platform, is thrilled to announce its latest innovations aimed at empowering small and mid-sized retailers, wholesalers, and e-commerce businesses with transformative inventory management capabilities. This new offering incorporates real-time tracking, AI-driven demand forecasting, and intuitive dashboards designed to enhance operational efficiencies and boost profitability.

Today’s retail environment demands agility and precision. InvenSage meets these needs through its advanced features, which include Smart Threshold Adjustment, Dynamic Reorder Alerts, and AI-Powered Sales Insights. These tools provide users with actionable insights and automate routine processes, significantly reducing wastage and enhancing stock optimization.

“Inventory management has evolved from a tedious manual task to a sophisticated science driven by data,” said Alex Carter, CEO of InvenSage. “With our new features, we’re making it easier for businesses to adapt and thrive in a competitive market. Our users can focus more on strategic growth rather than operational hurdles.”

InvenSage integrates seamlessly with existing systems, enabling users to experience swift implementation without significant disruptions to their operations. By harnessing AI, the platform predicts demand trends, adjusts reorder processes in real-time, and ensures optimal stock levels across multiple locations.

Retail Managers, E-commerce Entrepreneurs, Warehouse Operators, and Supply Chain Analysts are set to benefit greatly from this innovative platform. With roles specifically designed to leverage InvenSage’s powerful capabilities, these professionals will enjoy enhanced collaboration and decision-making processes facilitated by real-time data sharing and interactive dashboards.

The Intelligent Inventory Health Score feature assesses stock performance, guiding teams on which items need immediate attention while also offering reorder recommendations based on historical sales data and expected demand trends. This proactive approach not only empowers users to maintain inventory levels but also transforms inventory challenges into growth opportunities.

InvenSage further taps into the potential of augmented reality with features like Virtual Shelf Management and Interactive Stock Layouts, offering users unparalleled visualization capabilities to optimize product placements within their stores.

“With InvenSage, we’re not just providing software; we’re offering a comprehensive solution that begins with intuitive design and expands to powerful analytics,” mentioned Sarah Williams, Chief Product Officer. “Our commitment to empowering our customers reflects in every feature we launch.”

To learn more about InvenSage’s latest offerings and how they can revolutionize your inventory management practices, visit us at www.invensus.com or contact us directly at press@invensus.com.

Contact:
InvenSage PR Team
Email: press@invensus.com
Phone: (415) 123-4567

InvenSage: Transforming Inventory Management for a New Era.

### END ###

InvenSage Launches Groundbreaking Features for Enhanced Retail Management: FOR IMMEDIATE RELEASE

InvenSage Launches Groundbreaking Features for Enhanced Retail Management

New York, NY – January 8, 2025 – InvenSage, the pioneering SaaS platform for inventory management, announces the launch of several groundbreaking features that aim to redefine how retailers manage their stock. Incorporating state-of-the-art technology, these features are tailored to meet the needs of small and mid-sized retailers, wholesalers, and e-commerce businesses.

The new enhancements, including Automated Stock Alerts, Inventory Health Score, and AI-Powered Sales Insights, provide retailers with real-time data for better stock management and customer satisfaction. By integrating predictive analytics, InvenSage enables businesses to anticipate customer demand and streamline their inventory processes effectively.

“Our mission has always been to empower retailers with the tools they need to succeed,” said David Lee, COO of InvenSage. “We recognize the challenges that come with inventory management, and our latest features are specifically designed to tackle these issues head-on.”

InvenSage’s Automated Stock Alerts notify users in real-time when inventories fall below crucial thresholds, thereby preventing stockouts and ensuring customers' needs are always met. Coupled with the Inventory Health Score feature, retailers gain insights into stock turnover and overall inventory health, prioritizing their restocking efforts where it matters most.

E-commerce Entrepreneurs and Retail Managers can leverage the AI-Powered Sales Insights feature to analyze trends and adapt their merchandising strategies accordingly. This immediate access to insights allows for agility in product placement and marketing initiatives, enhancing overall customer experience.

Moreover, by incorporating features like Interactive Data Visualization and Collaborate Inventory Reports, InvenSage fosters greater collaboration across teams, breaking down silos that can hinder effective inventory management.

“Technology continues to play an increasingly critical role in retail, and we’re excited to deliver solutions that are not only innovative but also user-friendly,” stated Emily Tran, Head of Customer Success. “These features are a testament to our commitment to enhancing the user experience and the growth of our clients.”

InvenSage is now available for businesses of all sizes. For more information and to explore these new features, visit www.invensus.com or reach out directly via press@invensus.com.

Contact:
InvenSage PR Team
Email: press@invensus.com
Phone: (212) 987-6543

InvenSage: Where Innovation Meets Inventory Management.

### END ###

InvenSage Unveils Innovative AI-Powered Tools for Next-Gen Inventory Management: FOR IMMEDIATE RELEASE

InvenSage Unveils Innovative AI-Powered Tools for Next-Gen Inventory Management

Austin, TX – January 8, 2025 – InvenSage, a leading provider of inventory management solutions, is pleased to announce the launch of its innovative AI-powered tools designed to substantially enhance the inventory management experiences for retailers, wholesalers, and e-commerce businesses. The platform is engineered to empower users with precise data analytics and automated processes, positioning their operations for optimal efficiency.

The introduction of features such as Trend Prediction Alerts, Supplier Lead Time Integration, and Custom Alert Channels marks a pivotal shift in how businesses approach inventory control. By combining advanced technology with user-friendliness, InvenSage enables organizations to function more dynamically.

“Operating in today’s fast-paced environment requires businesses to be not only reactive but also proactive,” noted Jessica Morgan, VP of Product Development at InvenSage. “Our AI-driven tools provide the foresight needed to navigate challenges and capitalize on opportunities.”

These new features allow businesses to predict sales trends and the timing of inventory replenishment with unprecedented accuracy. For example, the Trend Prediction Alerts inform users about critical changes in inventory data, enabling swift responses to patterns that could impact stock availability.

Moreover, InvenSage's Supplier Lead Time Integration takes into account delivery schedules, which helps businesses maintain optimal stock levels while considering vendor performance. The Custom Alert Channels give users flexible options to receive notifications, maximizing their operational efficiency and responsiveness.

“By integrating these cutting-edge features, we are confident that businesses will not only save on operational costs but also improve customer satisfaction through better inventory availability and management,” added Morgan.

InvenSage is committed to continuously evolving its offerings. Users can explore these enhanced tools on the official website or contact the support team for more details about implementation and benefits.

To find out more about InvenSage’s new AI-powered features, visit www.invensus.com or reach out to us via email at press@invensus.com.

Contact:
InvenSage PR Team
Email: press@invensus.com
Phone: (512) 234-5678

InvenSage: Charting the Future of Inventory Management.

### END ###

Create products with ease

Product Details

Personas

Inventory Innovator

E-commerce Efficiency Expert

Warehouse Wizard

Business Bridger

Product Ideas

Product Features

Smart Threshold Adjustment

Requirements

Automated Data Analysis

Real-Time Alerts

User Dashboard Integration

Historical Data Reporting

Predictive Analytics Enhancement

Custom Alert Channels

Requirements

Multi-Channel Notification System

Alert Customization Options

Centralized Alert Dashboard

Automated Alert Scheduling

Performance Analytics for Notifications

Reorder Recommendations

Requirements

Dynamic Reorder Quantities

Sales Trend Analysis

Integration with E-commerce Platforms

User Customization Features

Alerts for Low Stock Levels

Inventory Health Score

Requirements

Dynamic Scoring System

Alerts for Low Health Scores

Dashboard Integration

Historical Performance Analysis

User Customization Preferences

Multi-Location Sync

Requirements

Dynamic Reorder Alerts

Centralized Inventory Dashboard

Location-specific Stock Optimization

Multi-Location Reporting

Automated Inventory Reordering

AI-Powered Sales Insights

Requirements

Sales Trend Analysis

Real-Time Notifications

User-Friendly Dashboard Integration

Customizable Reporting Tools

Integration with Third-Party Analytics Tools

Supplier Lead Time Integration

Requirements

Supplier Lead Time Data Capture

Dynamic Reorder Alerts

Supplier Performance Analytics

Lead Time Adjustment Interface

Integration with Supplier Systems

Real-Time Data Sharing

Requirements

Centralized Dashboard Access

Automated Data Synchronization

Cross-Departmental Notifications

Interactive Data Visualization

Requirements

Dynamic Chart Customization

Real-Time Data Refresh

Historical Data Comparison

Export Visual Reports

Interactive Trend Analysis

User-Defined Alerts for Trends

Customizable Report Templates

Requirements

Dynamic Template Selection

Template Customization Options

Scheduled Reporting

Export Options for Reports

Access Control for Report Templates

Role-Based Access Control